MP 501 SM

D255/D256/M281/M282
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2016 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh USA, Inc.

Rev 03/08/2017
LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D255 MP 501SPF MP 501SPF MP 501SPF
D255-17 MP 501SPF TL MP 501SPF TL MP 501SPF TL
D256 MP 601SPF MP 601SPF MP 601SPF
M281 SP 5300DN SP 5300DN SP 5300DN
M281-17 SP 5300DN TL MP 501SPF TL MP 501SPF TL
M282 SP 5310DN SP 5310DN SP 5310DN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 07/2016 Original Printing
D255/D256/M281/M282
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

1.1 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION ...................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 OPTIONS ............................................................................................................ 1-2
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS .................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 2-4
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART ........................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 ACCESSORY CHECK ........................................................................................ 2-5
MP 501/601 ............................................................................................................. 2-5
SP 5300/5310 .......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 2-8
2.2.4 SMC STORAGE .................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.5 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES (MP 501/601 ONLY) ............... 2-9
2.2.6 SETTINGS ACCORDING TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT ............................. 2-14
Meter Click Charge................................................................................................ 2-14
2.2.7 MOVING THE MACHINE .................................................................................. 2-15
2.2.8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE .................................................................... 2-16
2.3 CASTER TABLE TYPE M24 (D3C7-01) ...................................................................... 2-19
2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-19
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................... 2-21
When installing with the paper feed unit ............................................................... 2-21
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02) ............................................................... 2-22
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-22
When installing with the caster table ..................................................................... 2-23
Installing the optional paper feed unit on the caster table .................................... 2-23
When installing two or more optional paper feed units ......................................... 2-29
Installing the main machine on the optional paper feed unit................................. 2-32
SM i D255/D256/M281/M282
2.5 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12 (B870-21) (MP 501/601 ONLY)
2-38
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-38
2.6 NFC CARD READER TYPE M24 (D3CP-08) (MP 501/601 ONLY) ............................ 2-45
2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-45
2.7 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09) .................................. 2-60
2.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-60
2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (MP 501/601) .................................................. 2-62
After Installing the HDD ......................................................................................... 2-79
2.7.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (SP 5300/5310) ............................................... 2-80
After Installing the HDD ......................................................................................... 2-92
2.8 HARD DISK DRIVE OPTION TYPE P8 (M500-05) (SP 5300/5310 ONLY) ................ 2-93
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-93
After Installing the HDD ....................................................................................... 2-106
2.9 INTERNAL OPTIONS ................................................................................................ 2-107
2.9.1 LIST OF SLOTS .............................................................................................. 2-107
2.10 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17) ................................... 2-108
2.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-108
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 2-108
2.11 IEEE 802.11 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M24 (M500-08) ............................................ 2-109
2.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-109
2.12 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE D (D566-01) (MP 501/601 ONLY)....... 2-110
2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-110
2.13 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M19 (D3BC-28, 29) ............................. 2-111
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-111
Interface Board .................................................................................................... 2-111
What Do the LED Indicators Mean?.................................................................... 2-115
Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting .................................................................. 2-115
IP Address Setting ............................................................................................... 2-116
Check All Connections ........................................................................................ 2-117
2.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04) (MP 501/601 ONLY) ....... 2-118
2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-118
D255/D256/M281/M282 ii SM
2.15 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01) .............................................. 2-119
2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-119
2.16 SD CARD OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 2-120
2.16.1 SD CARD SLOTS............................................................................................ 2-120
2.17 SD CARD APPLI MOVE...................................................................................... 2-121
2.17.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 2-121
2.17.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE.................................................................................. 2-121
2.17.3 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................................... 2-122
2.17.4 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................................... 2-122
2.18 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, 24, 25) (MP 501/601 ONLY) ........................ 2-124
2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-124
2.18.3 RECOVERY PROCEDURE ............................................................................ 2-128
2.19 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M24 (D3CP-12) ....................................... 2-129
2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-129
2.20 IPDS UNIT TYPE M24 (M500-02, 03, 04) .......................................................... 2-130
2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-130
2.21 VM CARD TYPE P8 (M500-09, 10, 11) (SP 5300/5310 ONLY) ......................... 2-131
2.21.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-131
2.22 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03) (MP 501/601 ONLY)
2-132
2.22.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 2-132
2.22.2 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................................... 2-132
2.22.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE .................................................... 2-133
Seal Check and Removal .................................................................................... 2-134
2.22.5 CONFIGURING "AUTO ERASE MEMORY" (PERFORMED BY THE CUSTOMER)
2-138
2.23 SECURITY SETTING .......................................................................................... 2-140
2.23.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION ........................................................ 2-140
2.23.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY (MP 501/601) .............................................. 2-141
Before You Begin the Procedure ......................................................................... 2-141
Using Auto Erase Memory................................................................................... 2-142
2.23.3 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY (SP 5300/5310) ........................................... 2-143
Before You Begin the Procedure ......................................................................... 2-143
SM iii D255/D256/M281/M282
Using Auto Erase Memory................................................................................... 2-144
Checking the Auto Erase Memory Status ........................................................... 2-144
2.23.4 HDD ENCRYPTION (MP 501/601) ................................................................. 2-145
Before You Begin the Procedure: ........................................................................ 2-145
Enable Encryption Setting ................................................................................... 2-146
Backing Up the Encryption Key........................................................................... 2-148
Encryption Key Restoration ................................................................................. 2-149
2.23.5 HDD ENCRYPTION (SP 5300/5310) .............................................................. 2-150
Before You Begin the Procedure: ........................................................................ 2-150
Enable Encryption Setting ................................................................................... 2-151
Backing Up the Encryption Key........................................................................... 2-152
Encryption Key Restoration ................................................................................. 2-152
2.24 @REMOTE SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 2-155
2.25 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS ............................................................. 2-160
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................... 3-1

3.1 YIELD PARTS SETTINGS ............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 YIELD PARTS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ................................................. 3-1
After installing the new yield parts ........................................................................... 3-1
Operation check ...................................................................................................... 3-2
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 4-1

4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH .................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH ................................................................................................... 4-1
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch) ..................................................... 4-1
Shutdown Method.................................................................................................... 4-2
Forced Shutdown .................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 BEFOREHAND .............................................................................................................. 4-3
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.1 PRINTING ........................................................................................................... 4-5
Registration: Leading Edge/Side-to-Side ................................................................ 4-5
Blank Margin............................................................................................................ 4-6
Main Scan Magnification ......................................................................................... 4-7
4.4.2 SCANNING (MP 501/601 ONLY) ........................................................................ 4-8
Registration: Platen Mode ....................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT (MP 501/601 ONLY) ........................................... 4-9
Registration ............................................................................................................. 4-9
4.5 FACTORY SP SETTINGS ........................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.1 MP 501/601 ....................................................................................................... 4-10
D255/D256/M281/M282 iv SM
4.5.2 SP 5300/5310 .................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6 EXTERIOR COVERS (MP 501/601) ........................................................................... 4-14
4.6.1 SCANNER FRONT COVER.............................................................................. 4-14
4.6.2 FRONT COVER ................................................................................................ 4-15
4.6.3 RIGHT UPPER COVER .................................................................................... 4-20
4.6.4 RIGHT LOWER COVER ................................................................................... 4-22
4.6.5 LEFT UPPER COVER ...................................................................................... 4-26
4.6.6 LEFT MIDDLE COVER ..................................................................................... 4-27
4.6.7 LEFT LOWER COVER...................................................................................... 4-29
4.6.8 LEFT REAR COVER ......................................................................................... 4-30
4.6.9 REAR UPPER COVER ..................................................................................... 4-31
4.6.10 REAR MIDDLE COVER .................................................................................... 4-33
4.6.11 REAR LOWER COVER .................................................................................... 4-35
4.6.12 REAR CENTER STAY ....................................................................................... 4-36
4.6.13 REAR LEFT STAY ............................................................................................. 4-37
4.6.14 PAPER EXIT COVER ........................................................................................ 4-38
4.6.15 PAPER EXIT TRAY ........................................................................................... 4-39
4.6.16 CONTROLLER COVER .................................................................................... 4-45
4.7 EXTERIOR COVERS (SP 5300/5310) ........................................................................ 4-47
4.7.1 UPPER COVER ................................................................................................ 4-47
4.7.2 FRONT COVER ................................................................................................ 4-50
4.7.3 RIGHT COVER.................................................................................................. 4-54
4.7.4 LEFT UPPER COVER ...................................................................................... 4-58
4.7.5 LEFT LOWER COVER...................................................................................... 4-60
4.7.6 LEFT REAR COVER ......................................................................................... 4-61
4.7.7 REAR UPPER COVER ..................................................................................... 4-62
4.7.8 REAR MIDDLE COVER .................................................................................... 4-64
4.7.9 REAR LOWER COVER .................................................................................... 4-66
4.7.10 CONTROLLER COVER .................................................................................... 4-67
4.8 OPERATION PANEL (MP 501/601) ............................................................................. 4-68
4.8.1 OPERATION PANEL ......................................................................................... 4-68
Before Installing the New Operation Panel ........................................................... 4-73
4.8.2 INTERNAL PARTS ............................................................................................ 4-73
4.9 OPERATION PANEL (SP 5300/5310) ......................................................................... 4-74
4.9.1 OPERATION PANEL ......................................................................................... 4-74
4.9.2 OPU BOARD ..................................................................................................... 4-75
4.10 SCANNER UNIT (MP 501/601 ONLY) .................................................................. 4-76
4.10.1 SCANNER UNIT................................................................................................ 4-76
4.10.2 SCANNER CARRIAGE ..................................................................................... 4-78
SM v D255/D256/M281/M282
4.11 LASER UNIT (MP 501/601) ......................................................................................... 4-82
4.11.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION .......................................................................... 4-82
4.11.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 4-82
4.12 LASER UNIT (SP 5300/5310) ............................................................................... 4-85
4.12.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION .......................................................................... 4-85
4.12.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 4-85
4.13 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-88
4.13.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................................... 4-88
4.14 DRUM UNIT .......................................................................................................... 4-91
4.14.1 DRUM UNIT ...................................................................................................... 4-91
4.14.2 CHARGE ROLLER............................................................................................ 4-93
4.15 TRANSFER UNIT.................................................................................................. 4-95
4.15.1 TRANSFER ROLLER........................................................................................ 4-95
4.15.2 DISCHARGE PLATE UNIT ............................................................................... 4-97
4.16 FUSING UNIT........................................................................................................ 4-98
4.16.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................................... 4-98
4.17 PAPER EXIT UNIT (MP 501/601) ....................................................................... 4-103
4.17.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-103
4.18 PAPER EXIT UNIT (SP 5300/5310) .................................................................... 4-107
4.18.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-107
4.19 PAPER FEED UNIT............................................................................................. 4-111
4.19.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER, PICKUP ROLLER ................................................... 4-111
4.19.2 SEPARATION ROLLER .................................................................................. 4-112
4.20 BYPASS TRAY UNIT ........................................................................................... 4-114
4.20.1 BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER ................................................................... 4-114
4.21 DUPLEX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 4-116
4.21.1 DUPLEX UNIT ................................................................................................. 4-116
4.22 DRIVE UNIT ........................................................................................................ 4-123
4.22.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR.................................................................................... 4-123
4.22.2 MAIN DRIVE UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-125
Main Motor ........................................................................................................... 4-126
Drum Motor.......................................................................................................... 4-127
4.23 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................................... 4-128
4.23.1 CONTROLLER BOX ....................................................................................... 4-128
Controller Box (MP 501/601) ............................................................................... 4-128
Controller Box (SP 5300/5310) ........................................................................... 4-132
4.23.2 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................................. 4-135
Controller Board (MP 501/601) ........................................................................... 4-135
Controller Board (SP 5300/5310) ........................................................................ 4-138
D255/D256/M281/M282 vi SM
NVRAM on the controller board .......................................................................... 4-141
4.23.3 BICU ................................................................................................................ 4-144
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BiCU................................................. 4-145
4.23.4 IOB................................................................................................................... 4-147
IOB (MP 501/601)................................................................................................ 4-147
IOB (SP 5300/5310) ............................................................................................ 4-148
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the IOB ................................................... 4-149
4.23.5 CONNECT-LEFT PCB .................................................................................... 4-150
4.23.6 FUSING THERMISTOR CONNECTION PCB ................................................ 4-152
4.23.7 POWER PACK ................................................................................................ 4-153
4.23.8 PSU ................................................................................................................. 4-154
4.23.9 HDD (MP 501/601 ONLY) ............................................................................... 4-156
Adjustment after Replacement ............................................................................ 4-157
4.24 FANS ................................................................................................................... 4-158
4.24.1 PSU FAN ......................................................................................................... 4-158
4.24.2 DIRECTION OF INSTALLING THE FANS ...................................................... 4-159
4.25 ARDF (MP 501/601 ONLY) ................................................................................. 4-160
4.25.1 ARDF UNIT ..................................................................................................... 4-160
4.25.2 ARDF PAPER FEED ROLLER, ARDF PICKUP ROLLER.............................. 4-162
4.25.3 ARDF FRICTION PAD .................................................................................... 4-163
4.25.4 ARDF INVERTER MOTOR ............................................................................. 4-163
4.25.5 ARDF PAPER FEED MOTOR, ARDF PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......... 4-165
4.26 PAPER FEED UNIT (PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100) ........................................... 4-168
4.26.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER, PICKUP ROLLER ................................................... 4-168
4.26.2 SEPARATION ROLLER .................................................................................. 4-169
4.26.3 MAIN BOARD .................................................................................................. 4-171
4.26.4 DRIVE UNIT .................................................................................................... 4-172
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................. 5-1

5.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 FIRMWARE TYPE ............................................................................................... 5-1
MP 501/601 ............................................................................................................. 5-1
SP 5300/5310 .......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 PROCEDURE...................................................................................................... 5-4
Update procedure (MP 501/601) ............................................................................. 5-5
Update procedure (SP 5300/5310) ......................................................................... 5-8
5.1.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING .......................................................... 5-9
5.2 RFU UPDATING THE FIRMWARE.............................................................................. 5-16
5.2.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION ................................................................. 5-16
SM vii D255/D256/M281/M282
5.3 PACKAGE FIRMWARE UPDATE (MP 501/601 ONLY) .............................................. 5-17
5.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-17
5.3.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE ....................................................................................... 5-18
5.3.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ..................................................... 5-20
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE)..................... 5-21
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE ................................ 5-23
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE .......................................... 5-24
5.3.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD .................................................................................... 5-27
5.4 UPDATING JAVAVM .................................................................................................... 5-29
5.4.1 MP 501/601 ....................................................................................................... 5-29
Creating an SD Card for Updating ........................................................................ 5-29
Updating Procedure .............................................................................................. 5-29
List of Error Messages .......................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.2 SP 5300/5310 .................................................................................................... 5-32
Deactivating SDK Applications .............................................................................. 5-32
Updating JavaVM .................................................................................................. 5-33
Activating SDK Applications .................................................................................. 5-34
5.5 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS ............................................................................... 5-35
5.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-35
Security of the Operation Log ............................................................................... 5-37
5.5.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOGS ................................................................... 5-37
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log .............................................................. 5-37
5.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................................................ 5-40
5.6.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ................................. 5-40
5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM.................................................... 5-41
5.7 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT.................................................................................. 5-43
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-43
Import/export conditions ........................................................................................ 5-43
5.7.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (MP 501/601) ...................................................... 5-43
Data that can be imported and exported ............................................................... 5-43
Data that cannot be imported or exported ............................................................ 5-43
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 5-44
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 5-45
5.7.3 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (SP 5300/5310) .................................................. 5-46
Data that cannot be imported or exported ............................................................ 5-46
5.7.4 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (MP 501/601) ...................................................... 5-48
D255/D256/M281/M282 viii SM
5.7.5 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (SP 5300/5310) ................................................... 5-51
5.7.6 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ...................... 5-53
5.8 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD .................................................................. 5-55
5.8.1 INFORMATION LIST ......................................................................................... 5-55
5.8.2 DOWNLOAD ..................................................................................................... 5-56
5.8.3 UPLOAD ............................................................................................................ 5-57
5.9 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION ........................................................................... 5-58
5.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-58
SMC List Card Save .............................................................................................. 5-58
5.9.2 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................... 5-58
MP 501/601 ........................................................................................................... 5-58
SP 5300/5310 ........................................................................................................ 5-60
5.9.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS...................................................... 5-61
5.9.4 ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................................................ 5-62
5.10 TEST PATTERN PRINTING .................................................................................. 5-63
5.10.1 MP 501/601 ....................................................................................................... 5-63
5.10.2 SP 5300/5310 .................................................................................................... 5-65
6. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................... 6-1
6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE........................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CODES ..................................................................................... 6-1
Service Call Conditions ........................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 SC LOGGING ...................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT (MP 501/601) .......................................................... 6-2
6.2 SERVICE CALL 101-195 ............................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1 SC100 (ENGINE: SCANNING) (MP 501/601 ONLY) ......................................... 6-5
6.2.2 SC100 (ENGINE: OTHERS) ............................................................................. 6-13
6.3 SERVICE CALL 202-270 ............................................................................................. 6-14
6.3.1 SC200 (ENGINE: IMAGE WRITING) ................................................................ 6-14
6.4 SERVICE CALL 303-396 ............................................................................................. 6-16
6.4.1 SC300 (ENGINE: IMAGING 1: CHARGE, DEVELOPMENT) .......................... 6-16
6.4.2 SC300 (ENGINE: IMAGING 2: AROUND THE DRUM).................................... 6-17
6.5 SERVICE CALL 490-491 ............................................................................................. 6-19
6.5.1 SC400 (ENGINE: IMAGING 3: AROUND THE DRUM).................................... 6-19
SM ix D255/D256/M281/M282
6.6 SERVICE CALL 501-582 ............................................................................................. 6-23
6.6.1 SC500 (ENGINE: PAPER TRANSPORT 1: PAPER FEED, DUPLEX,
TRANSPORT) .............................................................................................................. 6-23
6.6.2 SC500 (ENGINE: PAPER TRANSPORT 2: FUSING, OTHERS) ..................... 6-33
6.6.3 SC500 (ENGINE: PAPER TRANSPORT 3: PAPER FEED, DUPLEX, TRANSPORT,
FUSING)....................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.7 SERVICE CALL 622-691 ............................................................................................. 6-45
6.7.1 SC600 (ENGINE: COMMUNICATION AND OTHERS) .................................... 6-45
6.7.2 SC600 (CONTROLLER) ................................................................................... 6-54
6.8 SERVICE CALL 700..................................................................................................... 6-58
6.8.1 SC700 (ENGINE: PERIPHERALS) (MP 501/601 ONLY) ................................. 6-58
6.9 SERVICE CALL 816-899 ............................................................................................. 6-60
6.9.1 SC800 (CONTROLLER) ................................................................................... 6-60
6.10 SERVICE CALL 900-998....................................................................................... 6-88
6.10.1 SC900 (ENGINE: OTHERS) ............................................................................. 6-88
6.10.2 SC900 (CONTROLLER) ................................................................................... 6-90
6.11 JAM DETECTION ........................................................................................................ 6-93
6.11.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 6-93
6.11.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ............................................................... 6-93
6.11.3 SENSOR LAYOUT .......................................................................................... 6-100
MP 501/601 ......................................................................................................... 6-100
SP 5300/5310 ...................................................................................................... 6-101
6.11.4 PAPER SIZE CODES ...................................................................................... 6-103
6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ............................................................................ 6-105
6.12.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................................. 6-105
Skewed image ..................................................................................................... 6-105
Toner sticking to the right side area on the second side of the paper ................ 6-105
Image quality failure due to the fixing failure....................................................... 6-107
Toner scattered .................................................................................................... 6-108
6.12.2 PAPER TRANSPORT ..................................................................................... 6-112
Paper jam occurred in the paper path between Tray 1 and around the registration
roller ..................................................................................................................... 6-112
Paper jam (J001) occurred after removing the jammed paper from the registration
section ................................................................................................................. 6-114
Non-feed jam in ARDF (MP 501/601 Only) ......................................................... 6-116
6.12.3 OTHERS .......................................................................................................... 6-116
Troubles that can be improved by executing drum refresh mode ...................... 6-116
Problem at regular intervals ................................................................................ 6-117
SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed ......................................................... 6-118
D255/D256/M281/M282 x SM
Rev. 02/09/2017
SC672 (Controller start up error) is displayed ....................................................6-119
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................ 7-1

7.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 MP 501/601 COMPONENT LAYOUT / PAPER PATH ....................................... 7-1
SP 5300/5310 Component Layout / Paper Path ................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 7-4
MP 501/601 Switches & Sensors .......................................................................... 7-4
SP 5300/5310 Switches & Sensors ...................................................................... 7-6
MP 501/601 Drive unit, Fans................................................................................. 7-7
SP 5300/5310 Drive unit, Fans ............................................................................. 7-8
MP 501/601 Electrical Components ...................................................................... 7-9
SP 5300/5310 Electrical Components .................................................................7-11
MP 501/601 Others ............................................................................................. 7-12
SP 5300/5310 Others ......................................................................................... 7-13
7.2 SCANNER UNIT (MP 501/601 ONLY)....................................................................... 7-14
7.3 LASER UNIT ............................................................................................................. 7-15
7.4 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .............................................................................................. 7-16
7.5 DRUM UNIT .............................................................................................................. 7-17
7.5.1 DRUM ............................................................................................................. 7-17
7.5.2 CLEANING UNIT ............................................................................................ 7-18
7.6 TRANSFER UNIT ...................................................................................................... 7-19
7.7 FUSING UNIT ........................................................................................................... 7-20
7.8 PAPER EXIT UNIT .................................................................................................... 7-22
7.9 DUPLEX UNIT........................................................................................................... 7-24
7.10 PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................................................................ 7-25
7.11BYPASS TRAY UNIT ................................................................................................. 7-27
7.12 ARDF (MP 501/601 ONLY) ................................................................................. 7-28
7.12.1 ORIGINAL FEED SECTION............................................................................ 7-28
7.12.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT SECTION AND EXIT SECTION ............................. 7-30
7.13 ENERGY SAVE .................................................................................................. 7-32
7.13.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES .............................................................................. 7-32
Timer Settings ..................................................................................................... 7-32
Return to Stand-by Mode .................................................................................... 7-32
Recommendation ................................................................................................ 7-33
Energy Save Effectiveness ................................................................................. 7-33
SM xi D255/D256/M281/M282
READ THIS FIRST
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of the symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Spring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed [A]
LEF Long Edge Feed [B]
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Enterprise
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows®10 Home
Microsoft® Windows®10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows®10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows®10 Education
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New
None
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS
CONFIGURATION
1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE
No. Item Machine Code
D255-17 (NA)
MP 501SPF D255-27 (EU)
D255-29 (AP)
1
D256-17 (NA)
MP 601SPF D256-27 (EU)
D256-29 (AP)
M281-17 (NA)
M281-27 (EU)
SP 5300DN
M281-29 (AP)
M281-21 (CHN)
2
M282-17 (NA)
M282-27 (EU)
SP 5310DN
M282-29 (AP)
M282-21 (CHN)
SM 1-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
1.1.2 OPTIONS
No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
D3C2-01
*1
1 Paper Feed Unit PB1100 (NA/EU/AP) Yes Yes
D3C2-02 (CH)
2 Caster Table Type M24 D3C7-01 Yes Yes
D3AC-23 (NA)
- OCR Unit Type M13 D3AC-24 (EU) Yes No
D3AC-25 (AP)
M500-02 (NA)
M500-03 (EU)
- IPDS Unit Type M24 Yes Yes
M500-04
(AP/CHN)
XPS Direct Print Option Type

- D3CP-12 Yes Yes
M24
M500-09 (NA)
M500-10 (EU)
- VM CARD Type P8 No Yes
M500-11
(AP/CHN)
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-2 SM
No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
Information
Product
D3BC-28 (NA)
USB Device Server Option
- D3BC-29 Yes Yes
Type M19
(EU/AP)
Extended USB Board Type

- D3BS-01 Yes Yes
M19
IEEE 1284 Interface Board

- D3C0-17 Yes Yes
Type M19
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit

- M500-08 Yes Yes
Type M24
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type

- D566-01 Yes No
D
File Format Converter Type

- D3BR-04 Yes No
M19
Enhanced Security HDD

- D792-09 Yes Yes
Option Type M10
Hard Disk Drive Option Type

- M500-05 No Yes
P8
- NFC Card Reader Type M24 D3CP-08 Yes No
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
- D3BS-03 Yes No
Type M19
Optional Counter Interface

- B870-21 Yes No
Unit Type M12
D3CP-05 (NA)
Fax Connection Unit Type
- D3CP-06 (EU) Yes No
M24
D3CP-07 (AP)
*1 You can attach up to four paper feed units.
SM 1-3 D255/D256/M281/M282
 The following options are installed by the end user. For instructions on installing these
options, please refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601,
"Operating Instruction" for SP 5300/5310.
 Paper Feed Unit PB1100
 Caster Table Type M24
 IPDS Unit Type M24
 XPS Direct Print Option Type M24
 VM CARD Type P8
 USB Device Server Option Type M19
 Extended USB Board Type M19
 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
 IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24
 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D
 File Format Converter Type M19
 Service installation is required for installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100 with Caster Table
Type M24 depending on the machine configuration. For details, please refer to page 2-22
"Paper Feed Unit PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02)".
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-4 SM
INSTALLATION
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
2∼3 08/12/2016 Added Important and Note in Installation Procedure
79 09/15/2016 Corrected After Installing HDD for Option Type M10
106 09/15/2016 Corrected After Installing HDD for Option Type P8
115 08/09/2016 Removed Notes for Energy Mode Setting.
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Installation
Optimum Environmental Conditions
Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as follows:
 White area: permissible range

 Blue area: recommended range
Service Environmental Conditions
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
 Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
 Humidity: 15 to 80%
(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the
machine at a temperature around 59 to 77 °F or less (15 to 25 °C), and humidity around 30 to
70%.
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
 Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
 Avoid locations with vibrations.
 Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
 Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
 Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor material is delicate, when the machine is moved after installation, the casters may
damage the floor.
SM 2-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's
health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room
or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To
maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly
ventilated.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the machine near the power source, and provide clearance as shown:
1. Rear: Over 300 mm (11.9")

2. Right: Over 200 mm (7.9")
3. Front: Over 500 mm (19.7")
4. Left: Over 300 mm (11.9")
 The 500 mm clearance for the front is only for pulling out the paper tray. If an operator
stands in front of the machine, more space is required.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-2 SM
2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS

MP 501/601
W×D×H (including ARDF and operation panel): 475 × 504 × 645 mm (18.8" × 19.9" × 25.4")
Installation
 [A]: 475 mm (18.8")
 [B]: 645 mm (25.4")
SP 5300/5310
W×D×H: 420 × 410 × 345 mm (16.6" × 16.2" × 13.6")
 [A]: 420 mm (16.6")

 [B]: 345 mm (13.6")
SM 2-3 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS
 Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible.
 Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
 Avoid multi-wiring.
 Be sure to ground the machine.
Input voltage
 NA: 120 to 127 V, 6A, 60 Hz ± 2%
 EU/AP/CHN: 220 to 240 V, 6A, 50 Hz ± 2%/60 Hz ± 2%
For users in Norway, this product is also designed for an IT power distribution system with
phase-to-phase voltage of 230V.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-4 SM
Rev. 08/12/2016 Main Machine Installation
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
2.2.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART
Installation
⇒ See IMPORTANT and
NOTE below.
(For MP 501/601 only)

Do not enter SP Mode when supplying toner after turning ON the machine at
installation.
If you enter and exit SP mode during toner supply, e.g. to skip the Program/Change
Administrator screen, toner supply stops and “Add toner” indication may appear.
If “Add toner” indication appears, open and close the Front Cover of the machine. The
toner supply will start.
2.2.2 ACCESSORY CHECK
MP 501/601
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
SM 2-5 D255/D256/M281/M282
Main Machine Installation Rev. 08/12/2016
Q’ty
No. Description
NA EU AP
1 NFC tag 1 1 1
2 BLE decal 1 1 1
3 Power cord 1 1 1
4 Starter toner 1 1 1
5 Telephone cable with ferrite core 1 - -
6 Ferrite core - 1 1
7 CD-ROM: Drivers 1 1 1
8 CD-ROM: OI - 1 -
9 Manual: Read This First 1 1 -
10 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 1 -
11 Manual: Initial Guide for FAX 1 1 -
12 Guarantee sheet 1 - -
13 Manual: Start Guide 1 - 1
14 Caution Sheet: Operation panel 1 1 1
15 Caution Sheet: NFC tag 2 2 2
16 Sheet: Security 1 1 1
Sheet: EULA (End User License

17 1 1 1
Agreement)
18 Seal: Caution 1 1 1
19 Sheet: Safety Information - - 1
20 Sheet: User Registration 1 - -
21 Sheet: Help Desk Card 1 - -
22 Sheet: TRCU - - 1
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-6 SM
Main Machine Installation
SP 5300/5310
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Q’ty
No. Description
Installation
NA EU AP CHN
1 Decal: Paper grade 1 - - -
2 Sheet: Safety Information - 1 - -
3 Power cord 1 1 1 1
4 Starter toner 1 1 1 1
5 CD-ROM: Drivers 1 1 1 1
6 CD-ROM: OI - - 1 -
7 Manual: Read This First 1 1 1 1
8 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 2 1 1
9 Sheet: Eco Night 1 1 1 1
10 Guarantee sheet 1 - - -
11 Sheet: Control panel 1 1 1 -
12 Sheet: Security 1 1 1 1
13 Guarantee sheet (Chinese) - - - 1
14 Sheet: User Registration 1 - - -
15 Sheet: Help Desk Card 1 - - -
Sheet: EULA (End User License

16 1 1 1 1
Agreement)
17 Seal: Caution 1 1 1 1
18 Sheet: TRCU - 1 - -
SM 2-7 D255/D256/M281/M282
Main Machine Installation Rev 03/08/2017
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
This machine is installed by the end user.
For instructions on unpacking and installing the machine, please refer to the operating instructions
"Quick Installation Guide".
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (FOR HC MODEL ONLY)

Print settings for label paper (including wristbands) are not available under Paper Type. If your
customer prints on label paper, please instruct them to select “Middle Thick” as paper type on both
the driver and the machine.
On the machine, set the paper type as “Middle Thick” for the tray loaded with label paper.
[User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Tray Paper Settings] > [Paper Type:
Tray #] > [Paper Thickness] > [Middle Thick]
Instruct the user to select “Middle Thick” as paper type on the printer driver when printing on label
paper.
SMC STORAGE
The SMC report provided with the machine needs to be stored with the machine.
The factory SP settings are recorded in the SMC report. This report may be required after
replacing the NVRAMs to set the SP settings to factory default.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [A].
2. Take out the SMC report [B].
3. Fold the SMC report into a small size as shown below.
4. Store the SMC report in the storage space [A] inside the paper feed tray.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-8 SM
Installation
2.2.5 IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES (MP 501/601
ONLY)
In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the
administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt display appears at the first power-up.
Overview
The following Program/Change Administrator screen appears at the first power-up.
When the customers sets the administrator/supervisor login password, the screen disappears and
the home display appears. The customer, however, can make this screen disappear with the
following procedure if there is no need to set the password.
1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and
then press [OK] without entering any password.
2. Press [OK] again when the Confirm password display appears.
SM 2-9 D255/D256/M281/M282
3. For Administrator 1, perform the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.

4. Press [OK].
The home display appears.
5. Turn OFF/ON the main power.
SP5-755-002 hides the administrator password input screen temporarily and continue the
installation procedure without setting an administrator password. However, the Program/Change
Administrator screen will appear every time you turn OFF/ON the main power, if the password is
not set.
Password Setting Procedure
 For more details about this security issue, see "Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers
Safely" supplied with the MFP.
 When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the "Change
Supervisor login password" window will not be displayed.
 The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via "System Settings".
However, the Program/Change Administrator screen will appear every time the main
power is turned ON if the passwords are set this way. We recommend that customers set
the passwords via network or the Program/Change Administrator screen.
1. Install the MFP.
2. Turn ON the main power.
3. Change the Supervisor login password.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-10 SM
4. Enter a password.
Installation
5. Press [OK].
6. Confirm the password.
SM 2-11 D255/D256/M281/M282
7. Press [OK].
8. Change the Administrator 1 login password.
9. Enter the password.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-12 SM
10. Press [OK].
Installation
11. Confirm the password.
12. Press [OK].
SM 2-13 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.2.6 SETTINGS ACCORDING TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT

Change the necessary settings depending on the customer's service contract.
Meter Click Charge

There are two ways to set up this function.
 Meter click charge enabled (SP5-930-001 set to "1 (enabled)"; this is the default
setting): The counter can be displayed and printed by the customer. The service
representative can then call the customer and ask for the counter.
 Meter click charge disabled (SP5-930-001 set to "0 (disabled)"): The counter cannot be
displayed or printed by the customer. To check the counter, the service representative must
print the SMC report (SP 5-990).
Item SP No. Function Default
Enables or disables Meter Click

Charge.
When enabled:
 The counter menu shows
immediately after you push the
"Menu" key.
Meter Click Charge SP5-930-001 In MP 501/601, "Counter Method" 1: ON
(SP5-045-001) sets the type of
the counter.
 You can print the counter from the
counter menu.
When disabled:
 The counter menu does not show.
Enables or disables the PM alert for

the maintenance kit.
Meter Click Charge: 1: No
SP5-931-001 * This setting is unnecessary with this
Maintenance Kit alert
machine since this machine does not
have the maintenance kit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-14 SM
Item SP No. Function Default
Specifies the counter display method.

 1: 1 counter mode
1: 1
Counter Method Displays only the total counter.
SP5-045-001 counter
(MP 501/601 Only)  2: 2 counter mode
mode
Installation
Displays the total counter and the
print counter.
-001: shows or sets the telephone

number of the service representative.
Service Tel: SP5-812-001, -002: shows or sets the fax number of
-
Telephone/Facsimile -002 the service station. This number is
displayed on the error message
screen when an SC occurs.
2.2.7 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See
the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer
distance.
 Turn OFF the main power and pull out the power plug.
 Close all the covers and trays.
 Remove peripherals physically attached to the main machine: paper feed unit.
 Keep the machine horizontal and move it slowly. Tipping or excessive vibrations may damage
the machine.
SM 2-15 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.2.8 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

1. Open the front cover.
MP 501/601: Push the button [A] and open the front cover [B].
SP 5300/5310: Open the upper cover [A], and then open the front cover [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-16 SM
2. Release the lock lever [A] by rotating it towards you, and then remove the toner
cartridge [B].
This prevents toner leakage caused by vibration during transport.
Installation
3. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates
with a sheet of paper and tape.
4. If Caster Table Type M24 is installed, remove the four stands [A].
Front/left side
SM 2-17 D255/D256/M281/M282
Rear/right side
5. Lift the machine, and then move it horizontally to the new location.
6. If you have removed the stands for Caster Table Type M24, reattach them.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-18 SM
Caster Table Type M24 (D3C7-01)
2.3 CASTER TABLE TYPE M24 (D3C7-01)
Installation
No. Description Q’ty
1 Stands 4
2 Caster table 1
- Manual: Installation Guide 1
- RoHS sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
 The joint brackets and screws [A] for installation are stored in the accessory box [B] on
the underside of the caster table.
SM 2-19 D255/D256/M281/M282
 The following items are stored in the accessory box.
1 Joint bracket A 2
2 Joint bracket B 1
3 Joint bracket C 4
4 Joint bracket D 4
5 Joint bracket E 4
6 Screws: polished round/spring (M4×10) 8
7 Hexagon flange screws (M4×8) 3
8 Tapping bind screws (3×8) 4
9 Screws (M3×6) 8
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-20 SM
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

For instructions on unpacking and installing the Caster Table Type M24, please refer to the
operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating Instructions" for SP
5300/5310.
Installation
When installing with the paper feed unit
Installation by service representative may be required when installing Caster Table Type M24 with
Paper Feed Unit PB1100, depending on the machine configuration.
MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
Machine Printer only, or

Configuration With 1 to 4 PFU With 2 to 4 PFU
Printer only with 1 PFU
PB1100 PB1100
PB1100
Who can install Service Service

End user *1
End user
the caster table representative representative*1
*1 The attaching stands and connecting parts need to be installed to prevent the machine from
falling over. If it falls or topples over, an injury might occur. For instructions on installing Paper
Feed Unit PB1100 and Caster Table Type M24, please refer to page 2-23 "Installation Procedure".
SM 2-21 D255/D256/M281/M282
Paper Feed Unit PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02)
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 (D3C2-01, 02)
1 Paper feed unit 1
- Manual: Installation Guide 1
- EMC address decal (NA/EU/AP only) 1
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-22 SM

For instructions on unpacking and installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100, please refer to the
5300/5310.
Installation
When installing with the caster table
Installation by service representative may be required when installing Paper Feed Unit PB1100
with Caster Table Type M24, depending on the machine configuration.
MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
Machine Printer only, or

Configuration With 1 to 4 PFU With 2 to 4 PFU
Printer only with 1 PFU
PB1100 PB1100
PB1100
Who can install Service Service

End user *1
End user
the caster table representative representative*1
*1 The attaching stands and connecting parts need to be installed to prevent the machine from
falling over. If it falls or topples over, an injury might occur. For instructions on installing Paper
Feed Unit PB1100 and Caster Table Type M24, please refer to the procedure described in this
section.
Installing the optional paper feed unit on the caster table
 Turn OFF the main power, and unplug the machine power cord before starting the
following procedure.
 You need two or more persons to lift the main machine. The main machine is highly
unstable when it is lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage.
 Be sure to hold the specified positions when lifting the machine.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
2. Remove all tape and retainers.
SM 2-23 D255/D256/M281/M282
3. Turn over the caster table, and then remove the accessory bracket [A].
4. Remove the package [A] (which contains joints, brackets, and screws) from the
accessory bracket.
5. Check the following items in the package.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-24 SM
1 Joint bracket A 2
2 Joint bracket B 1
Installation
3 Joint bracket C 4
4 Joint bracket D 4
5 Joint bracket E 4
Screws: polished round/spring

6 8
(M4×10)
7 Hexagon flange screws (M4×8) 3
8 Tapping bind screws (3×8) 4
9 Screws (M3×6) 8
6. Install the accessory bracket on the caster table.

Use the screws removed in Step 3.
7. Install the optional paper feed unit [A] on the caster table [B].
SM 2-25 D255/D256/M281/M282
 There are two upright pins [A] on the caster table. Align them with the holes in the
underside of the optional paper feed unit.
 The hole [A] in the caster table indicates the front side of the caster table.
8. Open the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-26 SM
9. Install the joint bracket A [A] on the rear side with the hexagon flange screw (M4×8).
Installation
10. Install the joint bracket A [A] on the rear side with the hexagon flange screw (M4×8).
SM 2-27 D255/D256/M281/M282
11. Close the rear cover of the optional paper feed unit.
12. Remove the paper feed tray [A] by pulling it out.
13. Install the joint bracket B [A] on the front side with the hexagon flange screw (M4×8).
 When you install two or more optional paper feed units, please refer to page 2-29 "When
installing two or more optional paper feed units".
 When you install only one optional paper feed unit, please refer to page 2-32.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-28 SM
When installing two or more optional paper feed units

1. Install the optional paper feed unit [A] on the lower paper feed unit [B].
Installation
 There are two upright pins [A] on the optional paper feed unit. Align the upright pins
of the lower paper feed unit with the holes in the underside of the upper paper feed
unit. Then carefully lower the upper paper feed unit.
2. Open the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
SM 2-29 D255/D256/M281/M282
3. Install the joint bracket E [A] on the rear right side to secure the optional paper feed
unit and lower paper feed unit.
4. Open the rear cover [A] of the lower paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket
installed in the previous step with the screw (M3×6).
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-30 SM
5. Install the joint bracket D [A] on the rear left side to secure the optional paper feed unit
and lower paper feed unit.
Installation
6. Open the rear cover [A] of the lower paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket
SM 2-31 D255/D256/M281/M282
8. Install the joint bracket C [A] on the front side to secure the upper paper feed unit and
lower paper feed unit with the tapping bind screw (3×8).
9. If you install more optional paper feed units, repeat Steps 1 to 8.
Installing the main machine on the optional paper feed unit

1. Install the main machine [A] on the optional paper feed unit [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-32 SM
 There are two upright pins [A] on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the
holes in the underside of the main machine, and then carefully lower the machine.
Installation
2. Open the rear lower cover [A] of the main machine.
SM 2-33 D255/D256/M281/M282
3. Install the joint bracket E [A] on the rear right side to secure the main machine and
paper feed unit.
4. Open the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-34 SM
5. Install the joint bracket D [A] on the rear left side to secure the main machine and paper
feed unit.
Installation
6. Open the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit, and then secure the joint bracket
7. Remove the paper feed tray [A] of the main machine by pulling it out.
SM 2-35 D255/D256/M281/M282
8. Install the joint bracket C [A] on the front side to secure the main machine and optional
paper feed unit with the tapping bind screw (3×8).
9. Put back the paper feed trays.

10. Attach the two stands [A] provided with the caster table on the front and left sides with
the screws (polished round/spring (M4×10)).
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-36 SM
11. Attach the two stands [A] provided with the caster table on the rear and right sides with
the screws (polished round/spring (M4×10)).
Installation
SM 2-37 D255/D256/M281/M282
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21) (MP 501/601 Only)
2.5 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12
(B870-21) (MP 501/601 ONLY)
1 MKB board 1
2 Tapping screw: M3x6 4
3 Harness band 1
4 Stud 4
5 Harness clamp: LWS-0711 1
6 Harness 1
- EMC address decal 1
1. Open the rear upper cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-38 SM
Installation
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release the hook on the inside of the controller
cover [B].
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover, and then remove the cover [A]
by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow.
SM 2-39 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the controller cover when you
remove or install the controller cover.
4. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of , , and to release the three hooks
of the rear left stay [A].
5. Remove the rear left stay [A].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear left stay when you
remove or install the rear left stay.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-40 SM
6. Push the button [A] and open the front cover [B].
Installation
7. Release the hook [A] of the right upper cover [B] by opening the cover in the direction
of the arrow.
8. Remove the right upper cover [A] by inserting a flathead screwdriver into [B].
SM 2-41 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right upper cover when you
remove or install the right upper cover.
9. Remove the bracket [A].
10. Install the four stud stays as shown below.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-42 SM
11. Install the optional counter interface board [A] on the four stud stays.
Installation
12. Connect the harness (13 pins) to CN3 [A] on the optional counter interface board and
CN112 [B] on the BiCU.
13. Fasten the harness with the clamp [A].

14. Bind the harness with the harness bind [B] as shown below.
SM 2-43 D255/D256/M281/M282
15. Connect the harness from the optional counter device to CN4 [A] on the optional
counter interface board.
16. Remove the knockout [A] of the rear left stay [B] with a pair of nippers. Then pass the
harness which is connected to the optional counter interface in the previous step.
17. Reassemble the machine.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-44 SM
NFC Card Reader Type M24 (D3CP-08) (MP 501/601 Only)
2.6 NFC CARD READER TYPE M24 (D3CP-08) (MP 501/601
ONLY)
Installation
1 NFC card reader 1
2 Upper cover 1
3 Base cover 1
4 Hoop and loop fastener 1
5 USB cable 1
6 Ferrite core 1
7 FG clamp 1
8 Tapping screw: 3×8 1
- EMC address decal 1
- Caution Sheet 1
- Caution Chart 1
SM 2-45 D255/D256/M281/M282
cover [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-46 SM
Installation
SM 2-47 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-48 SM
Installation
of the arrow.
SM 2-49 D255/D256/M281/M282
9. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook of the scanner front cover [B].
10. Release the two hooks of the scanner front cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-50 SM
11. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook, and then remove the scanner
front cover [B].
Installation
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the scanner front cover when
you remove or install the scanner front cover.
12. Release the two hooks of the operation panel arm upper cover [A].
SM 2-51 D255/D256/M281/M282
13. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release the hook, and then remove the
operation panel arm upper cover [B].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the operation panel arm upper
cover when you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover.
14. Remove the hinge cover [A] from the operation panel. (hook×2)
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-52 SM
15. Make a loop at the end of the USB cable [A], and then attach the ferrite core [B], as
shown below.
Installation
 Attach the ferrite core at a distance of 4.0 cm (1.6 inch) [A] from the end of USB
cable.
16. Peel off the conductive tape [A] from the USB cable [B].
SM 2-53 D255/D256/M281/M282
17. Insert the USB cable [A] into the media slot of the operation panel.
 Insert the end [A] of the USB cable, where the ferrite core is not attached, into the
media slot of the operation panel.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-54 SM
18. Route the USB cable [A] to the right side of the machine. (hook×2)
Installation
19. Secure the USB cable [A] with the clamp.
20. Remove the screw [A] from the operation panel arm.
SM 2-55 D255/D256/M281/M282
21. Install the FG clamp [A] to the operation panel arm.
 When installing the FG clamp, bind the USB cable [B] with the FG clamp [A]. Make
sure to bind the part where the coating is stripped partially.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-56 SM
 When installing the FG clamp [A], use the screw provided with NFC Card Reader
Type M24.
22. Attach the hook and loop fastener [A] to the base cover [B] at the position shown
below.
Installation
23. Peel off the mount from the hook and loop fastener, and then attach the NFC card
reader [A] to the base cover [B] at the position shown below.
 Attach the NFC card reader with the USB port [A] of the NFC card reader set to face
right.
SM 2-57 D255/D256/M281/M282
24. Peel off the mount [A] of the seal from the back side [B] of the base cover.
25. Fit the notch part [A] of the base cover [B] into the right upper cover [C] of the main
machine, and then attach it.
26. Reattach the right upper cover [A] to the main machine.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-58 SM
 When attaching the right upper cover, pull out the USB cable [A] through the notch
[B] in the right upper cover.
Installation
27. Connect the USB cable [A] to the NFC card reader [B].
28. Attach the upper cover [A] to the base cover [B].
SM 2-59 D255/D256/M281/M282
Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)
2.7 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10
(D792-09)
1 Enhanced security HDD 1
- EMC address sheet 1
 The following parts are separately required when installing Enhanced Security HDD
Option Type M10 on SP 5300/5310 in which Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 is not
installed.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-60 SM
1 HDD bracket 1
2 Power source cable 1
Installation
3 Data cable 1
4 Stepped screw 4
5 Tapping screw 2
SM 2-61 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (MP 501/601)
cover [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-62 SM
Installation
SM 2-63 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-64 SM
Installation
of the arrow.
SM 2-65 D255/D256/M281/M282
10. Remove the power connector cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-66 SM
 When removing the power connector cover, pull it in the direction of the arrow.
Installation
 Be careful not to damage the hook on the power connector cover when you remove
or install the power connector cover.
11. Remove the four screws from the right lower cover [A].
SM 2-67 D255/D256/M281/M282
12. Close the rear upper cover [A].
13. Open the rear lower cover [A], and then release the hook of the right lower cover [B] by
rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow.
14. Release the hooks [A] and [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-68 SM
15. Remove the right lower cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
Installation
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right lower cover when you
remove or install the right lower cover.
 Do not remove the screw [A] when removing the right lower cover [B].
SM 2-69 D255/D256/M281/M282
17. Disconnect the USB connector [A] of the operation panel.
18. Disconnect the two flat cables and two connectors.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-70 SM
 Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable [A], as shown in the
following pictures. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged.
Installation
 When disconnecting the flat cable [A], pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
19. Release the flat cable and harness from the harness guides.
SM 2-71 D255/D256/M281/M282
20. Remove the seven screws from the controller box [A].
 The screw [B] is a tapping screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when
installing the controller box.
21. Release the hook [A], and then remove the controller box [B] by rotating it
counter-clockwise.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-72 SM
22. Disconnect the connector on the controller box [A].
Installation
23. Remove the fax unit [A].
24. Remove the cap [A].
SM 2-73 D255/D256/M281/M282
25. Remove the slot cover [A].
26. Remove the controller box cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-74 SM
 The screw [B] is a small screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing
the controller box cover.
27. Remove the controller board [A] with the BiCU [B].
Installation
 Be careful not to damage the backside of the controller board [A] and the BiCU [B].
28. Remove the HDD with the bracket [A] from the controller box [B]. (hook×2)
SM 2-75 D255/D256/M281/M282
29. Remove the HDD [A] from the HDD bracket [B].
30. Disconnect the two cables [A] from the HDD [B].
31. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-76 SM
32. Connect the two cables [A] to the enhanced security HDD [B].
Installation
33. Install the enhanced security HDD [A] on the HDD bracket [B].
 When installing the enhanced security HDD on the bracket, make sure to pass the
cables through the hole [A] of the HDD bracket.
SM 2-77 D255/D256/M281/M282
34. Install the HDD with the bracket [A] on the controller box [B]. (hook×2)
 When reattaching the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat
cable to the harness guides, as shown below.
 When reattaching the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the
harness and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-78 SM
Rev. 09/15/2016 Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10 (D792-09)
After Installing the HDD

1. Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power. A message prompts you to
format the hard disk.
Installation
2. Press [Format].
3. Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk.
Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for the
machine to tell you that the formatting is finished.
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON after a message tells you formatting is finished.
5. Enter the SP mode.
6. Execute SP5-853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk.
Follow the instructions on the screen. This will require three or four minutes.
⇒7. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
SM 2-79 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.7.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (SP 5300/5310)
1. Open the upper cover [A].
2. Remove the two screws from the upper cover [A].
 The screw [B] is a sems screw. The screw [C] is a tapping screw. Be careful not use
the wrong screws when installing the upper cover.
3. Remove the screw from the rear side of the upper cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-80 SM
4. Lift the upper cover [A] by releasing the two hooks, and then put it on the mainframe
so that you can access the bracket [B] on the right side of the machine.
Installation
6. Disconnect the flat cable from the BiCU [A].
SM 2-81 D255/D256/M281/M282
7. Remove the plastic sheet [A] from the mainframe (hook×2), and then remove the upper
cover [B].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you
remove or install the upper cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-82 SM
Installation
9. Open the front cover [A].
SM 2-83 D255/D256/M281/M282
11. Remove the five screws from the right cover [A].
 The screw [B] is a tapping screw. The screw [C] is a long screw. Be careful not to use
the wrong screws when installing the right cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-84 SM
Installation
13. Open the rear lower cover [A], and then release the hook of the right cover [B] by
14. Release the four hooks, and then remove the right cover [A].
SM 2-85 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right cover when you remove
or install the right cover.
15. Disconnect the flat cable and two connectors.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-86 SM
Installation
 The screw [B] is a tapping screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when
SM 2-87 D255/D256/M281/M282
18. Release the hook [A], and then remove the controller box [B].
19. Remove the cap [A] from the controller box [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-88 SM
Installation
23. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.
SM 2-89 D255/D256/M281/M282
24. Connect the power source cable [A] and data cable [B] to the enhanced security HDD
[C].
25. Install the enhanced security HDD [A] on the HDD bracket [B] with the stepped screws.
 When installing the enhanced security HDD on the bracket, make sure to pass the
cables through the hole [A] of the HDD bracket.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-90 SM
26. Install the HDD with the bracket [A] on the controller box [B] with the tapping screws.
(hook×2)
Installation
 When reattaching the controller board [A] with the BiCU [B] on the controller box [C],
connect the two cables of the HDD to the controller board [A].
 When reattaching the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat
SM 2-91 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When reattaching the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the
harness and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.

1. Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power.
The message "Hard Disk is replaced. Format Hard Disk." is displayed.
2. Select [Format]. The message "Formatting Hard Disk…Please wait, also make sure the
main power switch is not turned off." is displayed.
 Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for the
machine to tell you that the formatting is finished. When the formatting is finished, the
message "Hard Disk is formatted. Turn main power switch off then on" is displayed.
4. Turn the main power OFF/ON after the message tells you formatting is finished.
6. Execute SP5-846-041 to let the user have access to the address book.
7. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-92 SM
Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 (M500-05) (SP 5300/5310 Only)
2.8 HARD DISK DRIVE OPTION TYPE P8 (M500-05) (SP
5300/5310 ONLY)
Installation
1 HDD 1
2 Power source cable 1
3 Data cable 1
4 Tapping screw: round point: 3×6 2
SM 2-93 D255/D256/M281/M282
 You need two or more persons to lift the main machine. The main machine is highly
unstable when it is lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage.
 Be sure to hold the specified positions when lifting the machine.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-94 SM
Installation
SM 2-95 D255/D256/M281/M282
7. Remove the plastic sheet [A] from the mainframe (hook×2), and then remove the upper
cover [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-96 SM
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you
remove or install the upper cover.
Installation
SM 2-97 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-98 SM
11. Remove the five screws from the right cover [A].
Installation
SM 2-99 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-100 SM
Installation
SM 2-101 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Make sure to open the flap before disconnecting the flat cable [A] as shown in the
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-102 SM
Installation
SM 2-103 D255/D256/M281/M282
23. Connect the two cables [A] to the HDD [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-104 SM
 Make sure to pass the cables through the hole [A] of the HDD bracket.
Installation
24. Install the HDD [A] on the controller box [B] with the tapping screws. (hook×2)
 When reattaching the controller board [A] with the BiCU [B] on the controller box [C],
connect the two cables of the HDD to the controller board [A].
SM 2-105 D255/D256/M281/M282
Hard Disk Drive Option Type P8 (M500-05) (SP 5300/5310 Only) Rev. 09/15/2016
When reattaching the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat
When reattaching the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose harness
and flat cable between bracket and controller box.

1. Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power.
The message "Hard Disk is replaced. Format Hard Disk." is displayed.
2. Select [Format]. The message "Formatting Hard Disk…Please wait, also make sure the
main power switch is not turned off." is displayed.
Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for the
machine to tell you that the formatting is finished. When the formatting is finished, the
message "Hard Disk is formatted. Turn main power switch off then on" is displayed.
⇒ 4. Turn the main power OFF/ON after the message tells you formatting is finished.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-106 SM
Internal Options
2.9 INTERNAL OPTIONS
2.9.1 LIST OF SLOTS
Installation
Slot Option
USB Device Server Option Type M19
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19
[A] I/F slot IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24
Extended USB Board Type M19
File Format Converter Type M19*2
[B] USB ports*1 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D*2
*1 There is no difference between the left and right USB ports.

*2 MP 501/601 only
SM 2-107 D255/D256/M281/M282
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)
2.10 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17)
1 IEEE 1284 interface board 1
- FCC sheet 1
- RoHS sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing,
please refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating
Instructions" for SP 5300/5310.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-108 SM
IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 (M500-08)
2.11 IEEE 802.11 INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M24 (M500-08)
Installation
1 IEEE 802.11 interface board 1

IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type M24 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing,
please refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating
SM 2-109 D255/D256/M281/M282
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D (D566-01) (MP 501/601 Only)
2.12 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE D (D566-01) (MP
501/601 ONLY)
1 Bluetooth interface unit 1
- CD-ROM 1
- Caution sheet 1
- Caution chart 1
- FCC sheet 1
- FCC DOC sheet 1

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please
refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine".
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-110 SM
USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28, 29)
2.13 USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M19 (D3BC-28,
29)
Installation
1 USB cable 1
2 Interface board 1
3 Ferrite core 2
4 Cable ties 2
Interface Board
SM 2-111 D255/D256/M281/M282
No. Item Description
1 Switch Use to reset to the factory settings.
2 Ethernet port Use to connect the Ethernet cable.
Use to connect this option to the main machine.

3 USB port
Do not use this port with other options.
 When you install this option to the main machine for the first time, the interface board
must be connected directly to your PC to set up the IP address and other network
settings.
1. Loosen the two screws and remove the slot cover [A] from the rear side of the
machine.
2. Fully insert the interface board [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-112 SM
3. Tighten the two screws to secure the interface board.
Installation
4. Using the supplied USB cable [A], connect the USB device server to the machine.
5. Mount the ferrite cores on the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx.
1.2 inch) [A] from the each end of the cable.
SM 2-113 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Only when installing this option in NA, fix each ferrite core with the cable tie [A].
7. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet board on this option.
8. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.
9. Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn ON the main power.
 Do not unplug the USB connector while the machine is recognizing this option. It may
take between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs by the
connector light up when finished; see below). If unplugged, connect the cable again.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-114 SM
Rev. 08/09/2016 USB Device Server Option Type M19 (D3BC-28, 29)
What Do the LED Indicators Mean?

When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators
light up under the following conditions.
Installation
No. LED Color Lights Up When:
1 Green and Yellow 1000BASE-T operates.
2 Green 10BASE-T operates.
3 Yellow 100BASE-TX operates.
SM 2-115 D255/D256/M281/M282
IP Address Setting
This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. You can set an IP
address which is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network segment
to share a single machine with devices in multiple networks.
 You cannot change the IP address from the operation panel of the main machine. The
setting must be done from a web browser on your PC.
 The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows: IP address:
192.168.100.100 / Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
 The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment in order to change
the network setting of this option.
1. Make a note of the current network settings of your PC.
2. Change the IP address on your PC to [192.168.100.xxx (*0 - 255)].
3. Change the subnet mask on your PC to [255.255.255.0].
4. Open a web browser.
5. Type [http://192.168.100.100/] in the address bar.
6. Press the "Enter" key.
 The setting screen for this option appears.

7. Click [Network Setting].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-116 SM
8. Enter "root" in the user name textbox and click [OK].

9. Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway].
Installation
10. Set other items if necessary.
11. Click [Set].
12. Close the web browser.
13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the PC.
14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (for example, switching hub).
15. Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver that you are using.
Check All Connections

1. Plug in the power cord. Turn ON the main power.
2. Print the configuration page.
 MP 501/601
1. Press the [User Tools] icon on the operation panel.
2. Press [Machine Features].
3. Press [List/Test Print] in [Printer Features].
4. Press [Configuration Page].
 SP 5300/5310
1. Select [List/Test Print] -> Press [OK] on the controller panel.
2. Select [Config. Page] -> Press [OK].
SM 2-117 D255/D256/M281/M282
File Format Converter Type M19 (D3BR-04) (MP 501/601 Only)
2.14 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04) (MP
501/601 ONLY)
1 File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) 1
- FCC sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
- RoHS label 1

File Format Converter Type M19 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please
refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine".
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-118 SM
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)
2.15 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01)
Installation
1 Extended USB board 1
- Connector cap 1
- FCC sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1
- RoHS label 1

Extended USB Board Type M19 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please
refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine" for MP 501/601, or "Operating
SM 2-119 D255/D256/M281/M282
SD Card Options
2.16 SD CARD OPTIONS
2.16.1 SD CARD SLOTS
Slots Description
Use for the following SD card options.

 OCR Unit Type M13*1
SD Card Slot 1 (option  IPDS Unit Type M24
[A]
slot)  XPS Direct Print Option Type M24
 VM Card Type P8*2
 Fax Connection Unit Type M24*1
SD Card Slot 2 (service Use for service only (for example, updating the
[B]
slot) firmware).
*1 MP 501/601 only
*2 SP 5300/5310 only
 Optional SD cards can be set in either Slot 1 or Slot 2. However, Slot 2 is the service slot,
so it is recommended that Slot 1 to be used to install the SD card options.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-120 SM
SD Card Appli Move
2.17 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
2.17.1 OVERVIEW
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs from
one SD card to another SD card.
Installation
You cannot run application programs from Slot 2. However you can move application programs
from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
When merging SD cards, the target SD card should have the largest memory size of all the
application SD cards.
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
 The necessary data for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD
card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the
application program from one card to another card.
 Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
 Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from one card to
another card. This is for the following reasons:
1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
2.17.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

1. Choose an SD card with enough space.
2. Enter SP5-873 "SD Card Appli Move". This SP copies the application programs from
the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 to the SD card in SD Card Slot 1. Move the
application from the SD card in Slot 2 to the card in Slot 1.
3. Exit the SP mode.
SM 2-121 D255/D256/M281/M282
SD Card Appli Move
2.17.3 MOVE EXEC

The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD
card to another SD card.
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of any application SD card. If the write protect
switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or
application merge.
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program is copied to
this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 2. The
application program is copied from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
2.17.4 UNDO EXEC

The menu "Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card
to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of any application SD card. If the write protect
switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or
application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back
into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 1. The
application program is copied back from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-122 SM
SD Card Appli Move

9. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the
machine.
Installation
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
SM 2-123 D255/D256/M281/M282
OCR Unit Type M13 (D3AC-23, 24, 25) (MP 501/601 Only)
2.18 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, 24, 25) (MP 501/601
ONLY)
1 OCR unit SD card 1
- Caution sheet (EU only) 1
- RoHS sheet (AP/CHN only) 1
- RoHS decal (AP/CHN only) 1

D255/D256/M281/M282 2-124 SM
cover [B].
Installation
SM 2-125 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Insert the OCR Unit Type M13 SD card in SD Card Slot 1 [A] (upper slot).

7. Press [Enter] in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card. The
MFP and SD card are thereby linked.
8. When "operation complete" is displayed, press [Close].
 If installation fails, "Failed" is displayed.

 If installation fails, perform the following steps.
1. Check whether it is a used SD card.
2. Turn OFF the main power, and repeat steps 1-5.
10. Press [Enter] in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
Dictionary data is copied to the HDD.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-126 SM
 On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies
dictionary data.
11. Turn OFF the main power, and remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
 Keep the SD card in a safe place. The original SD card is needed in the event of a
Installation
HDD malfunction.
12. Reattach the controller cover.
14. Press [Send File Type / Name] on the scanner screen.
15. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the Send File Type / Name screen.
 After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.
 When setting OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])
SM 2-127 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.18.3 RECOVERY PROCEDURE

When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card is
saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD and/or NVRAM, this option must be
reinstalled.
When storing the original SD card
 When only the HDD is replaced
Reinstall using the original SD card.
 When only the NVRAM is replaced
When uploading or downloading the NVRAM data, reinstall using the original SD card.
When not uploading or downloading the NVRAM data, order and reinstall a new SD card
(service part).
 When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously
Reinstall using the original SD card.
If the original SD card is lost
Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part).
 Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-128 SM
XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 (D3CP-12)
2.19 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M24 (D3CP-12)
Installation
1 XPS Direct Print SD card 1
- RoHS sheet 1
- RoHS decal 1

XPS Direct Print Option Type M24 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing,
please refer to the operating instructions "About This Machine".
SM 2-129 D255/D256/M281/M282
IPDS Unit Type M24 (M500-02, 03, 04)
2.20 IPDS UNIT TYPE M24 (M500-02, 03, 04)
1 IPDS Emulation SD card 1
- Decal 1
- EULA sheet (NA only) 1
- Caution sheet 1
- CD-ROM 1

IPDS Unit Type M24 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to the
5300/5310.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-130 SM
VM CARD Type P8 (M500-09, 10, 11) (SP 5300/5310 Only)
2.21 VM CARD TYPE P8 (M500-09, 10, 11) (SP 5300/5310
ONLY)
Installation
1 VM SD card 1
- Caution sheet (EU only) 1

VM CARD Type P8 is installed by the end user. For instructions on installing, please refer to the
operating instructions "Operating Instructions".
SM 2-131 D255/D256/M281/M282
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 (D3BS-03) (MP 501/601 Only)
2.22 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE M19
(D3BS-03) (MP 501/601 ONLY)
2.22.1 OVERVIEW
The machine’s hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner functions.
It also stores the data of users’ Document Server and code counters, and the Address Book. To
prevent data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing the machine, you can overwrite all
data stored on the hard disk (Erase All Memory). You can also automatically overwrite
temporarily-stored data (Auto Erase Memory).
The function of this option is exactly the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security
Functions, which is standard on this machine. (page 2-141 "Data Overwrite Security (MP
501/601)")
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data
Overwrite Security function.

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
1 SD card 1
- Comments sheet 1
- Operating Instructions CD-ROM 1
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-132 SM
2.22.3 BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE

1. Confirm that the DataOverwriteSecurity unit SD card is the correct type for the
machine. The correct type for this machine is "Type M19".
 If you install any version other than "Type M19" for this machine, you will have to
Installation
replace the NVRAM and do this installation procedure again.
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
 Supervisor login password
 Administrator login name
 Administrator login password
If any of these settings are at their factory default values, tell the customer that these settings
must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
3. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is ON.
[User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer that this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.
4. Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected).
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer that this setting must be enabled
(selected) before you do the installation procedure.
 See the operating instructions "Security Guide" for the factory default values.
SM 2-133 D255/D256/M281/M282
Seal Check and Removal

Before opening the box, make sure that the seal has not been broken or peeled off. If the seal has
been broken or peeled off (even partially), this is considered an arrival defect. Note that once the
seal is peeled off, this will leave a mark on the bag.
 You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items
were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
 Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
 The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not install the
components in the box.
2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the
box.
3. You can see the "VOID" marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they
cannot be attached to the box again.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-134 SM

1. Turn OFF the main power, and then remove the power plug and cables that are
connected.
Installation
cover [B].
SM 2-135 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Insert the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19 SD card in SD Card Slot 1 [A] (upper
slot).
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-136 SM
6. Reattach the controller cover.

7. Insert the power cord into the outlet and turn ON the main power.
 When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation.
9. Do this step only if you are installing the option on a machine that is already in use (not
Installation
a new machine):
 If the customer wishes to continue using the same hard disk, execute all three SP
modes below.
 SP5-801-014 (Clear DCS Setting)
 SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting (ALL))
 SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting (IMH))
 If customer wishes to replace the hard disk with a new one, execute SP5-801-014 only.
 If the customer continues using the same hard disk, the overwriting of the data stored
on the disk before the option is installed cannot be guaranteed. It is highly
recommended to replace the hard disk with a new one.
10. Set SP5-836-001 (Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)) to a value of 0 (Disable).
11. Execute SP5-878-001 (Option Setup: Data Overwrite Security).
If the installation fails, "Installation failed" is displayed when this SP is executed.
12. Print out the System Settings List and make sure that the option was installed
successfully.
13. Reconnect the network cable.
14. Execute SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
15. Make sure that ROM number "D3BC5757A" and firmware version "1.02" appear in both
of the following areas on the report (they must match):
 "ROM Number / Firmware Version" – "HDD Format Option"
 "Loading Program"
SM 2-137 D255/D256/M281/M282
2.22.5 CONFIGURING "AUTO ERASE MEMORY" (PERFORMED BY

THE CUSTOMER)
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Administrator Tools].
5. Press [Next] twice.
6. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
7. Press [On].
8. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to Step 11.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to Step 9.
9. Press [Change].
10. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the ten keys, and then
press [#].
The Random Numbers method overwrites the data using random numbers. You can set the
overwrite to be performed anywhere from 1-9 times, with a default of 3 times.
11. Press [OK].
12. Log out.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-138 SM
13. Check the display and make sure that the Data Overwrite icon appears.
When Auto Erase Memory is enabled, the Data Overwrite icon will be indicated in the bottom
left of the panel display.
Installation
14. Take a test copy, and then make sure that the Data Overwrite icon changes from "Dirty"
(solid) to "Dirty" (blinking), and then to "Clear".
 If the Data Overwrite icon does not change to Clear, check to see if there are any active
Sample Print or Locked Print jobs. A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be
overwritten after it has been executed.
 The Dirty icon blinks while the overwrite is in progress.
 If you use your machine for a while with Auto Erase Memory disabled, and then suddenly
enable it, the overwrite process may take 10 or more hours depending on HDD usage.
Data Overwrite icon:
Icon Icon name Explanation
This icon is displayed when there is

Dirty temporary data to be overwritten, and
flashes during overwriting.
This icon is displayed when there is no

Clear
temporary data to be overwritten.
SM 2-139 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
2.23 SECURITY SETTING
2.23.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION

The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit)
in the controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended that you activate Data Overwrite Security
and HDD Encryption by selecting the following on the operation panel.
 MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools]
-> [Machine Data Encryption Settings] -> [Encrypt] -> [All Data]
 SP 5300/5310: [Security Options] -> [Machine Data Encryption] -> [Encrypt] -> [Carry Over All
Data]
 This method is recommended because there is no user data on the HDD yet (Address
Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a
machine that is already running, it is recommended that you activate the unit by selecting the
following on the operation panel.
 MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools]
-> [Machine Data Encryption Settings] -> [Encrypt] -> [All Data]
 SP 5300/5310: [Security Options] -> [Machine Data Encryption] -> [Encrypt] -> [Carry Over All
Data]
 Selecting the setting above will preserve the data that has already been saved to the
HDD. (If "Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will
be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes
to complete before you can begin using the machine.
 If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned OFF while the encryption process is in
progress.
If the machine's main power is turned OFF while the encryption process is in progress, the HDD
will be damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-140 SM
Security Setting
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (paper sheet) in a safe place. If the
encryption key is lost when you need it, the controller board, HDD and NVRAM must all be
replaced at the same time.
 "NVRAM" mentioned here means the NVRAM on the controller board. It has no relation
to the "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BiCU.
Installation
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption are
reinstalled.
2.23.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY (MP 501/601)
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
2. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is on.
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
SM 2-141 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
Using Auto Erase Memory

The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.
4. Press [Next] three twice.
5. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
6. Press [On].
7. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 10.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 8.
8. Press [Change].
9. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then
press [#].
10. Press [OK].
Auto Erase Memory is set.
11. Log out.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-142 SM
Security Setting
12. Check the display and make sure that the Data Overwrite icon appears.
When Auto Erase Memory is enabled, the Data Overwrite icon will be indicated in the bottom
left of the panel display.
Installation
Icon Icon name Explanation
This icon is displayed when there is

Dirty temporary data to be overwritten, and
flashes during overwriting.
This icon is displayed when there is no

Clear
temporary data to be overwritten.
2.23.3 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY (SP 5300/5310)
Before You Begin the Procedure

2. Make sure that "Administrator Authentication Management" is on.
1. Log in as the administrator from Web Image Monitor.
2. [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Device Settings] -> [Administrator
Authentication Management]
SM 2-143 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
3. From [User Administrator Authentication], [Machine Administrator Authentication],

[Network Administrator Authentication], and [File Administrator Authentication], set the
administrator authentication setting to [On].
procedure.
Using Auto Erase Memory

The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
2. Select [Security Options] -> Press [OK]
3. Select [Auto Erase Memory Setting] -> Press [OK]
4. Select [On] -> Select [HDDErase]
5. Select the method of erasing the data from [NSA], [DoD], or [Random Numbers]. ->
Press [OK]
If you select [Random Numbers], enter the number of times that you want to overwrite. Then
press [OK].
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [Menu].
8. Log out.
Checking the Auto Erase Memory Status

If Auto Erase Memory is enabled, you can use the "Memory Erase Status" screen to find out
whether there is any data to be erased in the memory.
1. Press the [Menu] key -> Select [Memory Erase Status] ->Press [OK]
The Memory Erase status appears.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-144 SM
Security Setting
2.23.4 HDD ENCRYPTION (MP 501/601)
Before You Begin the Procedure:

Installation
2. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is on.
procedure.
SM 2-145 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
Enable Encryption Setting

Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.
 When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data
(initialize) or encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to
encrypt it.
 When the Machine Data Encryption Settings is enabled;
 If the HDD is replaced, HDD data will be deleted. After installing the new HDD, the
data in the new HDD will be automatically encrypted.
 If the NVRAMs on the controller board are replaced, Machine Data Encryption
Settings will be automatically enabled after installing the new NVRAMs.
 If the controller board is replaced, the restore key will be required after installing the
new controller board.
 If you have the restore key, you will be able to continue using the HDD data.
 If the restore key has been lost, the HDD will be formatted and you need to reset
NVRAM data to the default settings after the forced start-up. (HDD data will be
deleted) Refer to "How to do a forced start up with no encryption key" in "Encryption
Key Restoration" (page 2-149).
 If the controller board and the NVRAMs are replaced together, HDD data will be
deleted since all the encryption information is deleted.
5. Press [Next] three times.
6. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-146 SM
Security Setting
7. Press [Encrypt].
Installation
8. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset.
 To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data].
 To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
 To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
9. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
10. Press [OK].
11. Press [Exit].
12. Press [Exit].
13. Log out.
14. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back on.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the main power.
Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off."
appears, and then turn OFF the main power.
Check the Encryption Settings
1. Press the [User Tools] icon.
SM 2-147 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
5. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Backing Up the Encryption Key

The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
 The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to
store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
6. Press [Back Up Encryption Key].
7. Select the backup method.

If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK]. When the machine's data encryption key is backed up, press
[Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press [Start] and print out the machine's data encryption
key.
8. Press [Exit].
9. Log out.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-148 SM
Security Setting
Encryption Key Restoration

How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is
necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board.
Installation
To do this, follow the procedure below.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the "restore_key" folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, "xxxxxxxxxxx" (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx" folder.
Write the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
 Ask the administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed
out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The
function of back-up the encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A
products or later.)
6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that
contains the encryption key.
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD Card Slot 2 (the lower slot).
 The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
 The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

 Encrypted data will be deleted.
 User settings will be cleared.
SM 2-149 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named "restore_key" inside the root directory of the SD card. Then,
save the "nvram_key.txt" file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
 Write this string at the head of the file.

 Use all lower-case letters.
 Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
 It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
8. Turn ON the main power, the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
12. Execute SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP5-801-001: All Clear and SP5-801-002: Engine) to
resets NVRAM data to the default settings.
13. Execute SP5-846-046 to clear the address book information.
14. Set necessary user settings from the [User Tools] icon.
2.23.5 HDD ENCRYPTION (SP 5300/5310)
Before You Begin the Procedure:

2. Make sure that "Administrator Authentication Management" is on.
2. [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Device Settings] -> [Administrator
Authentication Management]
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-150 SM
Security Setting
3. From [User Administrator Authentication], [Machine Administrator Authentication],

[Network Administrator Authentication], and [File Administrator Authentication], set the
administrator authentication setting to [On].
procedure.
Enable Encryption Setting
Installation
Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.
 When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data
(initialize) or encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to
encrypt it.
 When the Machine Data Encryption Settings is enabled;
 If the HDD is replaced, HDD data will be deleted. After installing the new HDD, the
data in the new HDD will be automatically encrypted.
 If the NVRAMs on the controller board are replaced, Machine Data Encryption
Settings will be automatically enabled after installing the new NVRAMs.
 If the controller board is replaced, the restore key will be required after installing the
new controller board.
 If you have the restore key, you will be able to continue using the HDD data.
 If the restore key has been lost, the HDD will be formatted and you need to reset
NVRAM data to the default settings after the forced start-up. (HDD data will be
deleted) Refer to "How to do a forced start up with no encryption key" in "Encryption
Key Restoration" (page 2-152).
 If the controller board and the NVRAMs are replaced together, HDD data will be
deleted since all the encryption information is deleted.
4. Select [Machine Data Encryption] -> Press [OK]
5. Make sure [Encrypt] is displayed on the control panel -> Press [OK]
6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset -> Press [OK]
 To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [Carry Over All Data].
 To carry over only the printer settings data, select [CarryOver FileSys DataOnly].
 To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
7. Select [PrtOnPpr] -> [Print] -> [Continue]
8. Select [OK].
9. Press [Menu].
SM 2-151 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
10. Log out.

11. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back ON.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the main power.
Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the power switch off." appears,
and then turn OFF the main power again.
Backing Up the Encryption Key

You can back up the encryption key by printing it.
 The encryption key is required for data recovery if the printer malfunctions. Be sure to
store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
3. Select [Machine Data Encryption] -> Press [OK]
4. Select [Back Up Encryption Key] -> Press [OK]
5. Select [PrtOnPpr] -> [Print]
6. Press [Menu].
7. Log out.
Encryption Key Restoration

How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is
necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board.
To do this, follow the procedure below.

1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the "restore_key" folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, "xxxxxxxxxxx" (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx" folder.
Write the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-152 SM
Security Setting
 Ask the administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed
out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The
function of back-up the encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A
products or later.)
Installation
 The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
 The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

 Encrypted data will be deleted.
 User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named "restore_key" inside the root directory of the SD card. Then,
save the "nvram_key.txt" file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
 Write this string at the head of the file.

 Use all lower-case letters.
 Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
 It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
SM 2-153 D255/D256/M281/M282
Security Setting
8. Turn ON the main power, the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
12. Execute SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP5-801-001: All Clear and SP5-801-002: Engine) to
resets NVRAM data to the default settings.
13. Execute SP5-846-046 to clear the address book information.
14. Set necessary user settings from the [Menu] key.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-154 SM
@Remote Settings
2.24 @REMOTE SETTINGS
 Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For
details, ask the @Remote key person.
Installation
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5-816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5-990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5-811-003) must be
correctly programmed.
 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
 ID2 (SP5-811-003) and the serial number (SP5-811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
 Proxy server IP address (SP5-816-063)
 Proxy server Port number (SP5-816-064)
 Proxy User ID (SP5-816-065)
 Proxy Password (SP5-816-066)
4. Get a request number.
Execute the @Remote Settings
2. Input the request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI with
SP5-816-202.
3. Confirm the request number, and then press [EXECUTE] with SP5-816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5-816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
Communication error (proxy

3 Check the network condition.
enabled)

disabled)
5 Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below.
SM 2-155 D255/D256/M281/M282
@Remote Settings
Request number confirmation

9 Processing. Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error
21 Answer tone detection error
22 Carrier detection error

* These errors occur only in the modems
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
that support @Remote.
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
5. Make sure that the screen displays the location information with SP5-816-205 only
when it has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Press [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5-816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5-816-207.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-156 SM
@Remote Settings
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
Installation
2 Already registered Check the registration status.

enabled)

disabled)
5 Proxy error (Authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
8 Other error See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing. Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error
21 Answer tone detection error
22 Carrier detection error

* These errors occur only in the modems
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
that support @Remote.
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line

SP5-816-208 Error Codes
SM 2-157 D255/D256/M281/M282
@Remote Settings
These are caused by operation errors, or incorrect settings.
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Obtain a request number before

Inquiry, registration attempted without
-12002 attempting the Inquiry or
acquiring Request No.
registration.
Attempted registration without

Perform confirmation before
-12003 execution of a confirmation and no
attempting the registration.
previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004 Check ID2 of the mainframe.
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited. Make sure that "Remote Service" in

-12005 The device has an Embedded RC User Tools is set to "Do not
gate-related problem. prohibit".
A confirmation request was made after

-12006 the confirmation had been already Execute registration.
completed.
The request number used at

-12007 registration was different from the one Check Request No.
used at confirmation.
Check the mainframe condition. If

Update certification failed because
-12008 the mainframe is in use, try again
mainframe was in use.
later.
The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match

-12009 Check ID2 of the mainframe.
the ID2 in the individual certification.
-12010 The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area.
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-158 SM
@Remote Settings
Errors Caused by Response from GW URL
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-2385 Other error -
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center -
Installation
-2389 Database out of service -
-2390 Program out of service -
Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition of

-2391
mainframe the mainframe.
-2392 Parameter error -
-2393 External RCG not managed -
-2394 Mainframe not managed -
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal. -
Mainframe ID for external RCG is

-2396 -
illegal.
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the request number.
SM 2-159 D255/D256/M281/M282
Operation Guidance for Users
2.25 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS
Function/Operation Instruction to provide
Basic machine  How to load and replace the toner cartridge and the waste toner
functions, operations bottle
 How to load paper
 How to turn ON/OFF the main power
 How to clear paper jams
 How to program, modify, and delete Address Book entries
 How to customize the UI and home screen
 Overview of machine options/peripherals
 How to take the proper action for SC errors (clearing the error,
contacting service and support, etc.), how to interpret @Remote
notifications
 Important notes to keep in mind whenever moving the machine
 Product limitations
Copier (MP 501/601  Basic Copier operations

Only)  How to load an original in the ARDF or place it on the exposure
glass for scanning
 How to use thick paper and other specialized paper/media
 How to configure the Copier main screen (duplex/simplex, User
Codes, etc.)
 Basic Document Server operations
Fax (MP 501/601  How to send a fax (Memory Transmission, Direct Transmission)
Only)
Printer  How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)

 How to connect to a PC (performing the port settings)
 How to print out a test page
 Overview of various settings inside each tab in the printer driver
(e.g. duplex printing)
Scanner (MP  How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)
501/601 Only)  How to connect to a PC and perform a test scan
D255/D256/M281/M282 2-160 SM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
None
Yield Parts Settings
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 YIELD PARTS SETTINGS
3.1.1 YIELD PARTS REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

The parts mentioned in the table have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made
by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine’s targeted lifetime if the machine
is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are
Maintenance
Preventive
categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
3. Set SP7-804-002 to "1".
Item SP
Drum unit
Development unit
Fusing unit
Transfer unit
Paper feed roller SP7-804-002
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Feed roller assy (ARDF)*1
Separation pad (ARDF) *1
*1 Only for MP 501/601

6. Replace the yield parts and turn ON the main power.
The machine will reset the PM counter.
After installing the new yield parts

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter value.
3. Make sure that the PM counter is "0" with SP7-621-002.
SM 3-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
Yield Parts Settings
Operation check
Check if the sample image has been copied normally.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
79 09/15/2016 Added “After Replacement of Development Unit”
102 08/09/2016 Added Fusing Unit note for replacement procedure.
149 ~ 150 02/09/2017 Updated Replacing the NVRAM(EEPROM) on the IOB
154  155 09/15/2016 Added PSU Caution statement
Notes on the Main Power Switch
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH

The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button)
from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications
different from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)

Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power is turned OFF.
and Adjustment
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is
Replacement
connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit
and other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing electrical
components in this stage, it can damage other electrical components.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning OFF
the main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord after the main power
LED on the operation panel is turned OFF.
 If you unplug the power cord before turning OFF the main power LED, some icons on
the operation panel will not appear at the next start-up. Restarting the machine again
will solve this issue.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there is
still residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, there is still residual charge
inside the machine for a while. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a
blown fuse or memory failure.
 How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, press the main power switch. The charge remaining in
the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch after you disconnect the
AC power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you
finish work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press
the main power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to
move. When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.
SM 4-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
Notes on the Main Power Switch
 Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord
or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of
power, the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not
start automatically. This is due to the timing of releasing the residual charge. If you press the main
power switch when the residual charge was already released, the power ON flag will not be set.
For such a case, start the machine manually by pressing the main power switch.
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the machine.
2. The shutdown message appears. After the shutdown process, the main power is
turned OFF automatically. The main power LED on the operation panel is turned OFF
when the machine completes the shutdown.
 Before removing and adjusting electrical boards, do the following procedure.

Otherwise, the board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine
and must be replaced.
3. Disconnect the power cord after shutdown.
4. Press the main power switch for a second to remove the residual charge inside the
machine.
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
 Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the
machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-2 SM
Beforehand
4.2 BEFOREHAND
 Before you begin a procedure, please do the following:

For MP 501 and MP 601, which have fax features, print out all messages stored in the
memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
Turn OFF the main power. Disconnect the power cord and network cable. For MP 501
and MP 601, disconnect the telephone line.
 Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Before you start to remove components from the machine, do the following:
2. Make sure that the shutdown process has finished and that the LED on the operation
panel has turned OFF.
3. Unplug the power cord.
 After the main power of the machine has been turned OFF, the power is supplied to the
controller board until the HDD unit has been shut down safely.
SM 4-3 D255/D256/M281/M282
Special Tools
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS
The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this machine in the field.
U: Unique for this machine
C: Common with listed machine
No. Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common
1 B6455030 SD Card 2GB 1 C (General)
 A PC is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when replacing the
controller board for a model in which HDD encryption has been enabled.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-4 SM
Image Adjustment
4.4 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
4.4.1 PRINTING
 Make sure the paper is set correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
 Use Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-003, No.14) to print the test pattern for the
following procedures.
 Set SP2-109-003 to "0" again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration: Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
and Adjustment
Replacement
A: Leading Edge Registration (4 ± 2.5 mm)
B: Side-to-side Registration (4 ± 2.5 mm)
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-001.
Paper Feed Station SP No. Adjustment Range
Tray 1 (Main unit) SP1-001-001
Tray 2 (Optional tray) SP1-001-002
Tray 4 (Optional tray) SP1-001-004 4±2.5 mm
Bypass Tray SP1-001-006
Duplex Tray SP1-001-007
SM 4-5 D255/D256/M281/M282
Image Adjustment
2. Check the side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust them
using SP1-002.
Paper Feed Station SP No. Adjustment Range
Tray 1 (Main unit) SP1-002-001
Tray 4 (Optional tray) SP1-002-004 4±2.5 mm
Bypass Tray SP1-002-006
Duplex Tray SP1-002-007
Blank Margin
If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the specifications, adjust the
leading/left side edge blank margin.
A: Left Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Trailing Edge Blank Margin
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C], left edge [D] blank margins,
and adjust them using the following SP modes.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-6 SM
Image Adjustment
Edge SP No. Adjustment Range
Left Edge SP2-103-001
Right Edge SP2-103-002

4±2.5 mm
Leading Edge SP2-103-003
Trailing Edge SP2-103-004
Main Scan Magnification

1. Use SP2-109-003, No.5 (Grid Pattern) to print the single-dot grid pattern.
2. Check the magnification, and adjust the magnification using SP2-102-001
and Adjustment
Replacement
(Magnification Adjustment Main Scan) if necessary. The specification is ± 1%.
SM 4-7 D255/D256/M281/M282
Image Adjustment
4.4.2 SCANNING (MP 501/601 ONLY)
 Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration
/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
Registration: Platen Mode
A: Side-to-side Registration (Main Scan Reg)

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the side-to-side registration, and adjust it using the following SP mode if
necessary.
SP No. SP Name Adjustment Range
SP4-011-001 Main Scan Reg ±2.5 mm
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-8 SM
Image Adjustment
4.4.3 ARDF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT (MP 501/601 ONLY)
Registration
A: Side-to-side Registration
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary.
ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:

SP6-006-001
Front
±3.0 mm
ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:
SP6-006-002
Rear
SM 4-9 D255/D256/M281/M282
Factory SP Settings
4.5 FACTORY SP SETTINGS
This section provides the factory SP settings.

You can check the factory SP settings with the SMC report provided with the machine. The SMC
report is stored in the paper feed tray. (For details, see page 2-8 "SMC Storage")
If the SMC report is not stored with the machine, refer to the tables in this section.
4.5.1 MP 501/601
Factory
SP No. SP Name Default Value
Setting
SP1-001-001 Reistration Correct: Main +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP1-001-006 Reistration Correct: By-Pass Tray +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP1-001-007 Reistration Correct: Duplex +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP4-011-001 S-to-S Regist Adjustment +0.0 mm -- mm*1
SP4-108-001 Sub Scan Speed.Adjustment +0.0 % -- %*1
SP4-110-001 L-Edge Timing Adjustment +0 pulse -- pulse*1
SP4-609-001 Gray Balance Set: R: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-609-002 Gray Balance Set: R: DF Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-610-001 Gray Balance Set: G: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
SP4-610-002 Gray Balance Set: G: DF Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
Gray Balance Set: BW: Book

SP4-610-003 -100 digit -- digit*1
Scan
Gray Balance Set: BW: Book

SP4-610-004 -100 digit -- digit*1
Scan
SP4-611-001 Gray Balance Set: B: Book Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-10 SM
Factory SP Settings
Factory
Setting
SP4-611-002 Gray Balance Set: B: DF Scan -100 digit -- digit*1
Auto Logout Timer: Auto Logout

SP5-101-107 1: Enable 0: Disable
Time
SP5-305-101 Auto Off Set: Set Function 1: Enable 0: Disable
OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel 1:

SP5-748-201 0: Not connected
Connect Setting Connected
NA/EU :0
NA/EU :0 (Off)
SP5-805-002 Drum Heater (Off)
AP: 1 (ON)
and Adjustment
AP: 1 (ON)
Replacement
0: The machine
reboots 1: The
automatically machine
when the does not
SP5-875-001 SC Auto Reboot: Reboot Setting
machine issues reboot when
an SC error and an SC error
logs the SC error occurs.
code.
0 or 9
(Set the
SP5-907-001 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name 0 appropriate
setting for
the model)
SP5-985-001 Device Setting: On Board NIC 0: Disable 1: Enable
SP5-985-002 Device Setting: On Board USB 0: Disable 1: Enable
ADF Adjustment: Side-to-Side

SP6-006-001 +0.0 mm -- mm *1
Regist: Front
ADF Timing Adjustment: Leading

SP6-026-001 +0 pulse -- pulse*1
Edge Start Timing: Front

SP6-026-003 -16 pulse -- pulse*1
Edge End Timing: Front
SM 4-11 D255/D256/M281/M282
Factory SP Settings
Factory
Setting

SP6-026-004 -16 pulse -- pulse*1
Edge End Timing: Rear
ADF Adjustment Scan Speed:

SP6-027-001 +0.0 % -- %*1
Simplex Mode
ADF Adjustment Scan Speed:

SP6-027-003 +0.0 % -- %*1
Duplex Mode: Rear
*1: This setting is specific to the machine type.
4.5.2 SP 5300/5310
Factory
Setting
Auto Logout Timer: Auto Logout

SP5-101-107 1: Enable 0: Disable
Time
SP5-305-101 Auto Off Set: Set Function 1: Enable 0: Disable
0: The machine
reboots 1: The
automatically machine
when the does not
SP5-875-001 SC Auto Reboot: Reboot Setting
machine issues reboot when
an SC error and an SC error
logs the SC error occurs.
code.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-12 SM
Factory SP Settings
Factory
Setting
NA/EU :0
NA/EU :0 (Off)
SP5-805-002 Drum Heater (Off)
AP: 1 (ON)
AP: 1 (ON)
0 or 9
(Set the
SP5-907-001 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name 0 appropriate
setting for
the model)
*1: This setting is specific to the machine type.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-13 D255/D256/M281/M282
Exterior Covers (MP 501/601)
4.6 EXTERIOR COVERS (MP 501/601)
4.6.1 SCANNER FRONT COVER

1. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook of the scanner front cover [B].
2. Release the two hooks of the scanner front cover [A].
3. Insert a flathead screwdriver at [A] to release the hook, and then remove the scanner
front cover [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-14 SM
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the scanner front cover when you
remove or install the scanner front cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.6.2 FRONT COVER
2. Open the bypass tray [A].
SM 4-15 D255/D256/M281/M282
3. Release the left hinge [A] of the bypass tray with a flathead screwdriver by slightly
bending the bypass tray inward.
4. Release the right hinge [A] of the bypass tray by sliding it to the left.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-16 SM
5. Remove the right connecting arm [A] and left connecting arm [B] of the bypass tray
[C].
6. Remove the bypass tray [C].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-17 D255/D256/M281/M282
8. Remove the switch cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-18 SM
9. Remove the spring [A] and power switch [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
10. Remove the belt [A].
11. Remove the front cover [A] by releasing the left hinge [B].
SM 4-19 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.6.3 RIGHT UPPER COVER

1. Remove the rear left stay. (page 4-37)
of the arrow.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-20 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-21 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.6.4 RIGHT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the right upper cover. (page 4-20)
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-22 SM
4. Remove the four screws from the right lower cover [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-23 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Open the rear lower cover [A], and then release the hook of the right lower cover [B] by
7. Release the hooks [A] and [B].
8. Remove the right lower cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-24 SM
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the right lower cover when you
remove or install the right lower cover.
and Adjustment
 Do not remove the screw [A] when removing the right lower cover [B].
Replacement
SM 4-25 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.6.5 LEFT UPPER COVER

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into , , and in order to release the three hooks of
the left upper cover [A].
3. Remove the left upper cover [A] by inserting a flathead screwdriver into [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-26 SM
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left upper cover when you
remove or install the left upper cover.
4.6.6 LEFT MIDDLE COVER
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Remove the following covers.
 Left upper cover (page 4-26)
 Left rear cover (page 4-30)
3. Open the waste toner bottle cover [A], and then remove the waste toner bottle [B].
SM 4-27 D255/D256/M281/M282
4. Release the hook by lifting the left middle cover [A] upward.
5. Release the hooks in the order of , , and .

6. Remove the left middle cover [A] and waste toner bottle cover [B].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left middle cover when you
remove or install the left middle cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-28 SM
4.6.7 LEFT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the left middle cover. (page 4-27)
2. Remove the screw holding the left lower cover [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the left lower cover as shown below, and
then remove the left lower cover [A]. (hook×3)
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left lower cover when you remove
or install the left lower cover.
SM 4-29 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.6.8 LEFT REAR COVER

2. Remove the left rear cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow. (hook×2)
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left rear cover when you
remove or install the left rear cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-30 SM
4.6.9 REAR UPPER COVER

 Left lower cover (page 4-29)
 Rear middle cover (page 4-33)
2. Remove the ground screw from the left side of the machine.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Open the transparent film [A]. (hook×2)
4. Disconnect two connectors, and then release them from the harness guide [A].
SM 4-31 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Release the left hinge [A] of the rear upper cover [B] by slightly bending the rear upper
cover inward.
7. Remove the rear upper cover [A] by sliding it to the left.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-32 SM
 When removing the rear upper cover, release the harness [A] from the mainframe.
4.6.10 REAR MIDDLE COVER
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Remove the rear lower cover. (page 4-35)
2. Release three hooks of the rear middle cover [A] in the order of , , and .
 When releasing the hooks at and , pull the right side [A] of the rear middle
cover while pressing each hook upward.
SM 4-33 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When releasing the hook at , pull the left side [A] of the rear middle cover while
pressing the hook upward.
3. Remove the rear middle cover [A] by rotating in the direction of the arrow.
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear middle cover when you
remove or install the rear middle cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-34 SM
4.6.11 REAR LOWER COVER

1. Release the right hinge [A] of the rear lower cover [B] by pushing the rear lower cover
inward with a flathead screwdriver.
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] by sliding it to the right.
SM 4-35 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.6.12 REAR CENTER STAY

 Rear left stay (page 4-37)
2. Remove the screw from the rear center stay [A].
3. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] and [B] to release the hooks of the rear center
stay [C].
4. Remove the rear center stay [C].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear center stay when you
remove or install the rear center stay.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-36 SM
4.6.13 REAR LEFT STAY

1. Remove the controller cover. (page 4-45)
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of , , and to release three hooks of
the rear left stay [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear right stay when you remove
or install the rear right stay.
SM 4-37 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.6.14 PAPER EXIT COVER

1. Remove the rear center stay. (page 4-36)
2. Remove the two screws from the paper exit cover [A].
3. Remove the paper exit cover [A] from the right side. (hook×1)
 Be careful not to damage the hook at the rear of the paper exit cover when you remove or
install the paper exit cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-38 SM
4.6.15 PAPER EXIT TRAY

1. Remove the scanner unit. (page 4-76)
2. Remove the controller box. (page 4-128)
 Paper exit cover (page 4-38)
cartridge [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Release the two hooks from the operation panel arm upper cover [A].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the operation panel arm upper
cover when you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover.
SM 4-39 D255/D256/M281/M282
7. Release the USB cable [A] and harness [B] of the operation panel from the harness
guides.
8. Remove the operation panel unit with bracket [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-40 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
 The screw [B] is a sems screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing
the paper exit tray.
10. Remove the two screws from the left side cover [A].
SM 4-41 D255/D256/M281/M282
11. Remove the left side cover [A].
 These two screws are tapping screws. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when
installing the paper exit tray.
12. Remove the front right cover [A].
13. Remove the two screws from the right side cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-42 SM
14. Remove the right side cover [A].
 These two screws are tapping screws. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when
installing the paper exit tray.
and Adjustment
15. Remove the paper exit tray [A].
Replacement
SM 4-43 D255/D256/M281/M282
 The screw [B] is a sems screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when installing
the paper exit tray.
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the paper exit tray when you
remove or install the paper exit tray.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-44 SM
4.6.16 CONTROLLER COVER

2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release the hook of the controller cover [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-45 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-46 SM
Exterior Covers (SP 5300/5310)
4.7 EXTERIOR COVERS (SP 5300/5310)
4.7.1 UPPER COVER

and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-47 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-48 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
8. Remove the plastic sheet [A] from the main frame (hook×2), and then remove the upper
cover [A].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the upper cover when you remove or
install the upper cover.
SM 4-49 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.7.2 FRONT COVER

2. Open the bypass tray [A].
3. Release the left hinge [A] of the bypass tray with a flathead screwdriver by slightly
bending the bypass tray inward.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-50 SM
4. Release the right hinge [A] of the bypass tray by sliding it to the left.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-51 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Remove the right connecting arm [A] and left connecting arm [B] of the bypass tray
[C].
6. Remove the bypass tray [C].
7. Open the upper cover [A], and then open the front cover [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-52 SM
8. Remove the screw from the switch cover [A].
9. Release the right hinge [A] of the front cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
10. Remove the switch cover [A].
11. Remove the spring [A] and power switch [B].
SM 4-53 D255/D256/M281/M282
12. Remove the front cover [A] by releasing the left hinge [B].
4.7.3 RIGHT COVER

1. Remove the upper cover. (page 4-47)
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-54 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-55 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Remove five screws from the right cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-56 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-57 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.7.4 LEFT UPPER COVER

 Upper cover (page 4-47)
 Left rear cover (page 4-61)
3. Open the waste toner bottle cover [A], and then remove the waste toner bottle [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-58 SM
4. Release the hook by lifting the left upper cover [A] upward.
5. Release the hooks in the order of , , and .

6. Remove the left upper cover [A] and waste toner bottle cover [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left upper cover when you
remove or install the left upper cover.
SM 4-59 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.7.5 LEFT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the left upper cover. (page 4-58)
2. Remove the screw holding the left lower cover [A].
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the left lower cover as shown below, and
then remove the left lower cover [A]. (hook×3)
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left lower cover when you remove
or install the left lower cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-60 SM
4.7.6 LEFT REAR COVER

2. Remove the left rear cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the arrow.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the left rear cover when you
remove or install the left rear cover.
SM 4-61 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.7.7 REAR UPPER COVER

 Rear middle cover (page 4-64)
2. Remove the ground screw.
3. Open the transparent film [A]. (hook×2)
4. Disconnect the two connectors, and then release them from the harness guide [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-62 SM
6. Release the left hinge [A] of the rear upper cover [B] by slightly bending the rear upper
cover inward.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Remove the rear upper cover [A] by sliding it to the left.
SM 4-63 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When removing the rear upper cover, release the harness [A] from the mainframe.
4.7.8 REAR MIDDLE COVER

1. Remove the rear lower cover. (page 4-66)
2. Release three hooks of the rear middle cover [A] in the order of , , and .
 When releasing the hooks at and , pull the right side [A] of the rear middle
cover while pressing each hook upward.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-64 SM
 When releasing the hook at , pull the left side [A] of the rear middle cover while
pressing the hook upward.
3. Remove the rear middle cover [A] by rotating in the direction of the arrow.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the rear middle cover when you
remove or install the rear middle cover.
SM 4-65 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.7.9 REAR LOWER COVER

1. Release the right hinge [A] of the rear lower cover [B] by pushing the rear lower cover
inward with a flathead screwdriver.
2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] by sliding it to the right.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-66 SM
4.7.10 CONTROLLER COVER

and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-67 D255/D256/M281/M282
Operation Panel (MP 501/601)
4.8 OPERATION PANEL (MP 501/601)
This section includes only the replacement procedure which is unique for the MP 501/601 series.
The replacement procedures for the other parts are included in the FSM for the Smart Operation
Panel, because these parts are also used with other models.
4.8.1 OPERATION PANEL

 Scanner front cover (page 4-14)
 Right lower cover (page 4-22)
2. Disconnect the USB cable [A].
3. Release the USB cable [A] from the harness guides.
4. Release the two hooks from the operation panel arm upper cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-68 SM
and Adjustment
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the operation panel arm upper cover when
Replacement
you remove or install the operation panel arm upper cover.
6. Remove the ground screw and disconnect the connector.
SM 4-69 D255/D256/M281/M282
7. Pull out the USB cable [A].
8. Remove the operation panel [A] from the mainframe.
9. Remove the rear center cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-70 SM
10. Remove the rear right cover [A] and rear left cover [B].
11. Remove the right hinge cover [A] and left hinge cover (lower) [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
12. Remove the left hinge cover (upper) [A] and left hinge cover (left) [B]. (hook×2)
SM 4-71 D255/D256/M281/M282
13. Remove the right hinge [A] and left hinge [B].
14. Remove the USB cable [A] and ground cable [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-72 SM
Before Installing the New Operation Panel

There is a DIP switch [A] on the sub board of the operation panel.
The switch setting to use depends on the model.

Make sure that only switch No. 3 and 7 are ON. Otherwise, SC672-11 occurs when starting the
and Adjustment
machine.
Replacement
4.8.2 INTERNAL PARTS
Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel.
SM 4-73 D255/D256/M281/M282
Operation Panel (SP 5300/5310)
4.9 OPERATION PANEL (SP 5300/5310)
4.9.1 OPERATION PANEL

1. Remove the upper cover. (page 4-47)
2. Remove the sheet [A] from back side of the upper cover [B].
3. Remove the seven screws.
 The screws [A] are sems screws. Be careful not to use the wrong screws when
installing the operation panel.
4. Open the bracket [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-74 SM
Operation Panel (SP 5300/5310)
5. Remove the operation panel [A].
4.9.2 OPU BOARD

1. Remove the operation panel. (page 4-74)
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Remove the OPU board [A].
SM 4-75 D255/D256/M281/M282
Scanner Unit (MP 501/601 Only)
4.10 SCANNER UNIT (MP 501/601 ONLY)
4.10.1 SCANNER UNIT

 Scanner front cover (page 4-14)
 Right upper cover (page 4-20)
 Rear center stay (page 4-36)
3. Disconnect the flat cable [A] and release it from the harness guide [B].
4. Open the clamp [A] and disconnect the three connectors. Then release the connectors
from the harness guides [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-76 SM
5. Remove the ground screw [A].
6. Remove the two screws from the rear side of the scanner unit [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Remove the scanner unit [A].
SM 4-77 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.10.2 SCANNER CARRIAGE

1. Remove the ARDF unit. (page 4-160)
2. Remove the exposure glass [A].
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the exposure glass when you
remove or install the exposure glass.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-78 SM
3. Remove the clip [A] from the pulley [B] on the right side.
4. Remove the plate [A] and carriage belt [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the right, and then remove the carriage belt [B] from
the pulley [C] on the left side.
SM 4-79 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Remove the scanner carriage [A] and shaft [B] with the carriage belt from the
mainframe.
 When removing the scanner carriage [A] from the mainframe, disconnect the flat
cable [B] and release it from the harness guides at the back of the scanner carriage
[A].
7. Remove the shaft [A] from the scanner carriage [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-80 SM
8. Remove the carriage belt [A] from the scanner carriage [B]. (hook×1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-81 D255/D256/M281/M282
Laser Unit (MP 501/601)
4.11 LASER UNIT (MP 501/601)
 Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
4.11.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION

The caution decal is attached as shown below.
4.11.2 LASER UNIT

1. Remove the paper exit tray. (page 4-39)
2. Disconnect the red connector and flat cable from IOB [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-82 SM
3. Pull the flat cable [A] out through the apertures.
4. Remove the flat cable with the bracket [A] by sliding it to the rear while pushing the
hook [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Pull the red harness [A] out through the apertures, and then release it from the harness
guides.
SM 4-83 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Remove the laser unit [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-84 SM
Laser Unit (SP 5300/5310)
4.12 LASER UNIT (SP 5300/5310)
 Turn OFF the main power and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
4.12.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION

The caution decal is attached as shown below.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.12.2 LASER UNIT
2. Disconnect the red connector from IOB [A].
SM 4-85 D255/D256/M281/M282
3. Disconnect the flat cable.
4. Remove the flat cable with the bracket [A] by sliding it to the rear while pushing the
hook [B].
5. Pull the red harness [A] out through the apertures, and then release it from the harness
guides.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-86 SM
6. Remove the laser unit [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-87 D255/D256/M281/M282
Development Unit
4.13 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
4.13.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

D255/D256/M281/M282 4-88 SM
Development Unit
cartridge [B].
3. Pull out the PCDU [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Release the hook, and then remove the container guide [A] by sliding it to the rear.
(hook×1)
SM 4-89 D255/D256/M281/M282
Development Unit Rev. 09/15/2016
5. Disconnect the connector.
6. Release the hook [A] by pressing the lock lever, and then remove the development unit
[B]. (hook×1)
⇒ 4.13.2 AFTER REPLACEMENT OF DEVELOPMENT UNIT

1. Execute SP3-900-001 to supply toner to the development unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-90 SM
Drum Unit
4.14 DRUM UNIT
4.14.1 DRUM UNIT

1. Remove the development unit. (page 4-88)
2. Remove the right lock lever [A] from the drum unit [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to lose the right lock lever [A]. The right lock lever is not included in the
drum unit as a service part.
3. Remove the left lock lever [A] from the drum unit [B].
SM 4-91 D255/D256/M281/M282
Drum Unit
 Be careful not to lose the left lock lever [A]. The left lock lever is not included in the
drum unit as a service part.
4. Remove the drum unit [A] by pulling it out.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-92 SM
Drum Unit
4.14.2 CHARGE ROLLER

and Adjustment
Replacement
cartridge [B].
SM 4-93 D255/D256/M281/M282
Drum Unit
4. Remove the charge roller [A] from the PCDU [B] by pressing the lock lever [C].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-94 SM
Transfer Unit
4.15 TRANSFER UNIT
4.15.1 TRANSFER ROLLER

1. Remove the drum unit. (page 4-91)
2. Remove the transfer guide plate [A] by sliding it to the left.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the transfer guide plate when you remove or
install the transfer guide plate.
SM 4-95 D255/D256/M281/M282
Transfer Unit
3. Remove the shaft [A] of the transfer roller [B] from the bearings on the right and left
sides with a flathead screwdriver.
4. Remove the transfer roller [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-96 SM
Transfer Unit
4.15.2 DISCHARGE PLATE UNIT

1. Remove the transfer roller. (page 4-95)
2. Remove the discharge plate unit [A] by rotating it towards you.
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the discharge plate unit when you remove or
install the discharge plate unit.
SM 4-97 D255/D256/M281/M282
Fusing Unit
4.16 FUSING UNIT
4.16.1 FUSING UNIT

 MP 501/601: Rear upper cover (page 4-26), Controller cover (page 4-45)
 SP 5300/5310: Rear upper cover (page 4-62), Controller cover (page 4-67)
2. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear side of the machine.
3. Disconnect the two connectors.
 The connector [A] is gray. Be careful not to connect the wrong connector when
installing the fusing unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-98 SM
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the connector cover [A]. (hook×1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
 When removing the connector cover, insert the flathead screwdriver into [A] and
release the hook of the connector cover.
SM 4-99 D255/D256/M281/M282
Fusing Unit
6. Remove the screw from the connector cover [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-100 SM
Fusing Unit
7. Release the hook, and then remove the connector cover [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
9. Release the connector from the harness guide.
SM 4-101 D255/D256/M281/M282
Fusing Unit Rev. 08/09/2016
10. Remove the fusing unit [A].
When removing the fusing unit [A], release the harness [B] from the mainframe.
⇒ When reinstalling the fusing unit, perform the following procedures.

(1) Turn ON the power switch after removing the fusing unit and opening the rear cover.
(2) Wait for more than 5 seconds and then turn OFF the power switch.
The cam on the left side turns backward and releases pressure when the power
switch is turned ON.
(3) Reinstall the fusing unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-102 SM
Paper Exit Unit (MP 501/601)
4.17 PAPER EXIT UNIT (MP 501/601)
4.17.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT

1. Remove the paper exit tray. (page 4-39)
2. Remove the spring [A] from the right side of the paper exit unit [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Disconnect the connector from the Connect-Left PCB [A].
SM 4-103 D255/D256/M281/M282
4. Release the harness [A] from the harness guides.
5. Remove the three screws from the left side of the machine.
 The screw [A] is a ground screw and [B] is a big screw. Be careful not to use the
wrong screws when installing the paper exit unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-104 SM
7. Remove the two screws from the right side of the machine.
8. Remove the paper exit unit [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-105 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When removing the paper exit unit [A], release the four hooks from both sides of the
paper exit unit.
 When removing the paper exit unit [A], disconnect the connector [B] from the paper
exit unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-106 SM
Paper Exit Unit (SP 5300/5310)
4.18 PAPER EXIT UNIT (SP 5300/5310)
4.18.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT

 Controller box (page 4-132)
2. Remove the spring [A] from the paper exit unit [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Disconnect the connector [A] from the Connect-Left PCB [B], and then release it from
the plastic harness guide [C].
SM 4-107 D255/D256/M281/M282
4. Release the harness [A], disconnected in the previous step, from the harness guides.
5. Remove the three screws from the left side of the machine.
 The screw [A] is a ground screw and [B] is a big screw. Be careful not to use the
wrong screws when installing the paper exit unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-108 SM
7. Remove the two screws from the right side of the machine.
8. Remove the paper exit unit [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-109 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When removing the paper exit unit [A], release the four hooks from both sides of the
paper exit unit.
 When removing the paper exit unit [A], disconnect the connector [B] from the paper
exit unit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-110 SM
Paper Feed Unit
4.19 PAPER FEED UNIT
4.19.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER, PICKUP ROLLER

and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Release the lock of the feed roller holder [A] by releasing the lever.
3. Remove the paper roller holder [A] by pushing it to the left.
SM 4-111 D255/D256/M281/M282
Paper Feed Unit
4. Remove the paper feed roller [A] from the feed roller holder [B]. (hook×1)
5. Remove the pickup roller [A]. (hook×1)
4.19.2 SEPARATION ROLLER

2. Remove the separation roller holder [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-112 SM
Paper Feed Unit
3. Remove the spring [A].
4. Remove the separation roller unit [A] by rotating it as shown below.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Remove the separation roller [A]. (hook×1)
SM 4-113 D255/D256/M281/M282
Bypass Tray Unit
4.20 BYPASS TRAY UNIT
4.20.1 BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER

 MP 501/601: Front cover (page 4-15), Right lower cover (page 4-22), Left middle cover
(page 4-27)
 SP 5300/5310: Front cover (page 4-50)
2. Remove the bypass bottom plate unit [A].
 When removing the bypass bottom plate unit [A], rotate the lever [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-114 SM
Bypass Tray Unit
3. Slide the shaft [A] of the bypass tray paper feed roller [B] to the right while releasing
the hook.
4. Remove the bypass tray paper feed roller [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-115 D255/D256/M281/M282
Duplex Unit
4.21 DUPLEX UNIT
4.21.1 DUPLEX UNIT

1. MP 501/601 only) Remove the ARDF unit. (page 4-160)
2. Remove the left lower cover. (MP 501/601: page 4-29, SP 5300/5310: page 4-60)
3. Remove the controller box. (MP 501/601: page 4-128, SP 5300/5310: page 4-132)
4. Remove the PSU fan. (page 4-158)
5. Remove the connector cover [A] from the rear side of the machine. (hook×1)
 When removing the connector cover, insert the flathead screwdriver into [A] and
release the hook of the connector cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-116 SM
Duplex Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Release the harness [A] from the harness guide.
SM 4-117 D255/D256/M281/M282
Duplex Unit
8. Remove the ground screw [A] and disconnect the two connectors.
 When installing, wind the harness [A] around the clamp [B] twice, as shown below.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-118 SM
Duplex Unit
10. Remove the PSU [A] and bracket [B] from the mainframe. (hook×3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
12. Close the front cover [A].
SM 4-119 D255/D256/M281/M282
Duplex Unit
13. Stand the main unit front side up.
14. Remove the bottom plate [A].
15. Remove the bottom plate [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-120 SM
Duplex Unit
16. Remove the wire cover [A]. (hook×2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
18. Remove the seven screws from the duplex unit [A].
SM 4-121 D255/D256/M281/M282
Duplex Unit
19. Remove the duplex unit [A] while removing the shaft [B] from the coupling [C].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-122 SM
Drive Unit
4.22 DRIVE UNIT
4.22.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Remove the IOB. (MP 501/601: page 4-147, SP 5300/5310: page 4-148)
3. Remove the harness from the harness guides of the bracket [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-123 D255/D256/M281/M282
Drive Unit
5. Remove the paper feed motor [A].

MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-124 SM
Drive Unit
4.22.2 MAIN DRIVE UNIT

1. Remove the IOB. (MP 501/601: page 4-147, SP 5300/5310: page 4-148)
2. Remove the PSU. (page 4-154)
3. Remove the harness from the harness guide of the bracket [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-125 D255/D256/M281/M282
Drive Unit
5. Remove the main drive unit [A].
Main Motor
1. Remove the main drive unit. (page 4-125)
2. Remove the clip [A] and gear [B] from the backside of the main drive unit [C].
3. Remove the main motor [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-126 SM
Drive Unit
Drum Motor
1. Remove the main drive unit. (page 4-125)
2. Remove the clip [A] and gear [B] from the backside of the main drive unit [C].
3. Remove the drum motor [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-127 D255/D256/M281/M282
Electrical Components
4.23 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.23.1 CONTROLLER BOX
Controller Box (MP 501/601)

1. Remove the right lower cover. (page 4-22)
3. Disconnect the USB connector [A] of the operation panel.
4. Disconnect the two flat cables and two connectors.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-128 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
 When disconnecting the flat cable [A], pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
SM 4-129 D255/D256/M281/M282
 The screw [B] is a tapping screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when
7. Release the hook [A], and then remove the controller box [B] by rotating it
counter-clockwise.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-130 SM
 When installing the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat cable
to the harness guides, as shown below.
 When installing the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the harness
and Adjustment
and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
Replacement
SM 4-131 D255/D256/M281/M282
Controller Box (SP 5300/5310)

1. Remove the right cover. (page 4-54)
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-132 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-133 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When installing the controller box [A], make sure to secure the harness and flat cable
to the harness guides, as shown below.
 When installing the bracket [A] of the controller box [B], do not interpose the harness
and the flat cable between the bracket and the controller box.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-134 SM
4.23.2 CONTROLLER BOARD
Controller Board (MP 501/601)
 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
2. Disconnect the connector on the controller box [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-135 D255/D256/M281/M282
4. Remove the cap [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-136 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
8. Remove the controller board [A] from the BiCU [B].
9. Remove the two guide rails [A] from the controller board [B]. (hook×2)
SM 4-137 D255/D256/M281/M282
10. Remove the two NVRAMs [A] from the old controller board and install them on the new
controller board.
 Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and orientation.
Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [B]
on the controller board.
 Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM.
Controller Board (SP 5300/5310)
 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-138 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 4-139 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Remove the controller board [A] from the BiCU [B].
7. Remove the two guide rails [A] from the controller board [B]. (hook×2)
8. Remove the two NVRAMs [A] from the old controller board and install them on the new
controller board.
 Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and orientation.
Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [B]
on the controller board.
 Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and NVRAM.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-140 SM
NVRAM on the controller board
 SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the NVRAM.
 If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, it will cause a short circuit in the
controller board and the NVRAM, and each component will need to be replaced.
 Installing a new NVRAM initializes SPs and issues an SC. Reset the SC with the
procedure below.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (Factory SP Settings). This report comes with
the machine. (page 2-8)
If you do not have the SMC report, enter the factory settings while referring to the "Factory SP
Settings" (page 4-10).
2. Output the SMC log using one of the following methods:
and Adjustment
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001.
Replacement
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (SMC List Card Save Function).
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD Card Slot 2, and then turn ON the main power.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the controller board.
6. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the
backup by referring to SP5-846-051.
 The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure.
So be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
 Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the
address book data.
 If the customer have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data
for restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up
properly depending on the NVRAM's condition.
7. For MP 501/601, do the following steps.
1. Print the Box List with the User Tools.
 [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] -> [General Settings] ->
[Box Setting: Print List]
2. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order.
 [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Reception Settings] -> [Program Special
Sender: Print List]
3. Write down the following fax settings.
 [Receiver] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Reception Settings] -> [Reception File Settings] -> [Forwarding].
 [Notify Destination] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
SM 4-141 D255/D256/M281/M282
[Reception Settings] -> [Reception File Settings] -> [Store].

 [Specify User] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Reception Settings] -> [Stored Reception File User Setting].
 [Notify Destination] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Reception Settings] -> [Folder Transfer Result Report].
 Specified folder in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Send Settings] -> [Backup File TX Setting].
 [Receiver] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile Features] ->
[Reception Settings] -> [Reception File Settings] -> [Output Mode Switch Timer].
 [Store: Notify Destination] in [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Facsimile
Features] -> [Reception Settings] -> [Output Mode Switch Timer].
 All the destination information shown on the display.
 In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the system
internally assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to
re-assigning in backup/restore operations.
4. Make sure that there is no transmission standby file. If any standby file exists, ask the
customer to delete it or complete the transmission.
8. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord.
9. Turn ON the main power again to discharge the residual charge.
10. Replace the NVRAM with a new one.
 For SP 5300/5310, SC995 will be displayed after turning ON the main power.
 For MP 501/601, SC995 might be internally issued after turning ON the main power.
 After turning ON the main power, SC870 will occur and the address book data will be
cleared.
12. For MP 501/601, change the following SP settings for the operation panel after turning
ON the main power.
 SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
 SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value
from "0" to "1".
13. For MP 501/601, change the Flair API SP values.
 SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
 SP1-041-001 (Scan:FlairAPI Setting) in Scanner SP: Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
 SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) in Fax SP: Change bit 0 from "0" to "1".
14. Turn OFF/ON the main power with the SD card where the NV-RAM data has been
uploaded in SD slot 2.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-142 SM
15. Download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using
SP5-825-001 (NV-RAM Data Download).
 The download will take a few minutes.

16. Turn OFF the main power and remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2.
18. Restore the original settings of the following SPs, by referring to the SMC data
obtained in step 2.
 SP5-825-001 does not download the following SP data to the new NV-RAM. You
must set them manually.
 SP5-985-001(Device Setting: On Board NIC) (MP 501/601 only)
 SP5-985-002(Device Setting: On Board USB) (MP 501/601 only)
and Adjustment
 SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Settings)
Replacement
 SP5-730-001 (Extended Function Setting: JavaTM Platform setting) (MP
501/601 only)
19. For MP 501/601, if the security functions (HDD Encryption and HDD Data Overwrite
Security) were applied, set the functions again.
20. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data
using SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to
ensure the address book data has been restored properly.
 If you have obtained a backup of the customer’s address book data, delete the
backup immediately after the NVRAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking out
the customer’s data.
21. Output the SMC log using one of the following methods:
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001.
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (SMC List Card Save Function).
 Check that the counters are reset.

22. For MP 501/601, make sure that the list output in steps 7-1 through steps 7-3 matches
the destination information in the machine. If not, set it to the setting before
replacement.
SM 4-143 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Try the following if NVRAM upload (SP5-824-001) or download (SP5-825-001)

cannot be done.
 Check the SP values that changed on the SMC you printed out in step 2. Adjust
the values manually. Make sure that the values of SP5-045-001 (MP 501/601
only) and SP5-302-002 are the same as before replacing.
 If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM
replacement, create a "SD card for restoration" and restore with the SD card. Refer
to the following.
 MP 501/601: page 2-149 "Encryption Key Restoration"
 SP 5300/5310: page 2-152 "Encryption Key Restoration"
4.23.3 BICU
 Fuse condition on the BiCU is below.
Address MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310
FU1 5A 76V T0.5A 63V
1. Remove the controller board with the BiCU from the controller box.
 MP 501/601: (page 4-135)
 SP 5300/5310: (page 4-138)
2. Remove the BiCU [A] from the controller board [B].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-144 SM
3. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old BiCU and attach it to the new BiCU.
 Attaching the used NVRAM to the new BiCU allows users to use old data such as SP
settings.
 Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data with
and Adjustment
SP5-811-004. If not, SC995-001 occurs. Install a NVRAM [A] so that the indentation
Replacement
[B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark on the BiCU. Incorrect installation of
the NVRAM will damage both the BiCU and NVRAM.
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BiCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (Factory SP Settings). This report comes with
the machine. (page 2-8)
If you do not have the SMC report, enter the factory settings while referring to the "Factory SP
Settings" (page 4-10).
2. Output the SMC data ("ALL") using SP5-990-001/SP5-992-001.
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD Card Slot 2, and then turn ON the main power.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the BiCU.
6. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BiCU with a new one.
 Install a new NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with
the mark on the BiCU. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the
BiCU and NVRAM.
SM 4-145 D255/D256/M281/M282
8. Plug in the power cord, and then turn ON the main power.
 When the main power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears. Continue with the following
steps.
 After changing the EEPROM, some SPs do not have the correct values.
 Because of this, step 9 must be done.
9. Set the machine serial number SP5-811-001, area selection SP5-996-001, CPM set
SP5-882-001.
 For information on how to configure the above SPs, contact the supervisor in your
branch office.
11. Execute SP5-801-002 "Memory Clear Engine".
12. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn it back ON.
13. From the SD card where you saved the NV-RAM data in step 5, download the NV-RAM
data with SP5-825-001.
14. Turn OFF the main power, and then remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
16. Check the SMC report (Factory SP Settings) from step 1, and set the user tool and SP
settings so they are the same as before.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-146 SM
4.23.4 IOB
IOB (MP 501/601)

2. Remove the bracket [A]. (hook×2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the IOB [A].
4. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old IOB and attach it to the new IOB.
SM 4-147 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Install a NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the
mark on the IOB. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and
NVRAM.
IOB (SP 5300/5310)

2. Disconnect the two connectors, and then release them from the harness guides.
3. Remove the bracket [A]. (hook×2)
4. Disconnect the two flat cables.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-148 SM
Rev. 02/09/2017 Electrical Components
5. Remove the IOB [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old IOB and attach it to the new IOB.
 Install a NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the
mark on the IOB. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and
NVRAM.
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the IOB

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (Factory SP Settings). This report comes with the
machine. If you do not have the SMC report, enter the factory settings while referring to the
“Factory SP Settings”.
2. Output the SMC data “ALL” using the SP 5990-001(Print) or SP 5992-001 (SD card).
3. Power off the main power and unplug the power cord.
SM 4-149 D255/D256/M281/M282
Electrical Components Rev. 02/09/2017
4. Replace the NVRAM on the IOB with a new one.
 Install the NVRAM [A] so that the indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark on
the IOB. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the IOB and the NVRAM.
5. Plug in the power cord, and then turn ON the main power.
6. Execute Sp5-901-00x “All Data Initialize”.
Destination SP
NA/ LA (120V) SP5-901-007
EU/ LA (230V) SP5-901-006
 Do not use SP5-901-009 (Oceania).

7. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn ON the main power again.
8. Set SP4-698-003 “Factory mode” to “1”.
 Do not open the Front Cover, and do not turn OFF/ON the main power until step 11.
 For information on how to configure the above SP, contact the supervisor in your branch
office.
 Displayed number will be changed to “0” soon after setting SP4-698-003 to “1”. This is
normal operation and the SP has been executed correctly.
9. Execute SP3-900-002 “Toner Install Mode: Off”.
10. Set the below SPs to see the SMC report (Factory SP Settings) from step 1 or 2.
 SP4-108-001 “Sub Scan Speed Adjustment”,
 SP4-110-001 “L-Edge Timing Adjustment”,
 SP6-026-001 “ADF Timing Adjustment, Leading Edge Start Timing: Front”,
 SP6-027-001 “ADF Adjustment Scan Speed, Simplex Mode”
11. Turn OFF the main power, then turn ON the main power again.
12. Check the SMC report (Factory SP Settings) from step 1 or 2, and set the user tool and SP
settings so they are the same as before.
 Check the below SPs have correct values.

 SP6-026-003: 0
 SP6-026-004: 0
 SP6-027-002: -0.3
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-150 SM
4.23.5 CONNECT-LEFT PCB

1. Remove the laser unit. (MP 501/601: page 4-82, SP 5300/5310: (page 4-85)
2. For SP 5300/5310, remove the left upper cover. (page 4-58)
3. Disconnect the flat cable and harness from the Connect-Left PCB [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Disconnect the connector from the left side of the machine.
5. Release the harness from the harness guides of the laser fan unit [A].
SM 4-151 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Remove the laser fan unit [A]. (hook×1)
7. Remove the Connect-Left PCB [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-152 SM
4.23.6 FUSING THERMISTOR CONNECTION PCB

 MP 501/601: Paper exit tray (page 4-39)
 SP 5300/5310: Upper cover (page 4-47)
2. Remove the screw which is fixing the fusing thermistor connection PCB [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Turn over the fusing thermistor connection PCB [A], and then disconnect the flat cable
and connectors.
SM 4-153 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.23.7 POWER PACK

1. Remove the duplex unit. (page 4-116)
2. Remove the power pack [A]. (hook×2)
 When removing the power pack, disconnect two connectors from back side of the power
pack [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-154 SM
 When installing the power pack, insert the actuator [A] through the hole [B] of the power
pack [C].
4.23.8 PSU
1. Remove the controller box (MP 501/601: page 4-128, SP 5300/5310: page 4-132)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the ground screw [A] and release the two connectors.
SM 4-155 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When installing, wind the harness [A] around the clamp [B] twice, as shown below.
5. Remove the PSU [A] and bracket [B] from the mainframe. (hook×3)
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-156 SM
6. Remove the PSU [A] from the bracket [B].
4.23.9 HDD (MP 501/601 ONLY)
 Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with SP5-846-051 if
and Adjustment
Replacement
possible.
 If the customer uses the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type M19, NFC Card Reader Type
M24, or OCR Unit Type M13, these applications must be installed again.
1. Remove the controller board with the BiCU. (page 4-135)
2. Remove the HDD with the bracket [A] from the controller box [B]. (hook×2)
3. Remove the HDD [A] from the HDD bracket.
SM 4-157 D255/D256/M281/M282
Adjustment after Replacement

1. Execute SP5-832-001 to initialize the HDD.
Initialization should be performed for the HDD which has already been formatted before.
2. If applicable, execute SP5-846-052 to restore the address data from SD card to the
HDD.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-158 SM
Fans
4.24 FANS
4.24.1 PSU FAN

1. Remove the right lower cover. (MP 501/601: page 4-22, SP 5300/5310: page 4-54)
2. Disconnect the connector of the PSU fan [A] from the right side of the machine.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Release the hook [A] by lifting the fan bracket [B]. (hook×1)
4. Remove the PSU fan with the bracket [A]. (hook×2)
SM 4-159 D255/D256/M281/M282
Fans
5. Remove the PSU fan [A] from the bracket. (hook×3)
4.24.2 DIRECTION OF INSTALLING THE FANS
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-160 SM
ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)
4.25 ARDF (MP 501/601 ONLY)
4.25.1 ARDF UNIT

1. Remove the right upper cover. (page 4-20)
2. Remove the ground screw and release the clamp from the rear side of the machine.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Release the harness from the harness guides and clamp.
4. Disconnect the three connectors.
SM 4-161 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Open the ARDF [A].
6. Remove the ARDF unit [A] by lifting it up.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-162 SM
4.25.2 ARDF PAPER FEED ROLLER, ARDF PICKUP ROLLER

1. Open the ARDF upper cover [A].
2. Rotate the lock lever [A] to the unlock position. (hook×1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the ARDF paper feed roller and ARDF pickup roller [A].
SM 4-163 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.25.3 ARDF FRICTION PAD

1. Remove the ARDF paper feed roller and ARDF pickup roller. (page 4-163)
2. Remove the ARDF friction pad [A]. (hook×2)
4.25.4 ARDF INVERTER MOTOR

D255/D256/M281/M282 4-164 SM
2. Remove the ARDF rear cover [A]. (hook×4)
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the ARDF rear cover when you remove or
install the ARDF rear cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Remove the ARDF inverter motor [A].
SM 4-165 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.25.5 ARDF PAPER FEED MOTOR, ARDF PAPER TRANSPORT

MOTOR
2. Remove the ARDF rear cover [A]. (hook×4)
 Be careful not to damage the hooks on the ARDF rear cover when you remove or
install the ARDF rear cover.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-166 SM
3. Disconnect the eight connectors from the rear side of the ARDF.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Release the harness from the harness guides.
SM 4-167 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Remove the ARDF inverter motor unit [A]. (hook×1)
 The screw [B] is a ground screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw when
installing the ARDF paper feed motor and ARDF paper transport motor.
6. Remove the ARDF paper feed motor and ARDF paper transport motor [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-168 SM
Paper Feed Unit (Paper Feed Unit PB1100)
4.26 PAPER FEED UNIT (PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100)
4.26.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER, PICKUP ROLLER

1. Remove the paper feed tray [A] of the optional paper feed unit by pulling it out.
and Adjustment
Replacement
2. Slide the shaft [A] to the left while pushing the release lever [B].
3. Remove the feed roller holder [A] by sliding it to the left.
SM 4-169 D255/D256/M281/M282
4. Remove the paper feed roller [A] from the feed roller holder [B]. (hook×1)
5. Remove the pickup roller [A]. (hook×1)
4.26.2 SEPARATION ROLLER

2. Remove the separation roller holder [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-170 SM
3. Remove the spring [A].
4. Remove the separation roller [A] by rotating it as shown below.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Remove the separation roller [A]. (hook×1)
SM 4-171 D255/D256/M281/M282
4.26.3 MAIN BOARD

1. Uninstall the optional paper feed unit from the main machine.
2. If the optional paper feed unit is installed on the caster table, uninstall it from the caster
table.
4. Turn over the optional paper feed unit [A], and then remove the board cover [B].
(hook×2)
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-172 SM
5. Remove the main board [A]. (hook×3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
4.26.4 DRIVE UNIT
1. Uninstall the optional paper feed unit from the main machine.
2. If the optional paper feed unit is installed on the caster table, uninstall it from the caster
table.
SM 4-173 D255/D256/M281/M282
4. Turn over the optional paper feed unit [A], and then remove the board cover [B].
(hook×2)
5. Release the harness of the main board [A] from the harness guides.
6. Disconnect the five connectors from the main board [A].
7. Turn over the optional paper feed unit again, and then remove the upper cover [A].
(hook×1)
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-174 SM
8. Remove the drive unit [A] from the upper cover [B].
and Adjustment
Replacement
 When removing the drive unit [A], remove the coupling [B] from the shaft [C].
SM 4-175 D255/D256/M281/M282
Rev. 01/20/2017 Firmware Update
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.1.1 OVERVIEW
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware on a SD card. Insert the SD card in SD Card Slot 2.
5.1.2 FIRMWARE TYPE
MP 501/601
Firmware type Firmware position Message display
FONT (Font EXP) Controller board GW13e_prt_SAMf
FONT1 (PCL Font) Controller board GW3a_pcl_fntI
Maintenance
System
FONT2 (PS3 Font) Controller board GW2e_prt_psfnt8
Engine IOB BRMF1a_eplot
Engine (IPU) BiCU BRMF1a_eipu
NetworkDocBox Controller board BRMF1a_netfile
Media print JPEG/TIFF

Controller board BRZMF1e_printer
(Printer)
Web Support Controller board BRZMF1a_web
Network Support Controller board BRZMF1a_net
PowerSaving Sys Controller board BRZMF1e_subcpu
PCL Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PCL
RPCS Controller board BRMF1e_prt_RPCS
PS (PDF) Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PDF
PS3 Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PS3
Web Uapl Controller board BRZMF1a_webua
SM 5-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
RFax (Remote Fax) Controller board BRMF1a_fax2
Scanner Controller board BRMF1a_scn
FCU Controller board GW1a_efax_fcu1T
System/Copy Controller board BRMF1a_system
Fax Controller board BRMF1a_fax
Smart Operation Panel Smart Operation Panel – CPU

M2a_System
System board
Smart Operation Panel – CPU

CSPF M2a_cspf
board

LegacyUI type-1 M2a_LegacyUI
board

Fax RX File Widget M2a_WFaxInfo
board

Quick Scanner M2a_SimpleScan
board

Quick Copy M2a_SimpleCopy
board

Quick Fax M2a_SimpleFax
board

Stop Widget M2a_WStopKey
board

Eco-friendly Widget M2a_WEcoInfo
board

Standard IC Card Plugin M2a_QuickCdAuth
board

iWnn IME M2a_iWnn
board
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-2 SM
Rev. 01/20/2017 Firmware Update
SP 5300/5310
FONT (Font EXP) Controller board GW13e_prt_SAMf
FONT1 (PCL Font) Controller board GW3a_pcl_fntI
FONT2 (PS3 Font) Controller board GW2e_prt_psfnt8
Engine IOB BRP1a_eplot
Engine (IPU) BiCU BRP1a_eipu
NetworkDocBox Controller board BRMF1a_netfile
Media print JPEG/TIFF

Controller board BRZMF1e_printer
(Printer)
Web Support Controller board BRZMF1a_web
Maintenance
System
Network Support Controller board BRZMF1a_net
PowerSaving Sys Controller board BRZMF1e_subcpu
PCL Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PCL
RPCS Controller board BRMF1e_prt_RPCS
PS (PDF) Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PDF
PS3 Controller board BRMF1e_prt_PS3
System Controller board BRZP1a_system
 Even when not using a RPCS driver, the XPS driver requires RPCS firmware.
SM 5-3 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
5.1.3 PROCEDURE
 A SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the following.
 When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
 During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
 Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid location,
or in direct sunlight.
 Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
 Before downloading firmware on an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD
card is canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will be
displayed during download, and the download will fail.
 Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
 If SC818 is generated during software update, switch the power OFF -> ON, and
complete the update which was interrupted.
 During software update, network cables, remove interface cables, wireless boards, etc.,
(so that they are not accessed during update).
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-4 SM
Firmware Update
Update procedure (MP 501/601)

1. First download the software to be updated to the SD card.
4. Insert the SD card [A] straight in the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
 If the customer has used all of the slots, you have to keep an empty slot for this
procedure. Ask the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in the SD Card Slot
2.
Maintenance
System
 Check whether the card is properly in the SD Card Slot. When a SD card is inserted,
a click is heard, and it is locked.
 To remove the card, release by pressing once in the set state.
6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When two or
more software modules are contained in the SD card, they are displayed as follows.
When two or more software names are displayed

1. Press the module selection button or 10 keypad [1] - [5].
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection)
Operation of keys or buttons
SM 5-5 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Exit] or 10 key [0] Returns to normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selection states.
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, i.e., engine firmware and printer application are
displayed. (The screen may change depending on the firmware or application).
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
* The upper row corresponds to the module number, the lower row corresponds to the
version name.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key operation. The selected module
is highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
 Depending on the combination of update software, it may not be possible to select

simultaneously.
Key or button operations
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-6 SM
Firmware Update
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key, and perform software update.

10. During firmware update, a "firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, a "firmware update end screen" is displayed.
 In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in this
case, the printer is being updated)
 In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the
progress.)
 When updating the control unit program, since progress cannot be displayed on the
screen, the ROM update process is determined when the LED of the [Start] key changes
from red to green.x
Firmware update end screen
Maintenance
System
 This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated.
"printer" in the second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When
more than one are updated simultaneously, only what was updated last is displayed.)
 When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is
"Verify done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application
displayed in the lower row.
11. After turning OFF the main power, remove the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2.
12. Again, turn ON the main power, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
 When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted,
and the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
 To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is
successful.
 In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
SM 5-7 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
 Web access card software: EXJS (EXtended Java Script) is a Type-C ESA application,
and like a conventional Web access card, update using an sdk folder is required.
 The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware.
 In the default state, although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state,
the function is enabled by installing the PS3 card.
 (The program installed in the PS3 card is a dongle (key) for enabling PS3 function).
 Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number / software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.
Update procedure (SP 5300/5310)

1. First download the software to be updated to the SD card.
4. Insert the SD card [A] straight in the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
 If the customer has used all of the slots, you have to keep an empty slot for this
procedure. Ask the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in SD Card Slot 2.
 Check whether the card is properly in the SD Card Slot. When a SD card is inserted,
a click is heard, and it is locked.
 To remove the card, release by pressing once in the set state.
6. Wait until a firmware name is shown on the display (about 1 minute).
 The firmware name is read from inside the firmware. The firmware name is not
changed even if you change the file name on your PC.
7. If the necessary firmware name is shown on the display, check the firmware version with the
left-arrow or right-arrow keys. Pressing the left or right-arrow key shows a firmware name,
firmware version and serial number in order.
8. To use a different firmware, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key to find the
necessary firmware.
9. To select the firmware, push the OK key. Make sure that the selected firmware is highlighted.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-8 SM
Firmware Update
10. If you update more than one firmware program at the same time, find each of them and select
each of them. Make sure that the selected firmware is high-lighted.
11. To start firmware update, push the "UpDate" key. While each firmware is downloaded, the
underscores on the operation panel are replaced by stars.
12. Wait until the message "Update done" is shown.
13. After turning OFF the main power, remove the SD card.
14. Again, turn ON the main power, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
15. Print the Configuration Page to check that the every firmware is correctly updated:
List/Test Print > Config. Page
 An error code is shown if an error occurs during the download. Error codes have the letter
"E" and a number. If an error occurs, the firmware is not correctly downloaded; see the
error code table (page 5-9) and do the necessary steps. After this, download the firmware
again.
 If firmware update is interrupted by power failure, the firmware is not correctly
downloaded. In this condition, machine operation is not guaranteed. You have to
download the firmware again.
Maintenance
System
5.1.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING
EXX shows an error code.

(This error is generated if update was performed when a printer application startup card is
removed after system startup. An error indicating failure of card access is displayed on the
screen.)
For error codes, refer to the following table:
Error Code List
SM 5-9 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
Code Contents Solutions
20 Physical address mapping  Switch the main power supply off and
cannot be performed. on to try again.
 Re-insert the SD card to reboot it.
 Replace the controller board if the
above solutions do not solve the
problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the  Switch the main power supply off and
download on to try again.
updating cannot be done by switching
the power off and on.
23 Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second

update program started attempt fails, replace controller board.
22 Decompression of  Switch the main power supply off and

compressed data failed. on to try again.
 Replace the SD card used for the
update.
problem.
24 SD card access error  Re-insert the SD card.

 Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
 Replace the SD card used for the
update.
problem.
31 Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data
download required for the download, then re-start the
procedure.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-10 SM
Firmware Update
32 The SD card used after  Insert the SD card containing the same
download suspension is program as when the firmware update
incorrect. was suspended, and then switch the
SD cards are different main power supply off and on to try
between the one which was again.
inserted before power  There is a possibility that the SD card
interruption and the one which is damaged if the update cannot be
was inserted after power done after the correct SD card has
interruption. been inserted. In this case, try again
with a different SD card.
problem.
Replace all relevant boards if the
update is done for the BiCU and FCU.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
Maintenance
System
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error.  Install the correct ROM update data for
The wrong card version is each version in the SD card.
downloaded.
34 Destination error.  Install the correct ROM update data for

A card for the wrong each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in
destination is inserted. the SD card.
35 Model error.  Install the correct ROM update data for

A card for the wrong model is each model in the SD card.
inserted.
SM 5-11 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
36 Module error.  Install the program to be updated in

The program to be advance.
downloaded does not exist on  There is a possibility that the SD card
the main unit. containing the program to be updated
The download destination has not been mounted. Check to
specified by the card does not confirm that the SD card has been
match up to the destination for correctly mounted.
the main unit’s program.  The SD card is incorrect if the program
to be updated has been correctly
installed. In this case, insert the correct
SC card.
38 The version of the  Make sure that the program to be

downloaded program has not overwritten is the specified version.
been authorized for the
update.
40 Engine download fails.  Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
 If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the BiCU.
41 Fax download fails.*1  Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
controller board and the FCU board.
42 Control panel / language  Switch the main power supply off and
*1
download fails. on to try again.
controller board and the operation
panel unit.
43 Printing download fails.*1  Switch the main power supply off and
on to try again.
 The SD card media is damaged if the
update fails again. Replace the SD
card media.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-12 SM
Firmware Update
44 The data to be overwritten  Switch the main power supply off and
cannot be accessed when on to try again.
controller-related programs  Install the correct ROM update data in
are downloaded. the SD card.
 Replace the controller board if the data
to be overwritten is contained on the
controller board.
49 Firmware updates are  The setting of Update Firmware in the

currently prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to
[Prohibit] by an administrator. Amend
the setting to [Do not Prohibit] and try
again.
50 The results of the electronic  Install the correct ROM update data in
authorization check have the SD card.
rejected the update data.
Maintenance
System
57 @Remote is not connected at  Check the @Remote connection.
the date/time reserved for
receiving the package
firmware update from the
network. *1
58 Update cannot be done due to  Check the @Remote connection.

a reception route problem. *1
59 HDD is not mounted. *1  Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during  Try again.

the package firmware update.  Replace the HDD if the download fails
*1
again.
61 The module ID for the  Prepare the correct package files.

package firmware update is
incorrect. *1
62 The configuration of the  Prepare the correct package files.

package firmware update files
is incorrect. *1
SM 5-13 D255/D256/M281/M282
Firmware Update
63 Reception fails due to the  Update is to be done automatically

power off at the reserved when the next reception time has
date/time of the remote elapsed.
network. *1
64 Reception fails due to the  Reset the reservation date/time for the
power off at the reserved remote update.
date/time of the package
network. *1
65 Reception fails due to the  Update is to be done automatically

status error of the machine at when the next reception time has
the reserved date/time of the elapsed.
remote firmware update from
the network. *1
66 Reception failed due to the  Reset the reservation date/time for the
status error of the machine at remote update.
the reserved date/time of the
package firmware update
from the network. *1
67 Acquisition of the latest  Check that the network is connected

version information from the correctly.
Gateway fails at the reserved
date/time of the remote
network. *1
68 Acquisition of the latest  Check that the network is connected

version information from the correctly.
*1
Gateway fails.
69 Download fails at the reserved  Check that the network is connected

date/time of the remote correctly.
network.*1
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-14 SM
Firmware Update
70 Package firmware download  Check that the network is connected

*1
from the network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error  Check that the network is connected

occurs at the reserved correctly.
date/time of the package
network.*1
72 The setting of @Remote is  Set the setting of @Remote Service in

invalid at the reserved the Administrator Tools to [Do not
date/time of the package Prohibit].
network.*1
*1 The error occurs in MP 501/601 only
Maintenance
System
 The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as
default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled.
 The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the
PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this
specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software
version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.
SM 5-15 D255/D256/M281/M282
RFU Updating the Firmware
5.2 RFU UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.
5.2.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION

RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.
1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The devise is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-16 SM
Package Firmware Update (MP 501/601 Only)
5.3 PACKAGE FIRMWARE UPDATE (MP 501/601 ONLY)
 The HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package
firmware update via SD card.
5.3.1 OVERVIEW
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc) used to be updated individually.
However, an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are two ways to update using the firmware package.
 Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
 Package Firmware Update with an SD card
Maintenance
System
Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
 There are two methods for SFU.
 Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
 Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will
be automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
 "Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some
minutes due to the network condition.
 SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded
@Remote communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via
an intermediate device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
Package Firmware Update via an SD Card
Package firmware update can also be performed using the conventional SD card method by
writing the package firmware directly to the SD card.
SM 5-17 D255/D256/M281/M282
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:
SFU SD RFU
Individual firmware N/A Available Available
Package firmware Available Available N/A
5.3.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
 The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function.
 If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (page 5-9).
2. Touch [Firmware Update].
3. Touch [Update].
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-18 SM
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Touch [YES].
Maintenance
System
6. The following display will be displayed.
 If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, implement this procedure from step 1.
 Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
 When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a
print job is implemented. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display
shown with the following picture to restart updating.
SM 5-19 D255/D256/M281/M282
7. [Update done] is displayed.

 The machine will automatically reboot itself.
 The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All
items to be updated".
5.3.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time
for the firmware to download at the service visit.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-20 SM
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (RESERVE)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
 The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function. If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (page 5-9).
Maintenance
System
3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reservation setting].
SM 5-21 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Enter the dates and times of next visit and start of receiving data.
 "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically
downloaded by this time/date.
 "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this number
of days before the next visit.
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next
scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second
diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
 If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition,
no power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours
until the scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is
set for the day before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before
the visit, and then continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
 The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
 If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the
download will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy
Saver mode.
 The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job,
fax receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-22 SM
 The download will be terminated if the customer turns the main power OFF while the
download is in progress.
 If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE

3. Touch [Reserve].
Maintenance
System
4. Touch [Reserve and received package information].
SM 5-23 D255/D256/M281/M282
5. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware is downloaded successfully, the details of the download result
are displayed as the following picture shows.
 This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with RESERVE

3. Touch [Update].
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-24 SM
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
 Update is started.
Maintenance
System
 If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
 If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware will
be started.
 If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute]
beside the message "Update to the received package."
SM 5-25 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. [Update done] message is displayed.

 The machine will automatically reboot itself.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-26 SM
5.3.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD

Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the
package firmware to the SD card.
 If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating (page 5-9).
1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it "package".
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.
Maintenance
If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the update
System
will not work.
 Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you
copy multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select
only one version of the firmware randomly.
4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
5. Turn ON the main power, and then touch [Update].
SM 5-27 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 4
above.
6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has
been completed.
7. When update is completed, "Update done" is displayed.
8. Turn OFF the main power, and then pull out the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2
(lower).
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-28 SM
Updating JavaVM
5.4 UPDATING JAVAVM
5.4.1 MP 501/601
Creating an SD Card for Updating

1. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center. As one of the model
modules, "Java VM v12 UpdateTool" is available for download. (The version differs
depending on the model.)
2. Unzip the downloaded file. Copy the whole "sdk" folder to the root of the SD card
directly below.
 When unzipping the downloaded file, two subfolders ("update" and "sdk") exist in the
"sdk" folder. Rather than just copying the subfolder "sdk", copy the whole folder
"sdk".
Updating Procedure
Maintenance
System
 SD card can be inserted with the machine power off.
 During the updating process, do not turn OFF the main power.
 If you turn OFF the main power during the updating, the machine performance is not
guaranteed. (There is a possibility that an SC and boot failure occurs.)
 If you accidentally turn OFF the main power during the updating, retry the updating
procedure from the beginning. (If the update fails again, you will need to replace the
controller board.)
1. If the boot priority application is set to the ESA application, switch to the copy
application in [Function Priority].
 User Tools -> Machine Features -> System Settings -> General Features -> Function
Priority
3. Insert the SD card you created into the service slot.
5. After booting Java VM, update of the application is started. "Updating SDK/J" appears
in the banner message of the touch panel display. (Estimated time: about 2 minutes)
6. After completing the update and starting the Java VM, "Update SDK/J done SUCCESS
(xx.yy.zz), restore SUCCESS" appear in the banner message of the touch panel display.
After turning OFF the main power, remove the SD card from the slot.
"xx.yy.zz" indicates the firmware version of the Java VM.
SM 5-29 D255/D256/M281/M282
Updating JavaVM
When you fail to update, "Update SDK/J done FAIL" is displayed. You can confirm the cause
of the error message below.
8. Return to the previous setting for the boot priority application.
List of Error Messages

Update results are output as a text file on the SD card called "sdkjversionup.log" in the "¥sdk
¥update" folder.
Result File contents Description of the output
script file = Boot script path

/mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot scripts processing start time
Success
2012/08/22 17:57:47 start End time boot script processing, the
2012/08/22 17:59:47 end SUCCESS results
script file = Boot script path

/mnt/sd0/sdk/update/bootscript Boot scripts processing start time
Failure 2012/08/22 17:57:47 start Error message (Possibly multiple)
XXXX Error End time boot script processing, the
2012/08/22 17:57:57 end FAIL results
Error Message Cause Remedy
PIECEMARK Applied the wrong updating Use the correct updating

Error,machine=XXXXX tool (Using the updating tool tool for this model.
of a different model)
pasePut() - error : The file of Inadequacy with the SD Re-create the SD card for
the card for updating updating.
copy origin is not found (Files are missing in the
Put Error! updating tool)
paseCopy() - error : The file Inadequacy SD card for Inadequacy SD card for
of the copy origin is not updating updating
found. (Files in the updating tool (Files in the updating tool
Copy Error! are missing) are missing)
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-30 SM
Updating JavaVM
Error Message Cause Remedy
[file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is full. Uninstall the unnecessary
space (The NAND flash memory SDK applications.
left on device on the controller board is If you can not uninstall it,
pasePut() - error : The full.) implement escalation,
destination directory cannot stating the "model name,
be application configuration,
made. SMC sheet
pasePut() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025),
Error. and error file."
Put Error!
[file name: XX] error,No Writing destination is full. Uninstall the unnecessary
space (The NAND flash memory SDK applications.
left on device on the controller board is If you can not uninstall it,
paseCopy() - error : The full.) implement escalation
destination directory cannot stating the "model name,
Maintenance
be application configuration,
System
made. SMC sheet
paseCopy() - error : fileCopy (SP5-990-006/024/025),
Error. and error file."
Copy Error!
Put Error! *1 Error, not normally expected If you cannot uninstall it,
to occur implement escalation
Copy Error! *1
stating the "model name,
Delete Error! application configuration,
SMC sheet
[XXXXX] is an unsupported
(SP5-990-006/024/025),
command.
and error file."
Version Error *1
Without the foregoing error
message, only "Put Error /
Copy Error" will be
displayed
SM 5-31 D255/D256/M281/M282
Updating JavaVM
5.4.2 SP 5300/5310
For the SP5300/5310 series, updating Java VM is performed with PC using the update tool.
 Prepare the following items in advance.
 SD memory card reader/writer
 PC
 Updating flow is as follows.
1. Deactivate the SDK applications with Web Image Monitor.
2. Remove the VM CARD Type P8 from the main machine.
3. Update Java VM with PC using the update tool.
4. Install the VM CARD Type P8 to the main machine.
5. Activate the SDK applications with Web Image Monitor.
Deactivating SDK Applications

2. Take a note of the current heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
 [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Administrator
Tools] -> [Heap / Stack Size Settings]
3. Stop all SDK applications except for Java TM Platform.
1. Display the [Startup Setting] menu.
 [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Startup
Setting]
2. Check the radio button of the SDK application which status is "Starting Up".
3. Click [Start Up/Stop] to stop the application.
"Stop" is displayed in the status column.
 Do not change the status of Java TM Platform to "Stop".

4. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off" for each SDK application.
1. Click the [Details] icon ( ) for each SDK application in [Startup Setting].
2. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off". (Default: On)
5. Turn the main power OFF.
7. Remove VM CARD Type P8 from the SD Card Slot 1 [A].
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-32 SM
Updating JavaVM
Updating JavaVM
1. Insert VM CARD Type P8 into SD memory card reader/writer of your PC.
2. Check that the SD memory card reader/writer is detected on your PC, and then write
down the drive letter. (If the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), the drive
letter is "f")
3. Download the update modules from Firmware Download Center.
4. Unzip the downloaded file, and then execute the .exe file.
5. The folder is generated.
6. Execute the .bat file in the folder.
Maintenance
System
7. Input the drive letter following a message "Please input drive letter of SD card [a - x]: ".
(If the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), input "f")
8. Press the [Enter] key to start updating Java VM.

It takes 3 minutes to update Java VM.
9. After completing the update, remove VM CARD Type P8 from SD memory card
reader/writer of your PC.
SM 5-33 D255/D256/M281/M282
Updating JavaVM
10. Insert VM CARD Type P8 into SD Card Slot 1 [A] of the machine.
Activating SDK Applications

1. Turn the main power ON.
3. Change the setting of "Auto Start" to "On" for each SDK application.
1. Display the [Startup Setting] menu.
 [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Startup
Setting]
2. Click the [Details] icon ( ) for each SDK application.
3. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "On". (Default: On)
4. Reconfigure the heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
 [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Administrator
Tools] -> [Heap / Stack Size Settings]
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-34 SM
Capturing the Debug Logs
5.5 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS
5.5.1 OVERVIEW
 This function is not available on models without a hard disk.

 Log related to FAX like FCU debug log is stored only when a machine has FAX.
With this feature, you can save debug logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation
panel) on an SD card. It allows the service representative to save and retrieve error information
for analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves debug logs for the following three.
 Controller debug log
 Engine debug log
 FCU debug log (MP 501/601 only)
 Operation panel log
 Communication log (network packet)
 Configuration page
Maintenance
 Printer setting list
System
 Font list
 Error log
 Fax information (MP 501/601 only)
 SMC
 In older models, a service representative enabled the logging tool after a problem
occurred. After that, when the problem had been reproduced, the service representative
was able to retrieve the debug log.
 However, this new feature saves the debug logs at the time that problems occur. Then
you can copy the logs to an SD card.
 You can retrieve the debug logs using an SD card without a network.
 Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
SM 5-35 D255/D256/M281/M282
Types of debug logs that can be saved
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage capacity)
Controller HDD (4 GB)

debug log Compressed when written to an SD card
 Saved at all times
(GW debug from the HDD (from 4 GB to about 300
log) MB)
 When an engine SC
occurs
 When paper
Engine feeding/output stop by
HDD (Up to 300 times)
debug log jams
 When the machine covers
are opened during normal
operation
 When a controller SC
occurs
 When saving by manual
operation with the Number Operation panel (400 MB /Up to 30
Operation keys and the Reset key times)
panel debug (Press [Reset], [0], [1] and When updating the firmware for the
log [C] (hold for 3 seconds)) operation panel, the debug logs are
 When the operation unit erased.
detects an error
 When the operation panel
detects an error
 Debug logs are not saved in the following conditions.

 When there is no HDD.
 While erasing all memory
 While data encryption equipment is installed
 While changing the firmware configuration
 Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
 Engine debug log in shutdown
 When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF
mode /STR mode)
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-36 SM
Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.
 User ID
 Password
 IP address
 Telephone number
 Encryption key
 Transition to SP mode
Also the following operation logs are not saved.
 Soft keyboard on the touch panel display
 External keyboard
5.5.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOGS
 Retrieve debug logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find details
of the problems
 e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does
Maintenance
not respond. Turn the main power OFF/ON.
System
 You need to retrieve the debug logs dating back three days from the date of the problem.
 Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log

1. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.
MP 501/601:
Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel.
SP 5300/5310:
2. Insert the SD card into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower) [A].
SM 5-37 D255/D256/M281/M282
Capturing the Debug Logs Rev. 02/08/2017
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Set the start date of the log with SP5-858-101 (Start date of debug log output)
e.g.: March 28, 2013: input 20130328 (yyyymmdd)
 Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.
4. Set the end date of the log with SP5-858-102 (Days of tracing)
 “2” is the value set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.
 A value of “1” to “180” can be set.
5. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to write the debug log to the SD card.
6. If the transfer is finished successfully, "completed" is displayed.
 The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may be
affected by the type or format of the SD card. (It is recommended that you format the SD
card using the Panasonic SD Formatter (freeware)).
 Controller debug log (GW debug log): 2 - 20 minutes
 Engine debug log: 2 minutes
 Operation panel log: 2 - 20 minutes
7. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.
 If "failed" appears on the operation panel, turn the main power OFF, and then recover
from step 1 again.
The debug logs are saved with the following file names.
Controller debug
/LogTrace/machine number/watching/yyyymmdd_hhmmss_unique
log (GW debug
identification number.gz
log)
Engine debug
/LogTrace/machine number/engine/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz
log
FCU debug log

(MP 501/601 /LogTrace/machine number/fculog/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz
only)
Operation panel
/LogTrace/machine number/opepanel/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.tar.gz
og
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-38 SM
Rev. 02/08/2017 Capturing the Debug Logs
Communication
log (network /LogTrace/machine number/packet_log/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.gz
packet)
Configuration /LogTrace/machine
page number/gps/ConfigrationPage/ConfigrationPage_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
 /LogTrace/machine number
/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
Printer setting
 /LogTrace/machine
list
number/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_yyyymmdd_hhmms
s.csv
 /LogTrace/machine number/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PCL_the page

number_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.jpg
 /LogTrace/machine number/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PDF_the page
Font list
 /LogTrace/machine number/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PS_the page
Maintenance
System
Error log /LogTrace/machine number/gps/ErrorLog/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
Fax information
(MP 501/601 /LogTrace/machine number/faxreport/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
only)
/LogTrace/machine number/smc/machine
SMC
number_5992XXX_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv
SM 5-39 D255/D256/M281/M282
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.6 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.6.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
 This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
 Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Execute SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All (Data List)) before you turn OFF the main
power. You will need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
3. Remove the controller cover. (MP 501/601: page 4-45, SP 5300/5310: page 4-67)
4. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower) [A].
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310

6. Press [Execute] in SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM¥<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM¥K5000017114.NV
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-40 SM
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that
holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was
uploaded.
 You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
 The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if
the connection between the controller and BiCU is defective.
 Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
 Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
 Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
Maintenance
MP 501/601
System
SP 5300/5310

5. Press [Execute] with SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download).
SM 5-41 D255/D256/M281/M282
 The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the
serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
 Total Count
 C/O, P/O Count (MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-42 SM
UP/SP Data Import/Export
5.7 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Import/export conditions
Import/export is possible between devices only if their model type, region of use.
5.7.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (MP 501/601)
Data that can be imported and exported

 Copier / Document Server Features
 Printer Features
 Scanner Features
 Facsimile Features
 Browser Features
 Program (Document Server)
 Program (Copier)
Maintenance
 Program (Scanner)
System
 Web Image Monitor Setting
 Web Service Settings
 System Settings
 Screen Features
 Home screen customization settings *1
*1 Wallpaper cannot be exported if "Live Wallpapers" is selected.
Data that cannot be imported or exported

 Some System Settings *1 *2
*1 The setting for the date, settings that require the device certificate, and settings that need
to be adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot be imported
or exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
 Extended Feature Settings
 Address book
 Programs (fax function)
 Programs (printer function)
 Settings that can be specified via telnet
SM 5-43 D255/D256/M281/M282
 @Remote-related data
 Counters
 Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example,
Bonjour, SSDP setting)
Exporting Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel.
2. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memry Strge Devc)].
7. Set the export conditions.
 Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device

Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
 Specify an encryption key.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-44 SM
8. Press [Run Export].

9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.
 If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
 When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device
setting information file with special software and store it on the web server.
Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Import (Memry Strge Devc)].
Maintenance
System
7. Configure the import conditions.
 Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
 Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device
Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
 Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
8. Press [Run Import].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
 If import or export fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same
location as the exported device setting information file.
SM 5-45 D255/D256/M281/M282
5.7.3 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (SP 5300/5310)

 Paper Input
 Maintenance
 System
 Print Settings
 Security Options
 Remote Services
 Host Interface
 Web Image Monitor Setting
 Web Service Settings
Data that cannot be imported or exported

 Address book
 Programs (printer function)
 Settings that can be specified via telnet
 RICOH @Remote-related data
 Counters
 Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example,
Bonjour, SSDP setting)
 Settings for the date and time
 Settings that require the device certificate
 Settings that need to be adjusted for each printer (for example, image adjustment settings)
 Settings exclusively for executing functions and settings exclusively for viewing

D255/D256/M281/M282 5-46 SM

4. Press the [Menu] key.
5. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
6. Select [Device Setting Information] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [DevSettgInfo: Exp (MemDev)] -> Press [OK]
8. Select [Device Unique Information] -> Press [OK]
9. Select [Include] or [Exclude] -> Press [OK]
If [Include] is selected, the device unique information (IP address, host name, fax number,
etc) is included in the exporting device information.
10. Select [Enter Encryption Key] -> Press [OK]
11. Select [Yes] -> Press [OK]
12. Select [Enter] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
13. Select [Enter] -> Re-enter the encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
14. Select [Export] -> [Export]
15. When the confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].
16. Make sure the message regarding that the exporting process being successfully
completed appears. -> Select [Exit]
17. Log out.
Maintenance
System
 When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device
setting information file with special software and store it on the web server.


4. Press the [Menu] key.
5. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
SM 5-47 D255/D256/M281/M282
6. Select [Device Setting Information] -> Press [OK]

7. Select [DevSettgInfo: Exp (MemDev)] -> Press [OK]
8. Select [Device Unique Information] -> Press [OK]
9. Select [Include] or [Exclude] -> Press [OK]
If [Include] is selected, the device unique information (IP address, host name, fax number,
etc) is included in the importing device information.
10. Select [Enter Encryption Key] -> Press [OK]
11. Select [Yes] -> Press [OK]
12. Select [Enter] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
13. Select [Enter] -> Re-enter the encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
14. Select [Export] -> [Export]
15. When the confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].
16. Make sure the message regarding that the exporting process being successfully
completed appears. -> Select [Exit]
17. Log out.
 If import or export fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same
5.7.4 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (MP 501/601)

 System SP
 Printer SP
 Fax SP
 Scanner SP

2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select "Target" SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner/Smart Operation Panel) to be
exported.
5. Select "Option" settings (Unique/Secret).
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-48 SM
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique Unique information that can be updated

information of #1. Items that are to be used to identify the machine.
the machine is Example: Network Information/ Host name / Information
included in the related to fax number /Mail address assigned to the
exported file if machine
you select #2. Items for specifying the options equipped on the
"Unique" machine.
setting. Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if imported
Example: Serial number / Information related to
@Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the machine
Example: Time and date / Counter information /
Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Maintenance
System
Secret Secret Secret information
information is #1. Data that cannot be exported without being
exported if you encrypted.
select "Secret" (Exported data is encrypted.)
setting. Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department code / Mail
address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network parameters
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select "Crypt config" setting (Encryption).
SM 5-49 D255/D256/M281/M282
Encryption Select whether to If the encryption function is used, setting of an

encrypt or not when encryption key is required by direct input.
exporting.  Type the arbitrary password using the soft
If you push the keyboard
"Encryption" key,  Can enter up to 32 characters
you can export
secret information.
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [OK].

2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.
Unique If you want to apply the unique Refer to the above information.
information to the target machine,
select the "Unique" key.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the

import file, this setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-50 SM
5.7.5 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT (SP 5300/5310)

 Service SP
 Engine SP

Maintenance
System
4. Enter SP mode.
5. Select SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export).
6. If you want to include the unique information in the exported file, select [Unique].
7. Select [Encryption] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
8. Press [EXECUTE].
9. Press [OK].
SM 5-51 D255/D256/M281/M282


4. Enter SP mode.
5. Select SP5-749-101 (Import/Export: Import).
6. If you want to include the unique information in the imported file, select [Unique].
7. Select [Encryption] -> Enter an encryption key. -> Select [Accept]
8. Press [EXECUTE].
9. Press [OK].
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-52 SM
5.7.6 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0
indicate that an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
Maintenance
System
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down
the error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) between different models or model with the same device
machines with different device configurations.
configurations.
4 (INVALID OUTPUT Failed to write the device Check whether the destination
DIR) information to the destination device is operating normally.
device.
7 (MODULE ERROR) An unexpected error occurred Switch the power off and then back
during import or export. on, and then try the operation again.
If the error persists, contact your
supervisor.
SM 5-53 D255/D256/M281/M282
Result Code Cause Solutions
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on Execute the operation again after
the external medium is making sure there is enough
insufficient. storage space.
9 (DEVICE ERROR) Failed to write or read the log Check whether the path to the
file. folder for storing the file or the folder
in which the file is stored is missing.
10 (LOG ERROR) The hard disk is faulty. Contact your supervisor.
20 (PART FAILED) Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged
in "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the
system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed
because of the system status or
interlocking with other specified
settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for
some other reason.
21 (INVALID FILE) Failed to import the file because Check whether the file format is
it is in the wrong format in the correct.
external medium. The import file should be a CSV file.
22 (INVALID KEY) The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
 When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on
an SD card.
 The file format for exports is CSV.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-54 SM
Address Book Upload/Download
5.8 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.8.1 INFORMATION LIST

The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
MP 501/601
 Registration No.
 User Code
 E-mail
 Protection Code
 Fax Destination
 Fax Option
 Group Name
 Key Display
 Select Title
 Folder
 Local Authentication
Maintenance
 Folder Authentication
System
 Account ACL
 New Document Initial ACL
 LDAP Authentication
SP 5300/5310
 Registration No.
 User Code
 Local Authentication/ Authentication Lock-out
 Account ACL
 New Document Initial ACL
 LDAP Authentication
 Group Entry Number
 Group Name
SM 5-55 D255/D256/M281/M282
5.8.2 DOWNLOAD
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310

8. Execute SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
 If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error
message is displayed.
 Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your
location.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-56 SM
5.8.3 UPLOAD
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower)
[A].
MP 501/601
SP 5300/5310
Maintenance
System
6. Execute SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power.
8. Remove the SD card from the SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
 The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

 The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
 If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
SM 5-57 D255/D256/M281/M282
SMC List Card Save Function
5.9 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.9.1 OVERVIEW
SMC List Card Save

The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the
SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot.
5.9.2 PROCEDURE
MP 501/601
2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD card slot. Then turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select [System SP].
5. Select SP5-992 (SP Text Mode).
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-58 SM
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
027 SmartOperationPanel SP
028 SmartOperationPanel UP
7. Press [EXECUTE].
Maintenance
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
System
9. "It is executing it" is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until "Completed" is shown.
 The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

 Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
SM 5-59 D255/D256/M281/M282
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
SP 5300/5310
2. Insert the SD card into the SD Card Slot 2 (lower). Then turn ON the main power.
3. Enter the [Engine] in the SP mode (Service).
4. Select SP5-992 (SP Text Mode).
5. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card and press [OK].
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-60 SM
6. Press [EXECUTE].
7. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
8. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until "Completed" is shown.
 The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

 Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
9. Press [End] to exit from SP mode.
Maintenance
5.9.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS
System
The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP
number(s). In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the
upper SP table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
SM 5-61 D255/D256/M281/M282
File creation date

Year/Month/Day ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
 A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
 This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation
panel SD card slot.
5.9.4 ERROR MESSAGES

SMC List Card Save error message:
 Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing [Exit] will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-62 SM
Test Pattern Printing
5.10 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP2-109

Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.
 Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, SC
will occur.
5.10.1 MP 501/601
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003 (Pattern Selection).
2. Select the test pattern for print from the list then press [OK].
3. To change the density of the test pattern, select the density with SP2-109-006, then
press [#].
 If select "0" with SP2-109-006, the color adjusted so will not show up in the test
pattern.
Maintenance
System
4. To print, touch [Copy Window], then set settings within the following window for test
print (paper size etc…).
5. Press [Start] to start test print.
6. After checking test pattern, press [SP Mode] to return to SP mode display.
7. Reset all settings to the default values (SP2-109-003, SP2-109-006).
8. Exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
1 Vertical Line (1 dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2 dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
3 Horizontal Line (1 dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 17 Black Band (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical)
SM 5-63 D255/D256/M281/M282
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 24 All White Pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
D255/D256/M281/M282 5-64 SM
5.10.2 SP 5300/5310
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern).
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print -> Press [OK].
SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern)
0 None 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
1 Vertical Line (1 dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2 dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
3 Horizontal Line (1 dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2 dot) 17 Black Band (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band (Vertical)
Maintenance
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
System
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 24 All White Pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
3. To change the density of the test pattern, select the density with SP2-109-006.
 If select "0" with SP2-109-006, the color adjusted so will not show up in the test
pattern.
4. Enter SP5-990-001, and then press [EXECUTE] to start printing the test pattern.
5. Check the test pattern.
6. Exit SP mode.
SM 5-65 D255/D256/M281/M282
TROUBLESHOOTING
45 ∼ 48 09/15/2016 Added SC636-01
55 12/14/2016 Added SC672-00
57 03/08/2017 Added SC673-10
62 04/13/2017 Updated SC819
111 03/08/2017 Added Troubleshooting Guide: Image Quality: Black or White
spots repeat at 30mm or 96mm intervals
119 ~ 126 02/09/2017 Added “When SC672 (Controller start up error) is displayed
Self-Diagnostic Mode
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CODES
Service Call Conditions
SC call or SC alarm in
Pattern Display How to reset
customer support system
The SC is displayed on
Occurrence & alarm
the operation panel, Execute CE reset SP
count
A and the machine mode, and switch main
cannot be used power from OFF to ON.
Immediate alarm
(safety-related SC).
When a function is Occurrence & alarm

selected, the SC is count
displayed on the
Switch main power from
B operation panel, and Power OFF ON
Troubleshooting
OFF to ON.
the machine cannot be
used (down-time Alarm count and alarm
mitigation). only if recurrence
Occurrence
No display on the
C operation panel, and Count only logging.
Logging count & alarm
use is permitted.
count
Occurrence & alarm

The SC is displayed on
count
the operation panel,
Switch main power from Power OFF ON
D and the machine
OFF to ON.
cannot be used
Alarm count and alarm
(machine-error SC).
only if recurrence
SM 6-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
 When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an

event is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC,
reboot is not performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after
the reboot.
 When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting,
and logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an * mark is added
alongside the SC number for clarity.
 Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot
setting) (default value: ON).
6.1.2 SC LOGGING
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code"
are logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not
performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is
logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively
deleted starting from the oldest.
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT (MP 501/601)

When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic
reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out)
(default value: 0 "Automatic reboot").
When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can
reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to the
@Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good solution if
an SC occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only when
the main power switch is switched OFF to ON).
Screen display during reboot
 Status display on the current screen
 Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
 Automatic reboot .... After operation end
Post-processing
Until automatic reboot
 Reset key (Reboot key)
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-2 SM
Key to perform reboot

# Cancel key is not displayed.
 Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).
Operation during SC reboot
 Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the
corresponding SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter
counts 10 times.
 Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of
post-processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the machine is operating. The engine does not
start process control when a reboot is possible.
 Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-3 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-4 SM
Service Call 101-195
6.2 SERVICE CALL 101-195
6.2.1 SC100 (ENGINE: SCANNING) (MP 501/601 ONLY)
SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC101-01 D Lamp Error (Scanning)
The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold
when the white guide plate was scanned.
Error detection timing;
 During a scan from the exposure glass:
When the scanning of white guide plate is completed. (when
the SHGH is negated)
 During a scan from ARDF:
During the shading operation.
When the scanning of white guide plate is completed. (when
the SHGH is negated)
 Condensation in scanner unit

 Connector disconnected
Troubleshooting
 Scanner Carriage defective
 BiCU defective
 Harness defective
 White Guide Plate dirty or defective
 IOB defective
SM 6-5 D255/D256/M281/M282
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON.
If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC
reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Reconnect the connector.
Reconnect the following connectors;
 Scanner Carriage – BiCU connector
 BiCU – IOB connector
2. Check the white guide plate (exposure glass).
Check the white guide plate attached to the exposure glass.
If the white guide plate is in an unusual state, replace the
white guide plate.
3. Scanner carriage defective
Replace the scanner carriage.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
5. Harness defective
Replace the following harnesses.
 Scanner Carriage – BiCU harness
 BiCU – IOB harness
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC101-02 D Lamp Error (Detecting the lighting error)
The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold
when the white guide plate was scanned.
Error detection timing; During the scanner adjustment (detecting
the lighting error) at the time of applying power source for
scanner (when the main power is turned ON).
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-6 SM

 BiCU defective
 White Guide Plate dirty or attachment fault
 IOB defective
 SBU – LEDB connector (SBU side connector on the
scanner carriage)
Troubleshooting
white guide plate.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SM 6-7 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC102-00 D LED Light Quantity Error
The white level peak exceeded the prescribed threshold when

the white guide plate was scanned.
Error detection timing; During the scanner adjustment (detecting
the lighting error) at the time of applying power source for
scanner (when the main power is turned ON).
 BiCU defective
 IOB defective
 SBU – LEDB connector (SBU side connector on the
scanner carriage)
white guide plate.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-8 SM
SC120-00 D Scanner Home Position error
The home position is not correct when the main power is turned
ON, at the end of a reading process from the exposure glass
and ARDF.
 Scanner motor defective

 Scanner HP sensor defective
 SBU defective
 BiCU defective
 Controller board defective
 Scanner motor defective

1. Move the scanner carriage by hand to check whether it
is unusually difficult to move.
2. Check that the scanner driving belt is not disengaged.
3. Reconnect the following connector.
Scanner Motor – Controller Board connector
4. If the connector is broken, shorted, or grounded,
replace the connector.
5. Replace the scanner motor.
Troubleshooting
 Scanner HP sensor defective
1. Check that the scanner HP sensor is correctly
positioned.
2. Reconnect the following connectors.
 Scanner HP Sensor – SBU connector
 SBU – Controller Board connector
3. Replace the scanner HP sensor.
 SBU defective
Replace the scanner unit.
 BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
Replace the controller board.
SM 6-9 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC141-00 D Black level detection error
The black level cannot be adjusted to the target level at the time
of applying power source for scanner (when the main power is
turned ON).

 BiCU defective
 IOB defective
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the
SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC
3. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
5. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-10 SM
SC142-00 D White level detection error
The white level cannot be adjusted to the target level during auto
gain control.

 BiCU defective
 White Guide Plate dirty or attachment fault
 SBU – LEDB connector (SBU side connector which is
on the scanner carriage)
Troubleshooting
white guide plate.
4. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
6. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SM 6-11 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC144-00 D SBU Communication Error
 The machine cannot detect that the Scanner Carriage is

connected.
 The machine cannot communicate with the Scanner
Carriage, or the communication data is incorrect.
 The configuration of FPGA is not completed.
Error detection timing: At the time of applying power source
for scanner (when the main power is turned ON or when the
machine returns from energy save mode)

 BiCU defective
 IOB defective
3. BiCU defective
Replace the BiCU.
4. IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-12 SM
6.2.2 SC100 (ENGINE: OTHERS)
SC195-00 D Machine serial number error
Comparison of the product identification code in the machine

serial number (11 digits).
The product identification code in the machine serial number (11

digits) does not match.
Re-enter the machine serial number.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-13 D255/D256/M281/M282
6.3.1 SC200 (ENGINE: IMAGE WRITING)
SC202-00 D Polygon Motor Error
After Polygon motor is stabilized, the ready signal is at the H

level for 20 seconds consecutively.
 Polygon motor defective

 IOB defective
 Polygon motor defective

1. Confirm that the connector between laser unit and IOB
is firmly connected. If necessary, connect the connector
all the way in.
3. Replace the laser unit.
 IOB defective
1. Update the engine software to the latest version.
2. Replace the IOB.
SC220-00 D Leading Edge: LD synchronization detection error
The leading edge LD synchronization detection signal was not

output within the specified time (sec.) while the polygon mirror
motor was operating at normal speed.
Error detection timing; During the startup operation of the
machine or during printing.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-14 SM
 Laser unit defective (Synchronization optical system

defective, LDB defective, LD defective)
 BiCU defective (Image writing ASIC defective)
 IOB defective
 LDB – IOB, IOB – BiCU harness broken, or connector
disconnected

2. Check for condensation on the mirrors and lenses.
3. Reconnect the connectors between LDB and IOB, and
between IOB and BiCU.
4. Replace the laser unit.
5. Replace the BiCU.
6. Replace the harness between LDB and IOB, and between
IOB and BiCU.
7. Replace the IOB.
SC270-00 D GAVD Communication Error
Troubleshooting
The communication is not performed normally between CPU
and image writing ASIC.
Error detection timing; Only when initial setting is executed.
 Image writing ASIC defective

 Interface circuit between CPU and image writing ASIC
defective

SM 6-15 D255/D256/M281/M282
6.4.1 SC300 (ENGINE: IMAGING 1: CHARGE, DEVELOPMENT)
SC303-00 D Charger Current Error
When the charging voltage is applied by changing the voltage in

three levels, the current value is less than 20uA in one of three
levels.
 Connector defective or disconnected

 Power pack defective
 IOB defective

Reconnect the following connectors. Then perform a
conduction inspection. If there is no conduction, replace the
connector.
 Drum Unit – Power Pack connector
 Power Pack – IOB connector
 Power pack defective
Replace the power pack.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC321-00 C Development Unit Non-Installing Error
The sensor output value is 31 or less continuously for 5

seconds.

 Toner density sensor defective
 Connect-Left PCB defective
 IOB defective
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-16 SM

connector.
 Development Unit – Drum PCB connector
 Drum PCB – Drum Connection PCB connector
 Drum Connection PCB – Connect-Left PCB connector
 Connect-Left PCB – IOB connector
Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the Connect-Left PCB.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
6.4.2 SC300 (ENGINE: IMAGING 2: AROUND THE DRUM)
Troubleshooting
SC396-01 D Drum Motor Error 1
The drum motor is not stabilized within 2 seconds after the

motor is activated.
 Connector disconnected or defective

 Drive transmission of the drum motor defective
 Drum motor defective
 IOB defective
SM 6-17 D255/D256/M281/M282

Reconnect the following connector. Then perform a
connector.
 IOB – Drum Motor connector
Check the gears. If any gears are damaged, replace them.
Replace the drum motor.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC396-02 D Drum Motor Error 2
After the drum motor is stabilized, the stable OFF signal is

detected for 2 seconds consecutively.

 IOB defective

connector.
 IOB – Drum Motor connector
Replace the drum motor.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-18 SM
6.5.1 SC400 (ENGINE: IMAGING 3: AROUND THE DRUM)
SC490-00 D Toner Density Sensor Error
The sensor output value is 930 or more continuously for 5

seconds.

 Toner motor defective
 IOB defective

 Toner Density Sensor – Drum PCB connector
 Drum Connection PCB – Connect-Left PCB
Troubleshooting
connector
3. Check that the gears and rollers of the development
unit are not damaged and rotate smoothly.
4. Replace the development unit.
SM 6-19 D255/D256/M281/M282
 Toner motor defective

1. Check the drive gears can rotate or they are not
unusually loaded. If necessary, replace the drive gear.
 Toner Density Sensor – Drum PCB connector
connector
4. Replace the drum unit.

 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-20 SM
SC491-01 D Drum Unit Type Mismatch Error
 Cannot communicate with the EEPROM of the drum PCB

normally.
 An incompatible drum unit is installed.

 Drum PCB defective
 IOB defective

connector.
 Drum Unit – Drum Connection PCB connector
 Drum Connection PCB – Connect-Left PCB connector
Replace the drum PCB.
Troubleshooting
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SM 6-21 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC491-02 D Drum Unit Error
 No response from the device in reading/writing for 5 ms or

more and this problem is repeated 5 times consecutively.
 The reading data of 2 locations do not match 8 times
consecutively.
 The writing data and reading date do not match 8 times
consecutively.

 IOB defective

connector
3. Replace the drum unit.

 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-22 SM
6.6.1 SC500 (ENGINE: PAPER TRANSPORT 1: PAPER FEED,

DUPLEX, TRANSPORT)
SC501-01 D Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Error (Tray 1)
After the paper feed tray 1 is set, paper feed tray lift sensor does
not turn on within 10 seconds. This SC is issued if a problem is
detected four times consecutively.
 Bottom plate of the paper feed tray defective

 Drive transmission of the paper feed tray lift motor defective
 Paper feed tray lift motor defective
 IOB defective

Check the bottom plate of the paper feed tray. If the bottom
Troubleshooting
plate does not move smoothly, repair or replace the paper
feed tray.
connector.
 Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor – IOB connector

Replace the paper feed tray lift motor.
 Engine board defective
Replace the engine board.
SM 6-23 D255/D256/M281/M282

 Main board defective

feed tray.
connector.
 Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor – Main Board connector

Replace the main board.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-24 SM
SC502-02 D Paper Feed Tray Error (Tray 2)
The error signal is detected for 2 seconds consecutively after

the paper feed motor is activated.

 Drive transmission of the paper feed motor defective
 Paper feed motor defective

connector.
Replace the paper feed motor.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-25 D255/D256/M281/M282


feed tray.
connector.

D255/D256/M281/M282 6-26 SM



connector.
 Paper Feed Motor – Main Board connector
Troubleshooting
SM 6-27 D255/D256/M281/M282


feed tray.
connector.

D255/D256/M281/M282 6-28 SM



connector.


Troubleshooting
Main board defective
SM 6-29 D255/D256/M281/M282


feed tray.
connector.

D255/D256/M281/M282 6-30 SM



connector.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-31 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC520-01 D Main Motor Error 1
The main motor is not stabilized within 2 seconds after the motor
is activated.
 Main motor defective

 IOB defective

1. Reconnect the following connector. Then perform a
conduction inspection. If there is no conduction, replace
the connector.
 IOB – Main Motor connector
2. Replace the main motor.
 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
SC520-02 D Main Motor Error 2
After the main motor is stabilized, the stable OFF signal is

detected for 2 seconds consecutively.

 IOB defective

1. Check if the gears rotate smoothly. If any gears are
damaged, replace them.
2. Reconnect the following connector. Then perform a
conduction inspection. If there is no conduction, replace
the connector.
 IOB – Main Motor connector
3. Replace the main motor.
 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-32 SM
6.6.2 SC500 (ENGINE: PAPER TRANSPORT 2: FUSING, OTHERS)
SC540-01 D Fusing Pressure Release Motor Error 1
The over-current detection signal of the fusing pressure release

motor is detected 20 times consecutively.

 Drive transmission of the fusing pressure release motor
defective
 Fusing pressure release motor defective
 IOB defective

connector.
 Fusing Pressure Release Motor – Connect-Left PCB
Troubleshooting
connector

defective
Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SM 6-33 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC540-02 D Fusing Pressure Release Motor Error 2
The position detection sensor is not detected for 30 seconds

consecutively after the fusing pressure release motor is
activated.

defective
 IOB defective

connector.
 Fusing Pressure Release Motor – Connect-Left PCB
connector

defective
Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-34 SM
SC541-00 D Fusing Thermistor (Center) Disconnected Error
Input from fusing thermistor (center) is 1019 or more (A/D value)

continuously for 4 seconds.
 Connector pin defective

 Triac defective
 Fusing unit defective
 Fusing thermistor connection PCB defective
 IOB defective
 Fusing thermistor (center) defective
 Fusing thermostat defective
 PSU defective

If the I/F connector pins of the fuser unit and the main unit
are deformed owing to foreign materials, replace the
connectors or the units including the connectors.
 Triac defective
Troubleshooting
Disconnect the power cord and check that the resistance
between terminals T1 and T2 of the triac TRA31 and triac
TRA41 on the PSU are several Mega-Ohms and not
shorted. If failed, replace the PSU.
SM 6-35 D255/D256/M281/M282

1. Check that no paper jam is present.
 Fusing Unit – Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB
connector
 Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB – IOB
connector
4. Replace the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing thermistor connection PCB.
 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
 Fusing thermistor (center) defective
Replace the fusing unit.
 Fusing thermostat defective
 Fusing Unit – PSU connector
 PSU defective
Replace the PSU.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-36 SM
SC543-00 D Fusing Thermistor (Center) High Temperature
 The fusing thermistor (center) detects the temperature that

exceeds 245 degrees C.
exceeds 195 degrees C in a heater-off state after the fusing
thermistor (center) detects the temperature of 155 degrees
C or less.

 Triac defective
 Fusing thermistor defective
 IOB defective

 Triac defective
Troubleshooting

 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SM 6-37 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC549-00 D Fusing Lamp Disconnected Error
The fusing thermistor (center) temperature does not reach a

temperature of 100 degrees C within 30 seconds after the
machine starts warming up.

 Triac defective
 IOB defective
 PSU defective
 Fusing lamp defective

thermistor (center) detects the temperature of 155 degrees
C or less.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-38 SM

 Triac defective
Troubleshooting
1. Check that no paper jam is present.
 Fusing Unit – Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB
connector
 Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB – IOB
connector
SM 6-39 D255/D256/M281/M282

 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
 PSU defective
 PSU – IOB connector
2. Replace the PSU.
 Fusing lamp defective
SC551-00 D Fusing Thermistor (End) Disconnected Error
Input from fusing thermistor (end) is 1019 or more (A/D value)

continuously for 4 seconds.

 Triac defective
 IOB defective

Reconnect the following connectors.
 Fusing Thermistor – Fusing Thermistor Connection
PCB connector
 Fusing Thermistor Connection PCB – IOB connector
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-40 SM
 Triac defective

Troubleshooting
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC553-00 D Fusing Thermistor (End) High Temperature
 The fusing thermistor (end) detects the temperature that

 The fusing thermistor (end) detects the temperature that
thermistor (end) detects the temperature of 155 degrees C
or less.

 Triac defective
 IOB defective
SM 6-41 D255/D256/M281/M282

 Triac defective

 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
SC581-00 C Temperature Sensor Disconnected Error
 The average of the output from the temperature sensor is

1019 or more for 160 ms.
 The average of the output from the temperature sensor is
930 or more for 5 seconds.
 Temperature sensor defective

 IOB defective
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-42 SM

 Temperature Sensor – IOB connector
3. Replace the temperature sensor.
 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
SC582-00 C Temperature Sensor Shorted Error
The average of the output from the temperature sensor is 31 or

less for 5 seconds.

 IOB defective
Troubleshooting
 Temperature Sensor – IOB connector
3. Replace the temperature sensor.
 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
SM 6-43 D255/D256/M281/M282
6.6.3 SC500 (ENGINE: PAPER TRANSPORT 3: PAPER FEED,

DUPLEX, TRANSPORT, FUSING)
SC547-00 D Zero Cross Signal Error
While fusing lamp ON/OFF control is performed, the zero cross

signal is not input within 2 seconds consecutively.

 PSU defective
 IOB defective

 PSU – IOB connector
 PSU defective
Replace the PSU.
 IOB defective
Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-44 SM
Rev. 09/15/2016 Service Call 622-691
6.7.1 SC600 (ENGINE: COMMUNICATION AND OTHERS)
SC622-01 D Paper Feed Unit Communication Error (Tray 2)
A communication error is detected from the paper feed unit 2, 10

times consecutively.
Paper feed tray 2 defective

Connector disconnected or defective
IOB defective

Check the connection between the main machine and paper
feed tray 2.
Connector disconnected or defective
Reconnect the following connector.

Troubleshooting
IOB – Main Board connector
Replace the IOB.


IOB defective
SM 6-45 D255/D256/M281/M282
Service Call 622-691 Rev. 09/15/2016

feed tray 3.
3. Replace the main board.
IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.


IOB defective

feed tray 4.
IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-46 SM
Rev. 09/15/2016 Service Call 622-691


IOB defective

feed tray 4.
IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
Troubleshooting
⇒ SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC636-01 D IC Card error (Expanded authentication module error)
Issued when expanded authentication management is set to

“ON” but either of the following occur.
There is no expanded authentication module in the
machine.
The SD Card or the file of the expanded authentication
module is broken.
There is no DESS module in the machne.
SM 6-47 D255/D256/M281/M282
Service Call 622-691 Rev. 09/15/2016
There is no DESS module in the machine (models on which

the function is optional).
There is no expanded authentication module in the
machine.
The SD Card or the file of the expanded authentication
module is broken
Set a working SD Card/expanded authentication file.

Install the DESS module.
In the SSP Mode, set SP5-401-160 to “0”.
In the SSP Mode, set SP5-401-161 to “0”.
Replace the NVRAM.
SC665-02 D BiCU – IOB Connection Error
FFC connection error (connector disconnected) between BiCU

and IOB is detected during the startup operation of the engine
(when the main power is turned on or when the machine returns
from energy save mode)
FFC defective or disconnected

BiCU defective
IOB defective

2. Reconnect the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
3. Replace the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
5. Replace the IOB.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-48 SM
SC665-21 D BREIT Connection Error
The signal connection error is detected between CPU and Breit

during the startup operation of the engine (when the main power
is turned on or when the machine returns from energy save
mode).
BiCU defective

SC667-01 D Master Device Operating Mode Setting Error
The mode setting error of CPU is detected during the startup

operation of the engine (when the main power is turned on or
when the machine returns from energy save mode).
BiCU defective
Troubleshooting
SC667-20 D Breit Operating Mode Setting Error
The mode setting error of Breit is detected during the startup

operation of the engine (when the main power is turned on or
when the machine returns from energy save mode).
BiCU defective

SM 6-49 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC668-00 D SPI Communication Error
 The SPI communication error cannot be recovered within 10

seconds after the error occurred.
 The error recovery does not finish normally.
 FFC defective or disconnected

 BiCU defective
 IOB defective

2. Reconnect the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
3. Replace the FFC between BiCU and IOB.
5. Replace the IOB.
SC669 EEPROM Communication Error
SC669-01 D EEPROM OPEN: ID error
SC669-02 D EEPROM OPEN: Channel error
SC669-03 D EEPROM OPEN: Device error
SC669-04 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error
SC669-05 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error
SC669-06 D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error
SC669-07 D EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full
SC669-08 D EEPROM OPEN: No error code
SC669-09 D EEPROM CLOSE: ID error
SC669-10 D EEPROM CLOSE: No error code
SC669-11 D EEPROM Data write: ID error
SC669-12 D EEPROM Data write: Channel error
SC669-13 D EEPROM Data write: Device error
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-50 SM
SC669-14 D EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error
SC669-15 D EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error
SC669-16 D EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error
SC669-17 D EEPROM Data write: Buffer full
SC669-18 D EEPROM Data write: No error code
SC669-19 D EEPROM Data read: ID error
SC669-20 D EEPROM Data read: Channel error
SC669-21 D EEPROM Data read: Device error
SC669-22 D EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error
SC669-23 D EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error
SC669-24 D EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error
SC669-25 D EEPROM Data read: Buffer full
SC669-26 D EEPROM Data read: No error code
Troubleshooting
SC669-36 D Verification error
SC669-37 D Error Detection
The toner density sensor cannot be recovered after retrying N*1

times for EEPROM communication error.
(*1 SC669-01 to 26: 3, SC669-36: 2, SC669-37: 1)
 Electrical noise
 EEPROM not installed correctly
 EEPROM defective
 BiCU defective

2. Reinstall the EEPROM on the BiCU.
3. Replace the EEPROM on the BiCU.
SM 6-51 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC687-00 D PER Not Received Error
RAPI-PER command was not received from the controller within

the specified time (120 sec.) after RAPI-PES (preparation
request for image transmission) is issued.
 Electrical noise
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON

for ten times. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Check the engine and controller firmware, and update the
firmware to the latest version.
2. If the SC is issued during printing or during receiving fax
documents, replace the controller board. If the SC is issued
during copying, check the ARDF and IOB connection.
SC689-01 D EEPROM Communication Error 1
 No response from the device in reading/writing for 5

seconds or more and this problem is repeated 5 times.
 The reading data of 2 locations does not match 8 times
consecutively.
 The writing data and reading date does not match 8 times
consecutively.
EEPROM on the controller board defective
1. Turn the main power OFF and wait for 5 seconds. Then turn
ON the main power.
2. Check whether the EEPROM on the controller board is
installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall it.
3. Replace the controller board.
4. If the EEPROM on the controller board is damaged, replace
the EEPROM.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-52 SM
SC689-02 D EEPROM Communication Error 1
IOB defective
Controller board defective
SC690-00 C EEPROM Data Error
Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal.
EEPROM on the controller board defective
1. Turn the main power OFF and wait for 5 seconds. Then turn
the main power ON.
2. Replace the IOB.
3. If the EEPROM on the controller board is damaged, replace
the EEPROM.
Troubleshooting
SC691-00 D Image Processing Error
Paper jam (J010, J011, J012, J013, J014, J015) is detected

twice.
SM 6-53 D255/D256/M281/M282
6.7.2 SC600 (CONTROLLER)
Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting

SC No. Type
Procedures)
SC641-00 D Communication error between BiCU and Controller board.
Controller board does not respond after BiCU tries to

communicate three times.
 Controller board software error

 Connect error between BiCU and Controller board
 BiCU software error
 Check connections between Controller board and BiCU.

 Turn the main power OFF then ON.
SC670-01 D Engine does not start up during the staring up
 /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was

turned on.
 PCI I/F is not linked up when the machine returns from
energy saver mode.
 EC/PC/SC response was not received within specified time
from power on.
 Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found
through PCI).
 Connection defect between controller board and BiCU.
 BiCU is down / unstable
Engine board does not start up.
Refer to page 6-118 "SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed".
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-54 SM
Rev. 12/14/2016 Service Call 622-691
SC670-02 D Engine does not start up after the staring up
CPU reset by software

CPU reset by anomaly CPU
CPU reset by hardware defect / noise
Hardware defect
Engine board reset unexpectedly.
Refer to page 6-118 "SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed".
⇒ SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC672-00 D Controller start up error
After the machine was powered on, communication between
the controller and the operation panel was not established.
Controller stalled
Board installed incorrectly
Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
Controller late
2. Check the connection of the operation panel.
3. Check the connection of the controller board.
Troubleshooting
After the machine was powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel was not established.
Controller stalled
Board installed incorrectly
Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
Controller late

SM 6-55 D255/D256/M281/M282
After the machine was powered on, communication between the

controller and the operation panel was not established, or
communication with controller was interrupted after a normal
startup.
 Controller stalled
 Board installed incorrectly
 Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
 Controller late

Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal

startup.
 Controller late

D255/D256/M281/M282 6-56 SM
Rev 03/08/2017
The operation panel detects that the controller is down due to other
reason shown in SC672-10, SC672-11, and SC672-12.
 Controller late

The operation panel software ended abnormally.
 Controller late
Troubleshooting
 673-10 D
Operation panel Flair communication error (Smart Operation Panel)
This SC is issued only for the machine that has the Smart Operation
Panel installed.
• Communication between Smart Operation Panel and main machine
(this is called "Flair communication") is not sent to Smart Operation
Panel.
• SP setting (SP5-748-201) for Smart Operation Panel is not activated.
The CATS module (controller) did not see the response to notification of
monitoring service module (operation panel).

2. Set SP5-748-201 (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect
Setting) to "1: Connect" if the value is "0: Not connect".
SM 6-57 D255/D256/M281/M282
Service Call 700
6.8 SERVICE CALL 700
6.8.1 SC700 (ENGINE: PERIPHERALS) (MP 501/601 ONLY)
SC700-00 C ARDF Inverter Motor Error
The home position cannot be detected even if the machine

reties 3 times consecutively.
* Conditions to detect the home position: When the home
position is detected by driving the ARDF inverter motor one
rotation.
 ARDF inverter motor defective

 ARDF position sensor defective
 IOB defective
 ARDF inverter motor defective

1. Disconnect the power cord, and wait 5 seconds.
Reconnect the power cord, and then turn the main
power ON.
2. Confirm that the connector of ARDF inverter motor is
firmly connected. If necessary, connect the connector
all the way in.
 ARDF Inverter Motor – IOB connector
replace the connector. If the connector pin is deformed,
5. Replace the ARDF inverter motor.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-58 SM
Service Call 700
 ARDF position sensor defective

1. Rotate the ARDF inverter motor by hand to check
whether it is unusually difficult to rotate.
2. Check that the ARDF position sensor is not disengaged
and is correctly positioned. And check that the actuator
correctly shields the light.
 ARDF Position Sensor – IOB
5. Replace the ARDF position sensor.
 IOB defective
2. Replace the IOB.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-59 D255/D256/M281/M282
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC816-** [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
SC816-10 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error

D
to 12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
SC816-15 open() error

D
to 18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-20 D open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816-23, read() error

D
24
SC816-25 D write () error
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-60 SM
SC816-26 write() communication retry error

D
to 28
SC816-29, read() communication retry error

D
30
SC816-35 D read() error
SC816-36 Subsystem error

D
to 96
SC 816-99 D Subsystem error
Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
 Energy save I/O subsystem defective

 Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board error
(non-response).
 Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
 SC816-99 occurs as a subsystem error except any error
from -06 to 96.
Troubleshooting
1. Update the following firmware and the other system firmware
to the latest version.
 MP 501/601: "System/Copy" firmware
 SP 5300/5310: "System" firmware
2. Disable the STR shift function by SP5-191-001 (Power Str
Set).
SM 6-61 D255/D256/M281/M282
Service Call 816-899 Rev. 04/13/2017
SC817-00 D Monitor error: File detection / Digital signature error (MP 501/601
Only)
 Bootloader cannot read any of diagnostic module, kernel, or

root filesystem.
 In a bootloader SD card, the digital signature checking for
any of diagnostic module, kernel, or root filesystem is failed.
 Any of the following items does not exist or is broken OS

Flash ROM, Diagnostic module in SD card, Kernel, Root
filesystem
 Any of the following items is revised fraudulently: Diagnostic
module in SD card, Kernel, Root filesystem
 ROM update for controller system

 Use another booting SD card having a valid digital signature
SC819-00 C Kernel halt error

[xxxx]: Detailed error code
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system

processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
Note: SC819 appears on the operation panel, and then logged
after the machine automatically reboots.
[0x5032] HAIC-P2 error
HAIC-P2 decompression error (An error occurred in the ASIC

compression/decompression module.)
 The code data saved in the HDD was broken for an

unexpected reason. (HDD device defective)
 The code data saved to memory was broken for an
unexpected reason. (Memory device defective)
 ASIC defective
 Data other than code data was unzipped due to a software
malfunction.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-62 SM
 Turn the main power OFF/ON.

 Replace the HDD.
 Replace the memory
 Replace the controller board.
 Fix the software
Link up error
Link up transaction between Engine ASIC and Veena was not

completed within 100 ms.
Either one of following message appears on console if Link up

error occurs.
[0x5245] RESUME:PCI-Express bus ROOT_DL status error

RESUME:PCI-Express bus DETUP status error
"0x53554D45" -> Link up error
Also, error code "0x5245" and detail code ""0x53554D45" -> Link
up error" appears on operation panel.

 Replace the controller board or the BiCU.
Troubleshooting
L2 status time out
L2 status register between Engine ASIC and Veena was not

reached the target value within 1 sec.
Engine ASIC during operation was rebooted or shifted to energy

saving mode.
Machine reboots when SC23x, SC30x occurs.
[0x5355] If Engine ASIC is working when rebooting (or shifting to the

energy saving mode), L2 status value is not on target.
The following message appears on console.
SUSPEND:PCI-Express L2 Status Check Error
Also, error code "0x5355" and detail code ""0x5350454E44" ->
L2 status time out" appears on operation panel.

 Replace the controller board or the BiCU.
[0x6261] HDD defective
SM 6-63 D255/D256/M281/M282
Received file system data was broken even if the initialization

succeeds and there was no error reply from the HDD.
Power supply disconnection during data writing to the HDD.
Replace the HDD.

This SC may occur when turning on the machine for the first time
with a new HDD. In this case, turn the main power OFF/ON.
[0x696e] gwinit processing end
If the SCS process is ended for some reason
If an unexpected error occurs at SCS processing end, gwint

processing also halts (this result is judged a kernel stop error, by
gwinit specification)
"0x69742064" -> "init died"
Turn the main power OFF/ON.
[0x766d] VM full error
Occurs when too much RAM is used during system processing
"vm_pageout: VM is full"
Console Other error (characters on operation panel)

string
System detected internal mismatch error
 Software defective
 Insufficient memory
 Hardware driver defective (RAM, flash memory, CPU)
 Replace with a larger capacity RAM, or flash memory.

 Replace the connected controller option with a new one.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-64 SM
SC840-00 D EEPROM access error
 During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd

reading failure causes this SC code.
 During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
 Defective EEPROM
SC841-00 D EEPROM read data error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in

EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
Troubleshooting
SC842-00 C Nand-Flash updating verification error
SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module

when remote ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash defective
SC842-01 C Insufficient Nand-Flash blocks (threshold exceeded)
At startup, or when machine returned from energy save mode,

the Nand-Flash status was read and judged that the number of
unusable blocks had exceeded threshold, and then SCS
generated the SC code.
SM 6-65 D255/D256/M281/M282
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
SC842-02 C Number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded
At startup, or when the machined returned from energy save

mode, the Nand-Flash was read and judged that the number of
deleted blocks had exceeded threshold, and then SCS
generated this SC code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash.
SC845 Hardware Error Detected when the automatic firmware update
SC845-01 D Engine Board
SC845-02 D Controller Board
SC845-03 D Operation Panel (Normal)
SC845-04 D Operation Panel (Smart Panel)
SC845-05 D FCU
When updating the firmware automatically (ARFU), the firmware

cannot be read or written normally, and the firmware update
cannot be completed even by 3 retries.
Hardware abnormality of the target board
Replace the target board.

For SC845-02, HDD and memory may cause the problem.
Replace the HDD or memory if the SC cannot be recovered by
replacing the controller board.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-66 SM
SC853-00 B Bluetooth device connection error (MP 501/601 Only)
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the

machine was turned on.
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the

Always connect the Bluetooth device (USB type) before the

machine is turned on.
SC854-00 B Bluetooth device disconnected (MP 501/601 Only)
The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the

The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the

Never remove Bluetooth (USB type) after machine starts.
Troubleshooting
SC855-01 B Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
 Defective wireless LAN board

 Loose connection

 Replace wireless LAN board
SM 6-67 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC855-02 B Wireless LAN board error (driver initialization failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
 Defective wireless LAN board

 Loose connection

 Replace wireless LAN board
SC858-00 A Data encryption conversion error (Key Setting Error)
A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the

encryption key.
 USB Flash, other data, corrupted

 Communication error caused by electrostatic noise
SC858-01 A Data encryption conversion error (HDD Key Setting Error)
A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the

encryption key.
 USB Flash, other data, corrupted

 Communication error caused by electrostatic noise

 If the error persists, replace the controller board.
SC858-02 A Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Read/Write Error)
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-68 SM
A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt

to update the encryption key.
NVRAM defective
 Replace the NVRAM.

SC858-30 A Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Before Replace Error)

Software error such as conversion parameters being invalid.

 If the error persists, replace the controller board.
Troubleshooting
SC858-31 A Data encryption conversion error (Other Error)

SC859-00 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error
When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was
converted, but not correctly. Image displayed at conversion only
(this SC is not displayed), but SC is displayed after machine is
cycled off/on.
SM 6-69 D255/D256/M281/M282
 HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update
function, but the HDD was removed.
 Machine lost power during data encryption key update
 Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data
encryption key update, and data was not encrypted.
 Check HDD connection.

 Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting).
 If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.
SC859-01 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (HDD check

error)
cycled off/on.
 HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update
function, but the HDD was removed.
 Machine lost power during data encryption key update
 Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data
encryption key update, and data was not encrypted.

SC859-02 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Power failure

during conversion)
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-70 SM
cycled off/on.
Details:
NVRAM/HDD conversion is incomplete.
Power failure occurred during encryption key update.
None
The display after restart instructs the user to format the HDD.
SC859-10 B Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Data

read/write command error)
cycled off/on.
Troubleshooting
Details:
Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two or more
times (DMAC timeout, serial communication error etc.)
HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key

update due to HDD errors or cable noises.

SM 6-71 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC860-00 B HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)
 The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following

errors.
 SS_NO.T_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
 SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
 SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or
checking the label*/
 SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or
checking the label*/
 SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
 SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/
 SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to
command*/
 SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/
 SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
 SS_NO._PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not
exist*/
 SS_NO._FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
 Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there
has been no response for 30 seconds or more.
 Unformatted HDD
 Label data corrupted
 HDD defective
Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting) through SP mode.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-72 SM
SC862-00 D Number of the defective sector reaches the maximum count
101 defective sectors are generated at the image storage area in

the HDD.
SC863 occurs during the HDD reading and defective sectors are
registered up to 101.
 Format the HDD with SP5-832.

SC863-01 D HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.

(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition,
such as the disk label area.)
Troubleshooting
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
 The interval is short.
 Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on,
etc.).
 Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned
ON.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation
panel to become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access
time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine
is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to
30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a
problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860
and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and
check them.
SM 6-73 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC863-02 D HDD data read failure

to 23
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.

(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC863-02) to partition "v"
(SC863-23)).
Guide for when to replace the HDD

1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
 The interval is short.
 Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on,
etc.).
 Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned
ON.
2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation
panel to become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access
time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine
is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to
30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a
problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860
and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and
check them.
SC864-01 D HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error

query. Data transfer did not execute normally while data was
being written to the HDD.

 Format the HDD.

D255/D256/M281/M282 6-74 SM
SC864-02 D HDD data CRC error

to 23
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error
query. Data transfer did not execute normally while data was
being written to the HDD.

(SC864-23)).
 Format the HDD.

SC865-00 D HD access error
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad
sector) or SC864 (CRC error).
Troubleshooting
Replace the HDD.
SC865-01 D HDD access error
Replace the HDD.
SM 6-75 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC865-02 D HDD access error

to 23
(SC865-23)).
Replace the HDD.
SC865-50 D HDD time-out error

to 73
The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the
HDD operation.
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the
machine.
 Check the harness connections between the controller board

and HDD.
SC866-00 B SD card authentication error
A license error of an application that is started from the SD card

was detected.
Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.
Store a valid program data on the SD card.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-76 SM
SC867-00 C SD card removed
The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount

point of /mnt/sd0).

point of /mnt/sd1).
Troubleshooting

point of /mnt/sd2).
SC868-** SD card access error
SC868-00 D The SD controller returned an error during operation.

(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)
The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SC868-01 D
SM 6-77 D255/D256/M281/M282
The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SC868-02 D
 SD card defective
 SD controller defective
Slot number is displayed on the sub code.

Detail code is described in SMC print can confirm the details of
the error.
 -13 to -3: File system check error
 Otherwise (no code, -2) : Device access error
SD card that starts an application

1. Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card
insertion status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn
the main power ON.
3. If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card,
replace the controller board.
SD card for users
1. In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card
(using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
In case of a device access error

1. Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card
insertion status.
2. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn
the main power ON.
3. If an error occurs, use another SD card.
4. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card,
replace the controller board.
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD
cards used for Firmware Update by a service representative.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-78 SM
SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.)
SC870-01 B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing
the Address Book is missing.)
SC870-02 B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but
the module required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)
SC870-03 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to

store internal Address Book.)

store delivery sender.)

store delivery destination.)

store information required for LDAP search.)
SC870-07 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries

required for machine operation.)
Troubleshooting
SC870-08 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present
but the space for storing the Address Book is unusable.)
SC870-09 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency

in the NVRAM area used for storing settings required for Address
Book configuration.)
SC870-10 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a

directory for storing the Address Book in the SD/USB
FlashROM.)
SC870-11 B Address Book data error (On startup: Inconsistency in Address

Book entry number.)
SC870-20 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)
SC870-21 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)
SC870-22 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)
SM 6-79 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC870-23 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)
SC870-24 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)
SC870-25 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)
SC870-26 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)
SC870-27 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)
SC870-30 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from
cache when searching in the machine Address Book. delivery
destination/sender.)
cache during LDAP search.)
cache while searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.)
SC870-41 B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from
cache.)
SC870-50 B Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the
Address Book encryption status.)
SC870-51 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create

directory required for conversion between plaintext and
encrypted text.)
SC870-52 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert

from plaintext to encrypted text.)
SC870-53 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert

from encrypted text to plaintext.)
SC870-54 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data

inconsistency when reading the encrypted Address Book.)
SC870-55 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file
when changing encryption setting.)
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-80 SM
SC870-56 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the
file that records the encryption key during an attempt to change
the encryption setting.)
SC870-57 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a

file during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-58 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a

directory during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-59 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a

resource shortage during an attempt to change the encryption
setting.)
SC870-60 B Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for
administrator authentication (06A and later).)
When an error related to the Address Book is detected during

startup or operation.
 Software bug
 Inconsistency of Address Book source location
Troubleshooting
(machine/delivery server/LDAP server)
 Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or
encryption key (NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually
without formatting the Address Book)
 Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily
removed or hardware configuration does not match the
application configuration.
 Address Book data corruption was detected.
SM 6-81 D255/D256/M281/M282
Install the device that contains address book information

properly, and turn the main power off/on. If SC occurs again, do
the following steps.
1. After installing the HDD, or SD/USB ROM, execute
SP5-846-046 (UCS Setting).
Wait more than 3 seconds, then execute SP5-832 (HDD
Formatting).
Procedure after SC870 is cleared
1. If there is backup data in SD card or Web Image Monitor,
restore the address book data. (To restore from SD card,
enter the encryption password which is the same as when
you enter to backup.)
SC872-00 B HDD mail reception error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine

was turned on.
 HDD defective
 Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
 Format the HDD (SP5-832-007: HDD Formatting: Mail RX

Data).
When you do the above, the following information will be
initialized.
 Partly received partial mail messages.
 Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All
messages on the mail server are handled as new
messages).
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-82 SM
SC873-00 B HDD mail reception error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine

was turned on.
 HDD defective
 Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
 Format the HDD (SP5-832-008: HDD Formatting: Mail TX

Data).
When you do the above, the following information will be
initialized.
 Sender’s mail text
 Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP)
 Administrator mail address
 Scanner delivery history
Troubleshooting
SC874-05 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error
SC874-06 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error
SC874-09 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD
SC874-10 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Error in Kernel
SC874-12 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition
SC874-13 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file
SC874-14 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error
SC874-15 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number
SC874-16 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Failure in performing

hdderase
SC874-41 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Other fatal errors
SC874-42 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : End by cancellation
SM 6-83 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC874-61 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : library error

to -65
SC874-66 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unavailable
SC874-67 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Erasing not finished
SC874-68 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
SC874-69 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure
(Abnormal)
SC874-70 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unauthorized library (MP
501/601 Only)
SC874-99 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : other errors
An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or

NVRAM.
 Error detected in HDD data delete program

 Error detected in NVRAM data delete program
 The "Delete All" option was not set
 Turn the main power OFF and back on, and then execute
"Erase All Memory" under UP mode again. (However, if there
is a defective sector or other problem with the hard disk, the
error will persist even after trying the above.)
 If the "Delete All" option is not installed when this error
occurs, install the option.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-84 SM
SC875-01 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
SC875-02 D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to

erase data/failed to logically format HDD)
 HDD logical formatting failed.

 The modules failed to erase data.
SC877-00 B Data Overwrite Security card error
The "Auto Erase Memory" function of the Data Overwrite

Security is set to on but it cannot be done.
 Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken.

 Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed.
Troubleshooting
 If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite
Security option SD card and replace the NVRAM.
 If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power off
and reinstall a working Data Overwrite Security option SD
card.
SC878-00 D TPM authentication error
TPM electronic recognition failure
 Update of system module attempted without correct update

path
 USB flash memory not operating correctly
SM 6-85 D255/D256/M281/M282
Trusted Platform Module

 In computing, Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is both the name of a published specification
detailing a secure crypto processor that can store cryptographic keys that protect information,
as well as the general name of implementations of that specification often called the "TPM
chip" or "TPM Security Device" (as designated in certain Dell BIOS settings).
SC878-01 D USB flash error
There is a problem in the file system of the USB flash memory.
USB Flash system files corrupted.
SC878-02 D TPM error
An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver.
TPM not operating correctly.
SC878-03 D TCSD error
An error occurred in the TPM software stack.
 TPM, TPM software cannot start

 A file required by TPM is missing
SC878-20 D Random number generator self check error
The unusual status is detected during the self test of generated

random number seed.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-86 SM
TPM defective. (The random number seed is generated by TPM)

SC899-00 D Software performance error (signal reception end)
Unknown software error occurred.
Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.
In the case of a hardware defect

 Replace the hardware.
In the case of a software error
 Try updating the firmware.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-87 D255/D256/M281/M282
6.10.1 SC900 (ENGINE: OTHERS)
SC995-01 D CPM setting error 1
Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine

identification code.
Details:
 Machine serial number cannot be identified because of
BiCU replacement or malfunctioning.
 Machine serial number cannot be identified because of
NV-RAM replacement.
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code

does not match.
1. Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811

(MachineSerial), and then turn the main power ON/OFF.
2. Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

Details:
Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM
replacement or malfunctioning.

does not match.
 Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.

 Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825-001
(NV-RAM Data Download).
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-88 SM

Details:
Unable to recognize machine identification code because the
controller was replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning.

does not match.
Replace it with a specified controller.


does not match.
Troubleshooting
Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace
them according to the manual.
SM 6-89 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC900-00 A Electric counter error
The electric total counter value is out of specification.

Error is detected when increasing the total counter.
 Unexpected NV-RAM is attached.

 NV-RAM defective
 NV-RAM data corrupted.
 Data written to unexpected area because of external factor
etc.
 The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not
completed.
Replace the NV-RAM.
SC990-00 D Software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
 Parameter error
 Internal parameter error
 Insufficient work memory
 Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally
undetectable.

 Reinstall the software of the controller board and BiCU.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-90 SM
SC991-00 C Recoverable software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.

SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed toCS990.
 Parameter error
 Internal parameter error
 Insufficient work memory
 Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally
undetectable.
Logging only
SC992-00 D Undefined SC issued.
An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.
 An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc.

 Basically a software bug.
Troubleshooting
SC997-00 D Application function selection error
 No response to the predetermined command from SCS to

the same application program 4 times consecutively.
Cases when SC997-00 occur;
1. SCS sends command to the copy application.
2. There has been no response from the copy application
for 30 sec. (Error count value: 1)
3. Step1-2 is repeatedly performed 3 times. (Error count
value: 4)
4. SC997-00 occur.
SM 6-91 D255/D256/M281/M282
Cases when SC997-00 does not occur;

2. There has been no response from the copy application for
30 sec. (Error count value: 1)
Step1-2 is repeatedly performed 2 times. (Error count value:
4)
There has been response from the copy application. (Error
count value: 1)
 The application ended by an unusual process.
Software bug (mainly the application)
 Check the optional RAM/DIMM/boards required by the

application program.
 Check if the combination of downloaded programs are
correct.
SC998-00 D Application start error
 No application was registered to system within a specified

time after the main power was turned ON.
(No application starts/All applications have been terminated
abnormally)
 Application started but cannot be drawn now for some
reason.
 Software bug (mainly the application)

 The optional RAM/DIMM/boards, required by the application
program, are not installed correctly.
 Check the optional RAM/DIMM/boards required by the

application program.
 Check if the combination of downloaded programs are
correct.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-92 SM
Jam Detection
6.11 JAM DETECTION
6.11.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY

SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
 CODE: Indicates the jam code.

 SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
 TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
 DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
 The 10 latest printer jams are displayed.

 Initial jams are not recorded.
6.11.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

 MP 501/601
When a jam occurs, the location is displayed on the operation panel.
Troubleshooting
 SP 5300/5310
An error message appears if a paper misfeed occurs. The error message indicates where the
misfeed occurs.
SP7-504 and SP7-505 (for ARDF) show how many jams occurred at each location.
SM 6-93 D255/D256/M281/M282
Jam Detection
Indication on
Jam
SP No Description the operation
Code
panel
SP7-504 001 Bypass paper end sensor A2
Paper feed sensor 1 (Tray 1) A1
Paper feed sensor 2 (Tray 2) Y1
Paper end sensor 3 (Tray 3) Y2
Registration sensor 1 B
Registration sensor 2 B
Duplex sensor 1 Z
Duplex sensor 2 Z
Rear cover switch C
010 Unit package won’t become ready. A1
011 Transfer unit not ready. A1
012 Drive does not stop. A1
013 Duplex printing signal doesn't come. A1
014 Fuser unit not ready. A1
015 Tray 2 feeding signal doesn't come. A1
025 Rear cover open jam A1
026 Upper cover open jam A1
027 More pages than the duplex unit can contain. A1
028 Tray 1: No feed A1
029 Duplex unit: No feed Z
030 Bypass tray: No feed A2, B
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-94 SM
Jam Detection
Indication on
Jam
Code
panel
031 Tray 1: Multiple feed B
032 Tray 2: Multiple feed Y1
036 Duplex unit: Multiple feed B
037 Bypass tray: Multiple feed B
Paper feed sensor 2: Late jam (When paper feed

038 Y1
from Tray 3)

039 Y1
from Tray 4)

040 Y1
from Tray 5)
Troubleshooting
Paper feed sensor 2: Lag jam (When paper feed
041 Y1
from Tray 3)

042 Y1
from Tray 4)

043 Y1
from Tray 5)

044 Y2
from Tray 4)

045 Y2
from Tray 5)

046 Y2
from Tray 4)

047 Y2
from Tray 5)
SM 6-95 D255/D256/M281/M282
Jam Detection
Indication on
Jam
Code
panel

048 Y3
from Tray 5)

049 Y3
from Tray 5)
Registration sensor 1: Late jam (When paper

050 B
feed from Tray 2)

051 B
feed from Tray 3)

052 B
feed from Tray 4)

053 B
feed from Tray 5)
Registration sensor 1: Lag jam (When paper feed

054 B
from Tray 2)

055 B
from Tray 3)

056 B
from Tray 4)

057 B
from Tray 5)

058 B
feed from Tray 1)

059 B
feed from Tray 2)

060 B
feed from Tray 3)

061 B
feed from Tray 4)
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-96 SM
Jam Detection
Indication on
Jam
Code
panel

062 B
feed from Tray 5)

063 B
feed from duplex unit)

064 B
feed from bypass tray unit)

065 B
from Tray 1)

066 B
from Tray 2)

067 B
from Tray 3)

068 B
from Tray 4)
Troubleshooting
069 B
from Tray 5)

70 B
from duplex unit)

071 B
from bypass tray unit)
Paper exit full sensor: Late jam (When paper feed

072 B
from Tray 1)

073 B
from Tray 2)

074 B
from Tray 3)

075 B
from Tray 4)
SM 6-97 D255/D256/M281/M282
Jam Detection
Indication on
Jam
Code
panel

076 B
from Tray 5)

077 B
from duplex unit)

078 B
Paper exit full sensor: Lag jam (When paper feed

079 C
from Tray 1)

080 C
from Tray 2)

081 C
from Tray 3)

082 C
from Tray 4)

083 C
from Tray 5)

084 C
from duplex unit)

085 C
Duplex sensor 1: Late jam (When paper feed

086 C
from Tray 1)

087 C
from Tray 2)

088 C
from Tray 3)

089 C
from Tray 4)
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-98 SM
Jam Detection
Indication on
Jam
Code
panel

090 C
from Tray 5)

091 C

092 Z
from Tray 1)

093 Z
from Tray 2)

094 Z
from Tray 3)

095 Z
from Tray 4)

096 Z
from Tray 5)
Troubleshooting
097 Z
Duplex sensor 2: Lag jam (When paper feed from

098 B
duplex unit)
099 Tray 2: No feed Y1
SP7-505 001*1 ARDF registration sensor: Initial jam P
002*1 ARDF registration sensor: Late jam P
003*1 ARDF registration sensor: Lag jam P
*1 MP 501/601 only
SM 6-99 D255/D256/M281/M282
Jam Detection
6.11.3 SENSOR LAYOUT
MP 501/601
Abbreviation Name Abbreviation Name
AROS ARDF original sensor PFPS1 Paper end sensor 1*1
ARRS ARDF registration sensor PFPS2 Paper end sensor 2*1
ARTS ARDF original timing sensor PFPS3 Paper end sensor 3*1
BPES Bypass paper end sensor PFPS4 Paper end sensor 4*1
DUS1 Duplex sensor 1 PFS Paper exit full sensor
DUS2 Duplex sensor 2 PS1 Paper end sensor 1
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-100 SM
Jam Detection
FS Fusing sensor PS2 Paper end sensor 2
PFFS1 Paper feed sensor 1*1 RS1 Registration sensor 1
PFFS4 Paper feed sensor 4*1
*1 Optional paper feed unit
SP 5300/5310
Troubleshooting
BPES Bypass paper end sensor PFPS1 Paper end sensor 1*1
DUS1 Duplex sensor 1 PFPS2 Paper end sensor 2*1
SM 6-101 D255/D256/M281/M282
Jam Detection
DUS2 Duplex sensor 2 PFPS3 Paper end sensor 3*1
FS Fusing sensor PFPS4 Paper end sensor 4*1
PFFS1 Paper feed sensor 1*1 PFS Paper exit full sensor
PFFS2 Paper feed sensor 2*1 PLS Paper feed tray limit sensor
PFFS3 Paper feed sensor 3*1 PS1 Paper end sensor 1
PFFS4 Paper feed sensor 4*1 PS2 Paper end sensor 2
Paper feed tray limit sensor

PFLS1 RS1 Registration sensor 1
1*1

2*1

3*1

PFLS4
4*1
*1 Optional paper feed unit
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-102 SM
Jam Detection
6.11.4 PAPER SIZE CODES

Paper size codes are as follows.
* The unit of Main Scan/Sub Scan Length is 0.1 mm.
Sub Scan
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length
Length
005(05H) A4 LEF 2970 2100
006(06H) A5 LEF 2100 1480
007(07H) A6 LEF 1480 1050
014(0EH) B5 LEF 2570 1820
015(0FH) B6 LEF 1820 1280
036(24H) 8 1/2"x14"(LG) LEF 3556 2159
037(25H) 8 1/2"x13"(Foolscape) LEF 3302 2159
038(26H) 8 1/2"x11"(LT) LEF 2794 2159
039(27H) 8 1/4"x14" LEF 3556 2096
Troubleshooting
040(28H) 8 1/4"x13"(Folio) LEF 3302 2096
041(29H) 8"x13"(F/GL) LEF 3302 2032
043(2BH) 8"x10"(UK) LEF 2540 2032
044(2CH) 5 1/2"x8 1/2"(HLT) LEF 2159 1397
045(2DH) 7 1/4"x10 1/2"(Exective) LEF 2667 1842
067(43H) 16K LEF 2670 1950
072(48H) 8 1/2"x13 2/5"(Oficio) LEF 3404 2159
080(50H) 4 1/8"x9 1/2"(Com10) LEF 2413 1048
081(51H) 3 7/8"x7 1/2"(Monarch) LEF 1905 984
083(53H) C5 Envelope LEF 2290 1620
084(54H) C6 Envelope LEF 1620 1140
SM 6-103 D255/D256/M281/M282
Jam Detection
Sub Scan
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length
Length
085(55H) DL Envelope LEF 2200 1100
134(86H) A5 SEF 1480 2100
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-104 SM
Troubleshooting Guide
6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
6.12.1 IMAGE QUALITY
Skewed image
Symptom
Images are skewed.
Solution
Check whether the side fences in the paper feed tray are set properly. They must tightly fit to
the paper without space.
Toner sticking to the right side area on the second side of the paper
Symptom
Toner sticking to the right side area [A] on the second side of the paper.
Troubleshooting
* The arrow indicates the paper feed direction.
The toner sticking image:
Solution
SM 6-105 D255/D256/M281/M282
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-106 SM
3. Clean the [A] area with a dry cloth.
Image quality failure due to the fixing failure

Symptom
The following image quality failure occur due to the fixing failure.
 Backside partial stains
 Toner peeling
 Black spots caused by the toner fixation
Solution
Change the paper type setting to thicker with the procedure below.
 MP 501/601
Troubleshooting
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Next].
4. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which you
want to change the paper type.
5. Change the paper type setting to thicker in [Paper Thickness].
 SP 5300/5310
1. Press the [Menu] key on the control panel.
2. Select [Paper Input] -> Press [OK]
3. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which you
want to change the paper type -> Press [OK]
4. Change the paper type setting to thicker -> Press [OK]
The setting is complete when specifying the following types of paper:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2,
Thick Paper 3, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3
5. If you have selected [Recycled Paper], [Color Paper], [Letterhead], [Label Paper],
[Envelope], or [Preprinted Paper] for the paper type, press [Escape].
6. Select [Maintenance] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [General Settings] -> Press [OK]
SM 6-107 D255/D256/M281/M282
8. Select the paper thickness setting for the specified paper type -> Press [OK]
9. Select the tray where the specified type of paper is loaded -> Press [OK]
If you selected [Letterhead Setting], [Label Paper Setting], or [Envelope Setting] in Step 8,
you can specify the paper thickness for each tray separately. For other paper types, the
specified paper thickness is applied to all trays.
Toner scattered
Symptom
The toner spreads under the horizontal lines.
Solution 1
Change the paper type setting to thicker with the procedure below.
 MP 501/601
2. Press [Tray Paper Settings].
3. Press [Next].
4. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which
you want to change the paper type.
5. Change the paper type setting to thicker in [Paper Thickness].
 SP 5300/5310
2. Select [Paper Input] -> Press [OK]
3. Select the tray from [Tray Paper Size: Tray 1] to [Tray Paper Size: Tray 5] for which
you want to change the paper type -> Press [OK]
The setting is complete when specifying the following types of paper:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2,
Thick Paper 3, Special Paper 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3
5. If you have selected [Recycled Paper], [Color Paper], [Letterhead], [Label Paper],
[Envelope], or [Preprinted Paper] for the paper type, press [Escape].
6. Select [Maintenance] -> Press [OK]
7. Select [General Settings] -> Press [OK]
8. Select the paper thickness setting for the specified paper type -> Press [OK]
9. Select the tray where the specified type of paper is loaded -> Press [OK]
If you selected [Letterhead Setting], [Label Paper Setting], or [Envelope Setting] in
Step 8, you can specify the paper thickness for each tray separately. For other paper
types, the specified paper thickness is applied to all trays.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-108 SM
Solution 2
Enable the scattered toner prevention function with SP1-891-xxx (Scattering Control).
Change the value of the tray which you want to adjust from "0" to "1".
SP1-891-001 Scattering Control: Main
SP1-891-002 Scattering Control: Option Tray 1
SP1-891-003 Scattering Control: Option Tray 2 0 or 1

(0: Disable, 1:
SP1-891-004 Scattering Control: Option Tray 3 Enable)
SP1-891-005 Scattering Control: Option Tray 4
SP1-891-006 Scattering Control: By-Pass Tray
 You can also enable the scattered toner prevention function with the UP mode.
 MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Scattered Toner Image
Prevention]
 SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] -> [Scattered
Toner Prevention]
Troubleshooting
Related information
When you change the paper type setting or enable the scattered toner prevention function,
the transfer current, fusing temperature, and copy/print speed are changed. The following
table shows the difference of those values (transfer current, fusing temperature, copy/print
speed) for each paper type on the basis of "Plain Paper 2" when the paper type setting is
changed or scattered toner prevention function is enabled.
(Conditions: paper size: A4 LT, temperature: 23°C, humidity: 50%)
SM 6-109 D255/D256/M281/M282
MP 501/SP 5300
Transfer Current Fusing Temperature Copy/Print Speed
Paper Type [µA] [°C] [ppm]
A4 LT A4 LT A4 LT
1. When the scattered toner prevention function is disabled.
Thin Paper -60 -60 -15 -15 50 52
Plain Paper 1 -25 -25 -5 -5 50 52
Plain Paper 2 0 0 0 0 50 52
Middle Thick 0 0 25 25 50 52
Thick Paper 1 -100 -100 5 5 35 35
Thick Paper 2 -100 -100 10 10 35 35
Thick Paper 3 -100 -100 15 15 35 35
2. When the scattered toner prevention function is enabled.
Plain Paper 1 45 45 -5 -5 50 52
Plain Paper 2 45 45 0 0 50 52
Middle Thick 45 45 25 25 50 52
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-110 SM
Rev 03/08/2017 Troubleshooting Guide
MP 601/SP 5310
Transfer Current Fusing Temperature Copy/Print Speed
Paper Type [µA] [°C] [ppm]
A4 LT A4 LT A4 LT
1. When the scattered toner prevention function is disabled.
Thin Paper -60 -60 -20 -20 60 62
Plain Paper 1 -15 -15 -5 -5 60 62
Plain Paper 2 0 0 0 0 60 62
Middle Thick 0 0 25 25 60 62
Thick Paper 1 -110 -110 0 0 38 38
Thick Paper 2 -110 -110 5 5 38 38
Thick Paper 3 -110 -110 15 15 38 38
2. When the scattered toner prevention function is enabled.
Plain Paper 1 50 50 -5 -5 60 62
Troubleshooting
Plain Paper 2 50 50 0 0 60 62
Middle Thick 50 50 25 25 60 62
Black or White spots repeat at 30mm or 96mm intervals

Symptom
 White spots / Black spots appear on the printouts in 96mm pitch.
 Black spots appear on the printouts in 30mm pitch.
Cause
Adhesives contained in label paper adhere to the drum, and then to the charge roller.
Solution
1. Set A4 (or LT) paper on the bypass tray and execute “Drum Refresh” mode.
MP 501: [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh]
SP 5300: [Menu] > [Quality Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh]
2. Remove the charge roller unit and clean the surface of the roller with dry cloth.
SM 6-111 D255/D256/M281/M282
6.12.2 PAPER TRANSPORT
Paper jam occurred in the paper path between Tray 1 and around the
registration roller
Symptom
The paper jam (such as J031, J054, J057, J069) occur in the paper path between Tray 1 and
around the registration.
Solution
Clean the registration sensor 1 and opposing part.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-112 SM
3. Clean the registration sensor 1 [A] with a damp cloth from the backside of the PCDU [B].
Troubleshooting
4. Clean the opposing part [A] of the registration sensor 1 with the damp cloth.
SM 6-113 D255/D256/M281/M282
Paper jam (J001) occurred after removing the jammed paper from the
registration section
Symptom
Paper jam (J001) occur after removing the paper which was jammed between fusing section
and registration section. This is because the registration filler has got under the registration
roller when removing the jammed paper.
Solution
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-114 SM
3. Check whether the registration filler [A] moves smoothly.
Troubleshooting
SM 6-115 D255/D256/M281/M282
Non-feed jam in ARDF (MP 501/601 Only)

Symptom
Non-feed jam occur when 60 or more originals is strongly pushed into the ARDF.
Solution
 Open the ARDF upper cover [A] and remove the originals. Then place the originals into
the ARDF. When placing the originals, do not push them into the ARDF.
 Instruct users to reduce the number of originals.
6.12.3 OTHERS
Troubles that can be improved by executing drum refresh mode

Execute the drum refresh mode when the following image quality failure occur.
 Background stains appear as bands perpendicular to the paper feed direction
 Vertical white streaks with about 1mm width in the form of a dotted line appear 15mm to the
left of the paper center
Drum refresh procedure
 It takes approximately 3 minutes to refresh the drum.

 If sheets of paper are loaded in the bypass tray, first remove them, and then refresh
the drum.
 MP 501/601
2. Press [Maintenance Features].
3. Press [Maintenance].
4. Press [Drum Refresh]
5. Press [Start].
6. Press [Exit].
 SP 5300/5310
2. Select [Quality Maintenance] -> Press [OK]
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-116 SM
3. Select [Drum Refresh] -> Press [OK]

4. Select [OK].
Problem at regular intervals

Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain
components.
The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
[A]: Paper feed direction

[B]: Problems at regular intervals
 29.9 mm intervals: Charge roller
 36.8 mm intervals: Registration roller
 44.9 mm intervals: Development roller
 61.2 mm intervals: Transfer roller
Troubleshooting
 94.2 mm intervals: Drum
 94.2 mm intervals: Pressure roller
 109.9 mm intervals: Hot roller
SM 6-117 D255/D256/M281/M282
SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed

Symptom
SC670 (engine start up error) is displayed.
Cause
The engine board resets at an unexpected timing, and does not start up again
Solution
If the symptom occurs, use the following flow chart to determine the cause and decide the
best course of action.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-118 SM
Rev. 02/09/2017 Troubleshooting Guide
SC672 (Controller start up error) is displayed

Symptom:
The following occur:
Communication error between operation panel and controller after machine is
SC672-00
powered on.
Communication error (receive) between operation panel and controller after
SC672-10
machine is powered on.
Communication error (send) between operation panel and controller after
SC672-11
machine is powered on.
Communication error between operation panel and controller after normal
SC672-12
start-up.
Communication error between operation panel and controller after normal
SC672-13
start-up; Operation panel not detected.
 SC672 does not appear on the SMC report, as it is not logged.

 The Smart Operation Panel communicates with the controller via a USB cable and IPU.
 SC672 is triggered when the panel cannot communicate with the controller.
Cause:
Possible causes of SC672 include:
 USB communication path failure (USB cable, IPU).
 Controller boot up errors and/or operation panel boot up errors due to an abnormal break
in operations of the controller.
Possible causes of operation panel cannot light include:
Troubleshooting
 USB communication path failure (USB cable, IPU).
 Operation panel cannot communicate with controller due to controller boot-up error.
Solution:
Do the following.
1. Turn the machine power OFF/ON.
2. Do the action in the flowchart below to determine the cause and best course of action when
SC672 occurs.
 If the SC recurs after you do the action in this flowchart, do the following:
 If SC819 (cache error) appears in the SC history, replace the controller board.
 If SC991 (SCS: scs time count level c’) appears in the SC history, replace the
controller board and USB cable.
SM 6-119 D255/D256/M281/M282
Troubleshooting Guide Rev. 02/09/2017
Flowchart to determine parts to replace when SC672 occurs.
Parts How to determine the cause

USB cable LED on controller blinks once every second
Operation panel LED on controller blinks once every second
Controller LEDs on controller blink constantly
Flowchart to determine which parts to replace when no display on Operation Panel.
Parts How to determine the cause

USB cable LED on controller blinks once every second
Operation Panel LED on controller blinks once every second
BiCU Fuse 1 on the BiCU
Controller LED on controller does not blink
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-120 SM
[A]: LEDs on the controller board

Check the condition (lit, off, blinking) of the LED on the controller.
Normal situation: POSTCODE LED 8 and BIOS LED blinking once every second.
No. Note
LED For CPU
- POSTCODE 8 and BIOS LED blink when the CPU is operating normally.
- POSTCODE 8 and BIOS LED are lit or off when there is a problem with the CPU.
Confirmation procedure:
1. Remove the FCU unit. (Fax unit)
2. Remove the I/F slot.
Troubleshooting
3. Turn ON the machine and check the LED from the rear-right side of the machine.
SM 6-121 D255/D256/M281/M282
[B]: Abnormal mode: LEDs on the controller board

LEDs 1 to 8 blink constantly
Example:
No. Note
POSTCOD 1. For self-diagnosis code (BIOS).
E 1-8 2. After the BIOS starts up, LEDs 4,5,7 turn off and LEDs 1,2,3 ,6 turn on and LED
8 blinks. LED 8 is lit or off when there is a problem with the CPU.
BIOS LED - LED is lit when the BIOS is running.
- LED blinks when the OS is running.
[C]: Reconnecting and replacing the USB cable:

 Reconnect the USB cable as shown below.
USB connector at the operation panel:
 When connecting the cable, hold the molded part of the cable as shown below so as not to
apply excessive force on the connector part. Applying excessive force toward the upper
direction on the connector may cause connection failure.
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-122 SM
USB connector at the BiCU:
 Reference for replacing the USB cable

Refer to “4. Replacement and Adjustment > Operation Panel (MP 501/601)
[D]: CMOS clear procedure:

Turn the machine power OFF.
1. Turn Dip switch 1-3 ON for 10 seconds
2. Turn Dip switch 1-3 OFF
3. Turn the machine power ON.
Dip switches location on the controller board:
Troubleshooting
SM 6-123 D255/D256/M281/M282
[E]: Fuse on the BiCU:

Check the Fuse 1 on the BiCU.
FU1 on the BiCU:
[F]: For replacing the operation panel or the USB cable:

Refer to “4. Replacement and Adjustment > Operation Panel (MP 501/601) (p281~)”
D255/D256/M281/M282 6-124 SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
None
Product Overview
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
7.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW
7.1.1 MP 501/601 COMPONENT LAYOUT / PAPER PATH
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-1 D255/D256/M281/M282
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
1 Paper feed tray 8 Drum unit
2 Bypass tray unit 9 Transfer unit
3 Transportation section 10 Fusing unit
4 Scanner unit 11 Paper exit unit
5 Laser unit 12 Duplex unit
6 Development unit 13 ARDF
7 Toner cartridge
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-2 SM
Product Overview
SP 5300/5310 Component Layout / Paper Path
No. Name No. Name
1 Paper feed tray 9 Charge roller
Descriptions
Detailed
2 Paper feed unit 10 Drum unit
3 Transportation section 11 Transfer unit
4 Bypass tray 12 Paper exit tray
5 Bypass tray unit 13 Paper exit unit
6 Toner cartridge 14 Fusing unit
7 Development unit 15 Duplex unit
8 Laser unit
SM 7-3 D255/D256/M281/M282
Product Overview
7.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT
MP 501/601 Switches & Sensors
No. Name No. Name
1 ARDF registration sensor 13 Interlock switch
2 ARDF original timing sensor 14 Paper feed tray size switch
3 ARDF open/close sensor 15 Main power switch PCB
4 ARDF original sensor 16 Paper feed tray limit sensor
5 ARDF position sensor 17 Bypass paper end sensor
6 Fusing thermistor 2 (Center) 18 Registration sensor 2
7 Fusing thermistor 1 (End) 19 Duplex sensor 2
8 Fusing sensor 20 Waste toner full sensor
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-4 SM
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
9 Registration sensor 1 21 Paper end sensor 1
10 Paper exit full sensor 22 Paper end sensor 2
11 Duplex sensor 1 23 Rear cover switch
12 Envelope sensor 24 Scanner HP sensor
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-5 D255/D256/M281/M282
Product Overview
SP 5300/5310 Switches & Sensors
No. Name No. Name
1 Toner density sensor PCB 11 Main power switch PCB
2 Rear cover switch 12 Paper feed tray size switch
3 Fusing thermistor 1 (End) 13 Duplex sensor 2
4 Fusing thermistor 2 (Center) 14 Registration sensor 2
5 Fusing sensor 15 Paper end sensor 2
6 Paper exit full sensor 16 Paper end sensor 1
7 Duplex sensor 1 17 Registration sensor 1
8 Envelope sensor 18 Bypass paper end sensor
9 Interlock switch 19 Waste toner full sensor
10 Paper feed tray limit sensor
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-6 SM
Product Overview
MP 501/601 Drive unit, Fans
Descriptions
No. Name No. Name Detailed
1 ARDF paper transport motor 9 Main motor
2 ARDF paper feed motor 10 Paper feed tray lift motor
3 ARDF inverter motor 11 PSU fan
4 Polygon motor 12 Fusing pressure release motor
5 Toner supply motor 13 Development fan
6 Scanner motor 14 Paper exit motor
7 Drum motor 15 Laser fan
8 Controller box fan
SM 7-7 D255/D256/M281/M282
Product Overview
SP 5300/5310 Drive unit, Fans
No. Name No. Name
1 Polygon motor 7 Paper feed tray lift motor
2 Laser fan 8 PSU fan
3 Paper exit motor 9 Fusing pressure release motor
4 Drum motor 10 Development fan
5 Controller box fan 11 Toner supply motor
6 Main motor
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-8 SM
Product Overview
MP 501/601 Electrical Components
Descriptions
Detailed
No. Name No. Name
1 LDB 11 IOB
2 Toner cartridge connection PCB 12 Thermostat connection PCB
3 Drum PCB 13 Power pack
4 Drum heater PCB (Asia Only) 14 Drum connection PCB
5 Toner cartridge PCB 15 Connect-Left PCB
6 Toner density sensor PCB 16 OPU board
7 Controller board 17 Thermistor connection PCB
SM 7-9 D255/D256/M281/M282
Product Overview
No. Name No. Name
8 BiCU 18 LED PCB
9 PSU 19 SBU
10 Fax board
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-10 SM
Product Overview
SP 5300/5310 Electrical Components
No. Name No. Name
1 LDB 9 OPU Board
2 Connect-Left PCB 10 Sensor PCB
3 Thermostat connection PCB 11 Power pack
Descriptions
4 IOB 12 Drum connection PCB Detailed
5 Controller board 13 Toner cartridge PCB
6 BiCU 14 Drum PCB
7 PSU 15 Toner cartridge connection PCB
8 Thermistor connection PCB
SM 7-11 D255/D256/M281/M282
Product Overview
MP 501/601 Others
No. Name No. Name
1 Fusing lamps 8 Duplex clutch
2 Fusing thermostat 1 (End) 9 Registration clutch
3 Fusing thermostat 2 (Center) 10 Paper feed clutch
4 Quenching lamp 11 Transport clutch
5 Speaker 12 Bypass solenoid
6 HDD 13 Inverter solenoid
7 Development clutch
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-12 SM
Product Overview
SP 5300/5310 Others
No. Name No. Name
1 Fusing thermostat 1 (End) 8 Transport clutch
Descriptions
2 Fusing thermostat 2 (Center) 9 Bypass solenoid Detailed
3 Fusing lamp 1 10 Duplex clutch
4 Fusing lamp 2 11 Control panel
5 Development clutch 12 Inverter solenoid
Drum heater PCB (Asia and

6 Registration clutch 13
Chinese Only)
7 Paper feed clutch 14 Quenching lamp
SM 7-13 D255/D256/M281/M282
7.2 SCANNER UNIT (MP 501/601 ONLY)
The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp and scanned by the CCD, the reflected
light being converted to an electrical signal.
If the ARDF is used, the scanner unit stops at the position of the ARDF exposure glass. Then the
machine sequentially scans each line of the image on the original in synchronization with the
movement of the original in the sub scan direction as it is fed by the ARDF.
No. Name No. Name
1 CCD 5 Original size indicator plate
2 Carriage 6 Exposure glass (for ARDF)
3 Scanner frame 7 Lens
4 Exposure glass 8 Mirrors
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-14 SM
Laser Unit
7.3 LASER UNIT
The charged surface of the drum is scanned by the laser beam from the laser unit. The polygon
motor rotates to reflect the laser beam over the drum. Various lenses and mirrors are housed in
the laser unit, to adjust the diameter of the laser beam, and focus it on the drum surface.
No. Name No. Name
1 Polygon motor 4 Unit base
2 f-theta main lens 5 Unit cover
3 Dust shield glass 6 Mirror
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-15 D255/D256/M281/M282
Development Unit
7.4 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
The development unit consists of the development roller that forms the magnetic brush, the
development blade and the development agitators that agitate the toner in the development unit.
The toner sensor checks whether or not toner remains in the development unit.
No. Name No. Name
1 Development roller 6 Toner supply roller
2 Development blade 7 Toner agitator
3 Development agitator A 8 Toner cartridge
4 Development agitator B 9 Development blade
5 Development case
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-16 SM
Drum Unit
7.5 DRUM UNIT
7.5.1 DRUM
The drum section consists of the drum, the charge roller unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum
surface is uniformly charged in preparation for formation of residual image by the laser beam.
After transfer is complete, toner remaining on the drum surface is removed with the cleaning blade
and is sent to the waste toner bottle with the drum coil. The quenching lamp consists of LEDs and
removes residual charge on the drum before main charging for the next image.
No. Name No. Name
1 Drum 3 Cleaning roller (for charge roller)
2 Charge roller 4 Charge roller case
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-17 D255/D256/M281/M282
Drum Unit
7.5.2 CLEANING UNIT
No. Name No. Name
1 Drum 5 Scraper
2 Cleaning blade 6 Drum frame
3 Cleaning roller 7 Waste toner removal coil (drum coil)
4 Control roller 8 Quenching lamp
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-18 SM
Transfer Unit
7.6 TRANSFER UNIT
The transfer unit consists mainly of the transfer roller, discharge plate and drum separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the power pack is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging.
Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying the separation charge that is output
from the power pack to the discharge plate.
No. Name No. Name
1 Transfer guide plate 4 Discharge plate
2 Drum 5 Drum heater (Asia Only)
3 Transfer roller
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-19 D255/D256/M281/M282
Fusing Unit
7.7 FUSING UNIT
The paper sent from the transfer unit is fed between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
The hot roller is heated by the fusing lamps, and the toner is fused by heat and pressure and fixed
onto the paper. The pressure roller is pressed by the fusing pressure spring. The surface
temperature of the hot roller is detected by the fusing thermistor and controlled by the controller
board. If the fusing unit reaches extremely high temperature, the power line will be shut off and the
fusing lamp is forced to turn off.
No. Name No. Name
1 Hot roller 7 Actuator (fusing sensor)
2 Fusing lamps 8 Fusing exit roller
3 Fusing thermostat 9 Fusing exit pulley
4 Fusing thermistor 10 Fusing thermistor
5 Separators 11 Fusing entrance guide
6 Pressure roller
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-20 SM
Fusing Unit
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-21 D255/D256/M281/M282
Paper Exit Unit
7.8 PAPER EXIT UNIT
The paper exit unit consists of the transport path which sends the paper from the fusing unit to the
paper exit tray, and the transport path which sends the paper to the duplex unit when duplex
printing.
No. Name No. Name
1 Upper paper exit pulley 5 Lower paper exit pulley
MP 501/601: Paper exit cover

2 Upper paper exit roller 6
SP 5300/5310: Upper cover
3 Actuator (paper tray full sensor) 7 Duplex feed pulley
4 Lower paper exit roller
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-22 SM
Paper Exit Unit
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-23 D255/D256/M281/M282
Duplex Unit
7.9 DUPLEX UNIT
The duplex unit consists of the transport path which sends the paper from the paper exit unit to the
transportation section when duplex printing.
No. Name No. Name
1 Duplex rollers 5 Duplex base
2 Duplex idle rollers 6 Duplex lower guide
3 Actuator (duplex sensor 1) 7 Feed upper guide
4 Actuator (duplex sensor 2)
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-24 SM
Paper Feed Unit
7.10 PAPER FEED UNIT
The paper feed unit consists of the paper feed section that feeds paper from the cassette, the
bypass tray, and the paper transport section that conveys the fed paper to the transportation
section.
The cassette can contain 500 sheets. The sheet from the cassette is pulled out by rotation of the
pickup roller and sent to the transportation section by rotation of the paper feed roller. The
separation roller prevents multiple feeding.
No. Name No. Name
1 Paper feed roller 7 Bottom plate
2 Pickup roller 8 Paper width guide
3 Feed roller holder 9 Paper length guide
4 Separation roller 10 Cassette base
5 Separation roller holder 11 Actuator (paper end sensor)
6 Friction pad
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-25 D255/D256/M281/M282
Paper Feed Unit
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-26 SM
Bypass Tray Unit
7.11 BYPASS TRAY UNIT
The bypass tray can contain 100 sheets. Feeding from the bypass tray is performed by the
rotation of the bypass paper feed roller. The bypass separation pad prevents paper from multiple
feeding.
No. Name No. Name
1 Bypass paper feed roller 5 Bypass frame
2 Bypass separation pad 6 Bypass paper width guide
3 Bypass bottom plate 7 Actuator (bypass paper end sensor)
4 Bypass tray
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-27 D255/D256/M281/M282
7.12 ARDF (MP 501/601 ONLY)
7.12.1 ORIGINAL FEED SECTION

The original feed section consists of the parts shown below. An original placed on the original tray
is conveyed to the original feed section. The original is fed by the rotation of the ARDF pickup
pulley and the ARDF paper feed roller.
No. Name No. Name
1 ARDF pickup roller 5 Pre-separation pad
2 ARDF paper feed roller 6 Actuator (ARDF original sensor)
3 ARDF feed roller holder 7 Original tray
Actuator (ARDF original timing

4 ARDF separation pad 8
sensor)
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-28 SM
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-29 D255/D256/M281/M282
7.12.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT SECTION AND EXIT SECTION

The original transport section consists of the parts shown below. A transported original is scanned
by the optical section (CCD) of the main unit when it passes the exposure glass of the ARDF in
the main unit.
The original exit section consists of the parts shown below. An original that has completed
scanning is ejected to the original exit table by the exit roller.
The original is transported temporarily to the original exit table and transported again to the
original transport section by the junction roller.
No. Name No. Name
1 Actuator (ARDF registration sensor) 8 Junction guide
2 ARDF registration roller 9 Junction roller
3 ARDF registration pulley 10 Junction pulley
4 Reading guide 11 ARDF exit roller
5 Exposure glass for ARDF 12 ARDF exit pulley
6 ARDF transport roller 13 ARDF exit guide
7 ARDF transport pulley 14 Original exit tray
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-30 SM
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 7-31 D255/D256/M281/M282
Energy Save
7.13 ENERGY SAVE
7.13.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the
timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different.
For example, if the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is
saved before 240 min. expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers in the following menu.
 MP 501/601: User Tools > System settings > Timer Settings
 SP 5300/5310: System > Low Power Mode Timer
Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode. Default setting: 1 min.
Return to Stand-by Mode

Recovery time from off/sleep mode: 10 sec.
Warm-up time:
 MP 501: 24 sec.(NA/AP), 60 sec.(EU)
 MP 601: 25.4 sec.(NA/AP), 60 sec.(EU)
 SP 5300: 21 sec.
 SP 5310: 25.4 sec.
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-32 SM
Energy Save
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
 If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their
energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of
extra energy use.
 If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not
too long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60
min.) if the customer is not satisfied.
 If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until
240 minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished
using the machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
 If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8-941 (Machine
Status), as explained below.
Energy Save Effectiveness

SP 8-941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each
mode.
 SP8-941-001: Operating mode
 SP 8-941-002: Standby mode
 SP 8-941-003: Panel off mode (Not used in this model)
 SP 8-941-004: Low power mode (Not used in this model)
 SP 8-941-005: Sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the
amount of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
Descriptions
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply. Detailed
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the
actual energy consumed.
To use SP8-941 to calculate the energy consumed:
 At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005.
 At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005 again.
 Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
 Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
 Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Here is an example calculation.
SM 7-33 D255/D256/M281/M282
Energy Save
Machine SP8-941: Time at Time at Running time Power Power

Condition Machine Start End (min.) (hour) consumption consumption
Status (min.) ( - )/60= Spec. (W) (KWH)
( × )/1000=
Operating 001:
Operating
Time 21089.0 21386.0 4.95 898 4.45
002:
Stand by Standby
(Ready) Time 306163.0 308046.0 31.38 179 5.62
003:
Energy Energy
save Save
(Panel off) Time 74000 75111.0 18.52 148.09 2.74
004: Low
Low Power
power Time 148000 150333 38.88 111 4.32
005: Off
Mode
Sleep Time 508776.0 520377.0 193.35 1.8 0.35
Total 17.47
D255/D256/M281/M282 7-34 SM
D255/D256/M281/M282
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D255/D256/M281/M282 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 1-1

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MP 501/601) ................................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 MAINFRAME ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 COPIER SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 1-5
1.1.3 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1-8
1.1.4 SCAN SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................... 1-9
Scan to Email ........................................................................................................ 1-11
Scan to Folder ....................................................................................................... 1-12
Network TWAIN Driver .......................................................................................... 1-14
1.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (SP 5300/5310) ........................................................... 1-15
1.2.1 MAINFRAME ..................................................................................................... 1-15
1.3 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ...................................................................................... 1-19
1.3.1 PAPER FEED .................................................................................................... 1-19
1.4 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.1 PRINTER DRIVERS.......................................................................................... 1-21
Windows ................................................................................................................ 1-21
Mac OS Environment ............................................................................................ 1-23
UNIX Environment ................................................................................................. 1-23
SAP R/3 Environment (Device Type / Barcode & OCR Package) ........................ 1-23
1.4.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS ............................................................... 1-24
1.5 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT............................................................................................. 1-25
1.5.1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100 ............................................................................. 1-25
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ..................................... 2-1

2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS .............................................................. 2-1
Mainframe................................................................................................................ 2-1
Paper Feed Unit PB1100 ......................................................................................... 2-3
3. SP MODE TABLES........................................................................ 3-1

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE............................. 3-1
Entering SP Mode ................................................................................................... 3-1
SM Appendix i D255/D256/M281/M282
General Specifications (MP 501/601)
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................................... 3-1
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................................... 3-2
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing (MP 501/601 Only)3-3
Selecting the Program Number (MP 501/601 Only) ............................................... 3-3
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 REMARKS ........................................................................................................... 3-5
Display on the Operation Panel Screen .................................................................. 3-5
Others ...................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1 ....................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3 MAIN SP TABLES-2 ..................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) ............................................................................................. 3-10
3.4 MAIN SP TABLES-3 ..................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ...................................................................................... 3-11
3.5 MAIN SP TABLES-4 ..................................................................................................... 3-13
3.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ...................................................................................... 3-13
3.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 (ENGINE) ................................................................................... 3-19
3.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ............................................................................................. 3-19
3.7 MAIN SP TABLES-5 (CONTROLLER) ........................................................................ 3-22
3.7.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ............................................................................................. 3-22
3.8 MAIN SP TABLES-6 (MP 501/601 ONLY) ................................................................... 3-67
3.8.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)............................................................................... 3-67
3.9 MAIN SP TABLES-7 (ENGINE) ................................................................................... 3-68
3.9.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ...................................................................................... 3-68
3.10 MAIN SP TABLES-7 (CONTROLLER) .................................................................. 3-71
3.10.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ...................................................................................... 3-71
3.11 MAIN SP TABLES-8 ..................................................................................................... 3-96
3.11.1 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) .................................................................................... 3-96
3.12 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ................................................................................ 3-150
3.12.1 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ............................................................................ 3-150
3.13 SCANNER SERVICE MODE (MP 501/601 ONLY) ............................................ 3-162
3.13.1 SP1-XXX ......................................................................................................... 3-162
3.13.2 SP2-XXX ......................................................................................................... 3-163
3.14 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................ 3-165
3.14.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-803) .................................................................. 3-165
3.14.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-804) .............................................................. 3-165
4. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION ................................................... 4-1

D255/D256/M281/M282 ii SM Appendix
4.1 PRINTING FEATURES .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION ..................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION ................................................................. 4-1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 4-1
Conditions for detection of the PDL ........................................................................ 4-1
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter .............. 4-2
PDL selection and switching ................................................................................... 4-3
Triggers.................................................................................................................... 4-3
Some possible problems ......................................................................................... 4-5
Printer Bit Switch description .................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION................................................................................ 4-6
4.1.4 PJL USTATUS ..................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2 SCANNER FEATURES (MP 501/601 ONLY) .............................................................. 4-10
4.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN DESTINATION ............... 4-10
4.2.2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO EMAIL ............... 4-11
Typical example ..................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER .......................... 4-13
4.3 MANAGEMENT FEATURES ....................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.1 HOW TO DISABLE THE DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTION.......................... 4-15
4.4 SECURITY FEATURES ............................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU............................... 4-16
4.4.2 HOW TO RESTRICT WEB IMAGE MONITOR ACCESS TO THE DOCUMENT
SERVER (MP 501/601 ONLY) ..................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.3 USER AUTHENTICATION FOR SPECIFIC MFP APPLICATIONS .................. 4-18
SM Appendix iii D255/D256/M281/M282

APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
None
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (MP 501/601)
1.1.1 MAINFRAME
Item Spec.
Configuration: Desktop
Color Supported: Black and White
Intel® AtomTM Processor BayTrail-I

CPU:
1.46 GHz
RAM: Standard: 2 GB
HDD: 320 GB
Scanning Element: One-dimensional solid scanning through CCD
Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic

Printing process:
printing
Development: Monocomponent jumping development system
Fusing System: Roller fusing system
A4 SEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8.5"

× 14"(LG) SEF, 8.5" × 13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5" ×
11"(LT) SEF, 8.25" × 14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25"
× 13"(Folio) SEF, 8" × 13"(F/GL) SEF, 8" × 10"(Eng
Recommended Tray 1 (Standard
Quatro) SEF, 7.25" × 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" ×
Paper Size: Tray):
8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, 16K SEF, 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Width: 105.0 mm (4.14 inch) - 216.0 mm (8.50 inch)
Length: 148.0 mm (5.83 inch) - 356.0 mm (14.0 inch)
SM Appendix 1-1 D255/D256/M281/M282

Item Spec.
A4 SEF, A5 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8.5" × 14"(LG)

SEF, 8.5" × 13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5" × 11"(LT) SEF,
8.25" × 14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25" × 13"(Folio)
SEF, 8" × 13"(F/GL) SEF, 8" × 10"(Eng Quatro) SEF,
Tray 2 to 5
Recommended 7.25" × 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half
(Optional Paper
Paper Size: Letter) SEF, Com10 SEF, Monarch SEF, C5 SEF, C6
Feed Tray):
SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF, 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>

Recommended
Bypass Tray: 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, Com10 SEF, Monarch SEF,
Paper Size:
C5 SEF, C6 SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF, 8.5" × 13.4"
SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Paper Feeding Standard: 600 sheets (500 sheets + 100 sheets/ bypass)
Capacity
Option: Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets
(LT/A4: 80gsm
paper): Max: 2,600 sheets (500 sheets × 5 trays + 100
sheets/bypass)
Paper Output Max: 500 sheets

Capacity
(LT/A4: 80gsm
paper):
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-2 SM Appendix

Item Spec.
Specifications
Paper Type Tray 1 (Standard Paper Type:
Capacity: Tray): Plain Paper (Not Displayed as Paper Type), Recycle
Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Bond Paper
Thickness:
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick
Paper 1
Tray 2 to 5 Paper Type:

(Optional Paper Plain Paper (Not Displayed as Paper Type), Recycle
Feed Tray): Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Bond Paper, Envelope
Thickness:
Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick, Thick
Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Bypass Tray: Paper Type:

Plain Paper (Not Displayed as Paper Type), Recycle
Paper, Color Paper, Special Paper, Letterhead,
Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper, OHP, Label,
Envelope
Thickness:
Thin Paper, Plain Paper 1, Plain Paper 2, Middle
Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3
Paper Weight: Tray 1 (Standard 64 - 120 g/m2 (17 - 44 lb. Bond)

Tray):
Tray 2-5 (Optional 64 - 120 g/m 2 (17 - 44 lb. Bond)

paper feed tray): * Envelope: 64 - 220 g/m2 (17 - 80 lb. Bond)
Bypass Tray: 60 - 220 g/m 2 (16 - 80 lb. Bond)
Max. Imageable Area: 216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14.0 inches)
First Copy Time (LT/A4 SEF, Tray

7 seconds
1):
First Print Time 6 seconds

Item Spec.
NA/AP:
MP 501: 24 seconds
MP 601: 25.4 seconds
Warm-up Time: EU:
60 seconds
* The warm-up time may differ depending on the
conditions and environment of the machine.
NA: 120 - 127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz

Power Source:
EU/AP: 220 - 240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
1.5 kW or less
Max Power Consumption
(The complete system consists of the main unit, four
(Complete System):
optional paper feed units, and wireless LAN board)
MP 501:
Stand-by: 30.4 dB (A)
Printing: 73.3 dB (A)
Noise emission (Sound Power MP 601:
Level) (Complete System): Stand-by: 30.3 dB (A)
optional paper feed units, and caster table)
MP 501: 5.0K
Target Monthly ACV:
MP 601: 6.5K
Max Monthly 15K

CV (5 years):
PM Cycle: ARDF: 200K, Optics: 500K, Mainframe: 500K

Reliability:
MCBC (Mean 0.15 or less
Copy Between
Calls):
Dimensions (W x D x H): 475 × 504 × 645 mm (18.8 × 19.9 × 25.4 inches)
Weight: Less than 28 kg (62 lb.)

1.1.2 COPIER SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Item Spec.
CPM: MP 501: 50 cpm (A4 SEF), 52 cpm (LT SEF)

MP 601: 60 cpm (A4 SEF), 62 cpm (LT SEF)
Copy Resolution: 600 dpi/bit
Maximum Continuous Copy Run: 999 sheets
Reproduction NA: 155%, 129%, 100%, 93%, 78%, 65%

Ratio:
EU/AP: 200%, 141%, 100%, 93%, 71%, 50%
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% step
Number of Copy Reservations: 8 jobs
Image Density: Auto Density Selection

Manual: 9 levels
Copy Mode: Text

Text/Photo
Photo
Pale
Generation Copy
(Default: Text)
Paper Selection: Tray 1

Tray 2 (optional paper feed tray)
Bypass Tray
(Default: Tray 1)
Auto Tray Switch: Yes
Duplex: 1 sided to 2 sided, 2sided to 2 sided, Book to 2

sided, Front and Back to 2 sided
Book: Booklet: Yes
Magazine:

Item Spec.
Layout & Booklet:
Series: Book to simplex: Yes
2 sided original to
simplex:
Combine (Layout): The following combinations are supported:

2 into 1 simplex
4 into 1 simplex
8 into 1 simplex
1 duplex into 1 simplex
4 into 1 duplex
8 into 1 duplex
16 into 1 duplex
2 duplex into 1 duplex
Shift/Erase/ Centering: Yes

Margin
Cornering: No
Adjustment:
Margin 1mm step (0-30mm) (Default: 0mm)
Adjustment:
Scan Position No
Adjustment:
Creep Adjustment: No
Erase Center: 1mm step (2-99mm) (Default:10mm)
Erase Border: 1mm step (2-99mm) (Default: 10mm)
Cover Sheet Front Cover: Copy or Blank (Default: Copy)

Chapter
Front and Back
Slip Sheets:
Cover:
Chapter: Yes (Up to 20 chapters)

Item Spec.
Specifications
Slip Sheets: Yes
Image Rotation: No
Electronic Without Shift Sort: Yes

Sort:
Rotate Sort: No
Shift Sort: No
Electronic Stack: No
Stapling: No
Image Repeat: Yes

Creation:
Double Copy: No
Mirror: No
Positive/Negative: No
Erase Inside: No
Erase Outside: No
Stamp/ Preset Stamp: Yes (8 Stamps / 2 sizes) * Not from the By-pass tray
Numbering:
User Stamp: Yes (4 Stamps / 1 sizes) * Not from the By-pass tray
Date Stamp: Yes (5 Stamps) * Not from the By-pass tray
Page Number: Yes (6 Stamps) * Not from the By-pass tray
Bates Numbering: Yes * Not from the By-pass tray
Printing copy Yes

prevention pattern:
Sharp/Soft: 7 levels
Contrast: 9 levels
Background Density Adjustment: 9 levels
Job Programs: Mode: 25 Program

Default: 1 Program

Item Spec.
User Code: 8 digits / 1000 user codes
Interrupt Copy: Yes
Auto Start: Yes
Job Preset: Yes (8 jobs)
Sample Copy: Yes
1.1.3 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Item Spec.
Standard:
RPCS, PCL 5e/6, PostScript 3, PDF, MediaPrint (JPEG,
Printer Language: TIFF)
Option:
IPDS, XPS
Print Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
PCL: Scalable 45 fonts + Bitmapped: 6 fonts +

Font: International 13 fonts
PS3: 136 Roman fonts
Standard:
Ethernet (1000BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX/ 10BASE-T), SD
card slot, USB2.0 Host
Host Interfaces: Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless
LAN interface, Extended USB board, USB device server,
Bluetooth interface
Network Protocol: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
USB interface: Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server

Supported operating system 2003/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2, OS X 10.8 or later

1.1.4 SCAN SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Item Spec.
Color Scan: Standard
Scanning BW: 60 pages/minute (A4/LT SEF, 300dpi)
Speed: Color: 40 pages/minute (A4/LT SEF, 300dpi)
Scanning Resolution: 100 / 200 (default) / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Original sizes that can be Length: 10 - 216 mm (0.4 - 8.5 inches)

scanned: Width: 10 - 356 mm (0.4 - 14.0 inches)
Main: 216 mm (8.5 inches)

Scan Area
Sub: 356 mm (14.0 inches)
sRGB Supported: Yes
Standard: Ethernet interface

Network Interface: (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Option: IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Network: TCP/IP
Sending E-mail: SMTP
Protocol:
Scan to Folder: SMB, FTP
Web Services on Devices for Scanning
Compression Type: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2), JPEG
BW: Text, Text / Line Art, Text / Photo, Photo, Grey Scale
Scan Mode:
Color: Text / Photo, Glossy Photo, Auto Color Select
Auto Density Selection

Image Density:
Manual: 7 levels
Image Rotation: Yes
SADF/Batch Mode: Yes
Mixed Size Mode: Mixed LT/LG Size only.
Reduce and Enlarge: Yes

Item Spec.
Split scan from Booklet type Yes

Original:
Digital Signature for PDF: Yes
On BW 1bit / (MH, MR or MMR)

Single Page TIFF:
Off BW 1bit, BW Grayscale or Full Color
On BW 1bit /(MH, MR or MMR)

Multi Page TIFF:
On BW Grayscale or Full Color / (JPEG)

Single Page JPEG:
Off -
On BW 1bit / (MH, MR, MMR or JBIG2), BW Grayscale /
Single Page PDF: (JPEG), Full Color / (JPEG)
On BW 1bit / (MH, MR, MMR or JBIG2), BW Grayscale /
Multi Page PDF: (JPEG), Full Color / (JPEG)
On BW Grayscale / (JPEG or JPEG2000), Full Color / (JPEG

Single Page High or JPEG2000)
Compression PDF:
Off -
On BW Grayscale / (JPEG or JPEG2000), Full Color / (JPEG

Multi Page High or JPEG2000)
Compression PDF:
Off -
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-10 SM Appendix

Scan to Email
Specifications
Item Spec.
Requirement (Mail Protocol, SMTP (Mail Server) Gateway and TCP/IP

Transmission Protocol,
Protocol):
Authorization Function: SMTP authentication, POP before SMTP authentication
Resolution: 100, 200 (Default), 300, 400, 600
Max Email Address in HDD: 2,000
Register Group Address in Max. 100 Group (Max. 500 addresses in one group
HDD: address)
Input of Destination E-mail Possible, Max. 100 destinations per job

Address via Soft Key:
Search methods of Email By name and E-mail address

Address in HDD:
LDAP Search: Yes
Max Address Numbers Per Max. 500 addresses per send

Send:
Attention: To, cc, bcc
With Restriction: 128 – 102,400 KB

Email Size:
Without Restriction: -
Manual: Max. 128 Characters via soft key

Input Subject:
User Pre-register: Max. 20 Characters via soft key
Manual: Max. 80 Characters via soft key

User Pre-register: Max. 400 Characters via soft key (80
Input Main body text:
characters × 5 lines)
Preset: -
Input File Name: Yes
SM Appendix 1-11 D255/D256/M281/M282

Item Spec.
File Type: Single Page: TIFF/JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF,

Secure PDF, Digital Signature PDF, PDF/A
Multi Page: TIFF, PDF, High Compression PDF, Secure
PDF, Digital Signature PDF, PDF/OCR*
*Option required
Program User Settings: Up to 25 programs
Divide and send Email (If the Yes (By page or size) / No (Default: Yes (By size)*)
file size exceed the max *If the sent file size exceeded the maximum E-mail size, it
size.): would be divided to multiple sending. In addition, the sent
files might not be accepted by the receiving side due to
the limitation in the receiving capacity at the receiver
SMTP server or E-mail software setting.
Resend: Yes / No (Default: Yes)
Scan to Folder
Item Spec.
Protocol Support: SMB, FTP
Security: Client folder log-in (log-in name and password),

Encryption of log-in name and password during
transmission
Resolution: 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi (Default: 200
dpi)
Register client folder Max. 2,000 folders

address in HDD:
Maintain client folder Direct input on operation panel, Web Image Monitor,
address in HDD: Smart Device Monitor
Direct addressing of Yes

destination client folder via SMB: Network path -> Client folder -> Password
soft key: FTP: Server -> Network path -> User account ->
Password
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-12 SM Appendix

Item Spec.
Specifications
Search client folder: SMB: Browsing directly to the designated folders
FTP: By client folder name
Max. client folder numbers Max. 50 client folders / PCs per send
per send:
Simultaneous Transmission: Max. 550
Group address: Max group:100

Max member per group:500
Input File Name: Yes
Scan to File size 2,000 MB per file
File Size when combined 128 - 102, 400 KB

Scan to Folder & Scan to Default = 2,048 KB (With restriction), 725MB (Without
E-mail: restriction), (Scan to E-mail file size applied).
File Type: Single Page: TIFF/JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF,

Secure PDF, Digital Signature PDF
Multi Page: TIFF, PDF, High Compression PDF, Secure
PDF, Digital Signature PDF
Program User Settings: Up to 25 programs
Resend: Yes / No (Default: Yes)
SM Appendix 1-13 D255/D256/M281/M282

Network TWAIN Driver
Item Spec.
OS: Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server

2003/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
(Operates in 32-bit compatibility mode on 64-bit operating
systems)
Resolution: BW: 100 – 1200 dpi (Black and White / Grayscale)
Color: 100 – 1200 dpi (Black and White / Grayscale)
Scan Mode: Standard / Photo / OCR / Filing
Image Adjustment: Brightness / Contrast / Threshold /Gamma Adjustment /

Halftone Pattern
Endorser: Supported
Stamp: Date / Page Number / Text
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-14 SM Appendix

General Specifications (SP 5300/5310)
1.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (SP 5300/5310)
Specifications
1.2.1 MAINFRAME
Item Spec.
Configuration: Desktop
Color Supported: Black and White
Intel® AtomTM Processor BayTrail-I

CPU:
1.46 GHz
RAM: Standard: 2 GB
Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic

Printing process:
printing
Development: Monocomponent jumping development system
Fusing System: Roller fusing system
Standard:
PCL 5e/6, PostScript 3, PDF
Printer Language:
Option:
XPS, IPDS
Print Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
PCL: Scalable 45 fonts + Bitmapped: 6 fonts +

Font: International 13 fonts
PS3: 136 Roman fonts
Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Option:
Host Interfaces:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
wireless LAN interface, USB device server, Extended
USB board
Network Protocol: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
SM Appendix 1-15 D255/D256/M281/M282

Item Spec.
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server

Network/Operating System: 2003/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2, OS X 10.8 or
later

Recommended Tray 1 (Standard
Paper Size: Tray):
8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, 16K SEF, 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
A4 SEF, A5 SEF, B5 SEF, B6 SEF, 8.5" × 14"(LG)

SEF, 8.5" × 13"(Foolscap) SEF, 8.5" × 11"(LT) SEF,
8.25" × 14"(Government LG) SEF, 8.25" × 13"(Folio)
SEF, 8" × 13"(F/GL) SEF, 8" × 10"(Eng Quatro) SEF,
Tray 2 to 5
Recommended 7.25" × 10.5"(Executive) SEF, 5.5" × 8.5" (Half Letter)
(Optional Paper
Paper Size: SEF, Com10 SEF, Monarch SEF, C5 SEF, C6 SEF,
Feed Tray):
DL Env SEF, 16K SEF, 8.5" × 13.4" SEF
<Custom Size Paper>

Recommended
Bypass Tray: 8.5" (Half Letter) SEF, Com10 SEF, Monarch SEF, C5
Paper Size:
SEF, C6 SEF, DL Env SEF, 16K SEF, 8.5" × 13.4"
SEF
<Custom Size Paper>
Paper Feeding Standard: 600 sheets (500 sheets + 100 sheets/ bypass)
Capacity Option: Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-16 SM Appendix

Item Spec.
Specifications
(LT/A4: 80gsm 2,600 sheets (500 sheets × 5 trays + 100
Max:
paper): sheets/bypass)
Paper Output
Capacity
Max: 500 sheets
(LT/A4: 80gsm
paper):
Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick Paper, Thick

Tray 1 (Standard Paper 1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Special Paper
Tray): 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Letterhead
Paper, Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper
Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick Paper, Thick

Tray 2 to 5
Paper 1, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Special Paper
(Optional Paper
Paper Type 1, Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Letterhead
Feed Tray):
Capacity: Paper, Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper, Envelope
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Plain Paper 2, Middle Thick

Paper, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3,
Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Special Paper 1,
Bypass Tray:
Special Paper 2, Special Paper 3, Letterhead Paper,
Preprinted Paper, Bond Paper, OHP, Label Paper,
Envelope
Tray 1 (Standard
64 - 135 g/m2 (17 - 36 lb. Bond)
Tray):
Tray 2-5
Paper Weight:
(Optional paper 64 - 220 g/m 2 (17 - 80 lb. Bond)
feed tray):
Bypass Tray: 60 - 220 g/m 2 (16 - 80 lb. Bond)
First Print Time 6 seconds
SP 5300: 21 seconds
SP 5310: 25 seconds
Warm-up Time:
* The warm-up time may differ depending on the
conditions and environment of the machine.
SM Appendix 1-17 D255/D256/M281/M282

Item Spec.
NA: 120 - 127 V, 11 A, 60 Hz

Power Source:
EU/AP: 220 - 240 V, 6 A, 50/60 Hz
1.4 kW or less
Max Power Consumption
(Complete System):
optional paper feed units, and wireless LAN board)
SP 5300:
Stand-by: 30.7 dB (A)
Noise emission (Sound Power SP 5310:
Level) (Complete System): Stand-by: 29.9 dB (A)
optional paper feed units, and caster table)
SP 5300: 4.0K
Target Monthly ACV:
SP 5310: 5.5K
Max Monthly
15K
CV (5 years):
PM Cycle: 500K
Reliability:
MCBC (Mean
Copy Between 0.15 or less
Calls):
Dimensions (W x D x H): 420 × 410 × 345 mm (16.6 × 16.2 × 13.6 inches)
Weight: Less than 18 kg (40 lb.)
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-18 SM Appendix

Supported Paper Sizes
1.3 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
Specifications
1.3.1 PAPER FEED
Remarks:
C Supported: Select the paper size using the paper size dial on the tray.
Supported: Set the paper size dial on the tray to "Asterisk", and select the paper
D
size with the control panel.
E Supported: Select the paper size using the control panel.
- Not supported.
* The duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
Tray 2 to 5
Tray 1
(Optional
Paper Size (Main Paper Bypass Tray
Paper Feed
Feed Tray)
Tray)
A4 SEF 210 × 297 mm C C E
A5 SEF 148 × 210 mm C C E
A5 LEF 210 × 148 mm D - E
A6 SEF 105 × 148 mm C - E
B5 SEF 182 × 257 mm D D E
B6 SEF 128 × 182 mm D D E
Legal SEF 8.5 × 14 inch C C E
Foolscap SEF 8.5 × 13 inch D D E
Letter SEF 8.5 × 11 inch C C E
GovernmentLG
8.25 × 14 inch D D E
SEF
Folio SEF 8.25 × 13 inch D D E
SM Appendix 1-19 D255/D256/M281/M282

Supported Paper Sizes
Tray 2 to 5
Tray 1
(Optional
Paper Size (Main Paper Bypass Tray
Paper Feed
Feed Tray)
Tray)
F/GL SEF 8 × 13 inch D D E
Eng Quatro SEF 8 × 10 inch D D E
Executive SEF 7.25 × 10.5 inch D D E
Half Letter SEF 5.5 × 8.5 inch C C E
Com10 Env. SEF 4.125 × 9.5 inch - D E*
Monarch Env. SEF 3.875 × 7.5 inch - D E*
C5 Env. SEF 162 × 229 mm - D E*
C6 Env. SEF 114 × 162 mm - D E*
DL Env. SEF 110 × 220 mm - D E*
16K SEF 195 × 267 mm D D E
8 1/2 × 13 2/5 SEF 8.5 × 13.4 inch D D E
Custom:
Tray 2 to 5
Tray 1 (Main Tray) Bypass Tray
(Optional Paper Feed Tray)
105.0 - 216.0 mm 92.0 - 216.0 mm 70.0 - 216.0 mm

Width
4.14 - 8.50 inch 3.63 - 8.50 inch 2.76 - 8.50 inch
148.0 - 356.0 mm 162.0 - 356.0 mm 148.0 - 356.0 mm

Length
5.83 - 14.0 inch 6.38 - 14.0 inch 5.83 - 14.0 inch
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-20 SM Appendix

Software Accessories
1.4 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
Specifications
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows
you to select which components to install.
1.4.1 PRINTER DRIVERS
Windows
OS Type PCL5c PCL6 PS3 XPS
Starter - - - -
*3 *3 *1
Home Basic
*3 *3 *1
Home Premium
Windows Vista
*3 *3 *1
Business
*3 *3 *1
Ultimate
*3 *3 *1
Enterprise
Starter - - - -
Home Basic - - - -
Home Premium
Windows 7
Professional
Ultimate
Enterprise
Windows 8
Windows 8.1
Windows 8/8.1 Pro
Enterprise
RT - - - -
Windows 10 Home
SM Appendix 1-21 D255/D256/M281/M282

OS Type PCL5c PCL6 PS3 XPS
Mobile - - - -
Pro
Enterprise
Education
Mobile Enterprise - - - -
loT Core - - - -
*2 *2 *2
Standard Edition -
*2 *2 *2
Windows Server Enterprise Edition -
2003/ R2 Datacenter Edition - - - -
Web Edition - - - -
Standard Edition
Enterprise Edition
Windows Server Standard without Hyper-V
2008/R2 Enterprise without Hyper-V
Datacenter Edition - - - -
Web Edition - - - -
Foundation
Windows Server Essentials
2012/R2 Standard
Datacenter - - - -
: Supported
-: Not supported
* RPCS driver has been discontinued.
*1: SP1 or later is recommended
*2: SP2 or later is Recommended
*3: SP1 or later is recommended
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-22 SM Appendix

Mac OS Environment
Specifications
OS PS3 Printer Utility for Mac
Mac OS 8.6 or later, Mac OS X classic - -
Mac OS X Native: v.10.8 or later -
: Supported
-: Not supported
UNIX Environment
UNIX Platforms Version
Sun Solaris 9, 10
HP-UX 11.x, 11i v2, 11i v3
Red Hat Linux Enterprise V4, V5, V6
SCO OpenServer 5.0.7, 6.0
IBM AIX V 5L, V5.3, V6.1, V7.1
SAP R/3 Environment (Device Type / Barcode & OCR Package)

Device Type will be provided from SAP itself in SAP Printer Vendor Program.
For the detailed specification, please refer to another announcement to be issued in the future.
Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, Codabar, 2 of 5
Supported Barcode Barcode Fonts interleaved/Industrial/Matrix, MSI, USPS,
& OCR Fonts UPC/EAN
OCR Fonts OCR A, OCR B
 The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows 2000, which uses
Microsoft PS.
 A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver.
SM Appendix 1-23 D255/D256/M281/M282

1.4.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS

Operating system for TWAIN driver:
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
(TWAIN scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit operating system, so TWAIN
scanner is not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it with 32-bit applications.)
Operating system for WIA driver:
Windows Vista (SP1 or later)/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
(WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.)
Operating system for LAN FAX driver:
Windows Vista/7/8/8.1/10, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2
 The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly from your PC. Address Book Editor
and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well.
 The Network TWAIN driver operates in 32-bit compatibility mode on 64-bit operating
systems
 The Network TWAIN driver is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
D255/D256/M281/M282 1-24 SM Appendix

Optional Equipment
1.5 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Specifications
1.5.1 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1100
Item Spec.
Paper Size: Half Letter SEF – A4 SEF
Paper Weight: 64 – 120 g/m 2 (17 – 44 lb.)
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets (500 sheets × 1 tray with 80 g/m 2 paper)
Power Consumption: Less than 13 W (Average)
Dimension (W × D × H): 380 × 410 × 121 mm (15.0 × 16.2 × 4.8 inches)
Weight: 4.0 kg (8.9 lb.)
SM Appendix 1-25 D255/D256/M281/M282

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
None
Maintenance Tables
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
Maintenance
Preventive
 The amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Tables
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Chart: A4 (LT)/6%
Mode: 3 prints/job
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
 Yield Parts: The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total
copy/print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the
machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV,
color ratio, and P/J). So, these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts
(EM parts). The parts with "(R)" in this table are yield parts.
Mainframe
Item 200K EM Life Note
ARDF pickup roller (R) - 200K
ARDF paper feed roller (R) - 200K
ARDF friction pad (R) - 200K

Maintenance Tables
Optics (MP 501/601 Only)
Wipe with a soft cloth

Exposure glass - C - infiltrated with alcohol or
neutral detergent.
Exposure glass (for ARDF) - C - Wipe with a dry cloth.
Mainframe
Transfer roller (R) - -
Drum unit (R) - -
Development Unit (R) - -
Fusing Unit (R) - -

Paper feed roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Pickup roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Separation roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Bypass paper feed roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

MP 501/601: Registration sensor infiltrated with alcohol or
SP 5300/5310: Registration C C - water.
sensor 1 Refer to the FSM for the
cleaning procedure.

Maintenance Tables
Registration roller - C - Wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Vent - C - Wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Maintenance
Preventive
Paper Feed Unit PB1100
Tables

Paper feed roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Pickup roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

Separation roller (R) C - infiltrated with alcohol or
water.

SP MODE TABLES
41 ~ 42 01/20/2017 Removed SP5759 Machine Limit Count
Service Program Mode
3. SP MODE TABLES
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
 Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the
copier to process the data.
SP Mode Tables
3.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
 The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is
used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted
or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any
more.
Entering SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
 MP 501/601: Press [Exit] on the operation panel twice to return to the copy window.
 SP 5300/5310: Select [End] from the service mode main menu, and then press [OK].
3.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

Select one of the Service Program modes from the diagram below after you access the SP mode.
MP 501/601
 System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
 Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
 Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
 Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
 This section explains the functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the
Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
SP 5300/5310
 Service SP: SP modes related to the controller/printer functions
 Engine SP: SP modes related to the engine functions

SP Mode Button Summary

MP 501/601
Select one of the Service Program modes (Service, or Engine) from the touch panel.
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
No. Description
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode
display.
3 Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press
SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode
screen.
4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP
number. Then press [#]. The required SP Mode number will be highlighted
when pressing [#]. If not, just press the required SP Mode number.

No. Description
5 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to
resume normal operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the
screen display (page).
SP Mode Tables
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in
the list.
SP 5300/5310
Select one of the Service Program modes (Service, or Engine) with [ / ] keys, and then
press the [OK] key.
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing (MP 501/601
Only)
1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press [Copy Window].
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.)
for the test print.
3. Press [Start] to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number (MP 501/601 Only)

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number
that you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you
want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the
below default or the current settings.
 Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
 Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
 Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out
of range.)
 Press [Yes] when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press [Copy Window] to open the copy window and
select the settings for the test print. Press [Start], and then press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press [Exit] two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the service representative cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that
work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in as the machine
administrator, and then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF:
MP 501/601: User Tools -> Machine Features -> System Settings -> Administrator Tools ->
Service Mode Lock -> OFF
SP 5300/5310: Security Options -> Service Mode Lock -> Off
 This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
 The service representative can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is
not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169-001 to "1" if you must use the printer bit
switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
 Change SP5-169-001 from "1" to "0".
 Turn the main power off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing
the machine.
 The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.

3.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Operation Panel Screen

The maximum number of characters which can show on the operation panel screen is limited. For
this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The following
are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Item Description
SP Mode Tables
Thin Paper: 60-63 g/m 2, 16lb.
Plain Paper 1: 64-74 g/m 2, 17-20lb.
Plain Paper 2: 75-90 g/m 2, 20-24lb.
Paper Weight Middle Thick: 91-105 g/m 2, 24-28lb.
Thick Paper 1: 106-135 g/m 2, 28-36lb.
Thick Paper 2: 136-170 g/m 2, 36-63lb.
Thick Paper 3: 171-220 g/m 2, 63-80lb.
N: Normal paper
Paper Type MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
P: Paper tray
Paper Feed Station
B: By-pass table
S: Simplex
Print Mode
D: Duplex
Notes on the LCD

Since the MP 501/601 (touch panel model) and SP 5300/5310 (4-line panel model) have different
types of operation panel, characters are displayed differently. In this manual, characters are
shown as they appear on the MP 501/601 (touch panel model).

Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
 The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
 If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the
SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers.
However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the
numbers.
 An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is
stored in the NVRAM and EEPROM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the
default value. "ENG" and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
 ENG: EEPROM on the BiCU
 CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
 A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main power
must be turned OFF and ON to effect the setting change.
 FA: Factory setting
Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting
sheets enclosed.

Main SP Tables-1
3.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1
3.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
1001 [Reistration Correct]
1-001-001 Main ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-001-002 Option Tray 1 ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
SP Mode Tables
1-001-006 By-Pass Tray ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-001-007 Duplex ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1002 [Reistration Correct]
1-002-001 Main ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-002-006 By-Pass Tray ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1-002-007 Duplex ENG* [-9.9 to 9.9 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
1885 [Tray1 narrow width paper mode]
1-885-002 ON/OFF ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Main SP Tables-1
1890 [Archive mode]
1-890-001 ON/OFF ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1891 [Scattering Control]
1-891-001 Main ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1-891-002 Option Tray 1 ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1-891-006 By-Pass Tray ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1901 [Fuser Type Setting]
1-901-001 - ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1998 [Reserve SP]
1-998-001 reserve01 ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Main SP Tables-1
SP Mode Tables

Main SP Tables-2
3.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)
2102 [Magnification Adjust]
2-102-001 Main Mag. ENG* [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1% / step]
2103 [Erase Margin Adjust]
2-103-001 Left Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2-103-002 Right Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2-103-003 Lead Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2-103-004 Trail Edge Width ENG* [0 to 9.9 / 4 / 0.1 mm / step]
2107 [Image Parameter]
2-107-001 Image Gamma Flag ENG* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
2107 [Vsync Timing]
2-107-130 Normal ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
2-107-131 Thick ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
2109 [Test Pattern]
2-109-003 Pattern Selection ENG [0 to 24 / 0 / 1 / step]
2-109-006 Density ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-10 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-3
3.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
3900 [Drum Refresh]
3-900-001 On ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
3-900-002 Off ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
3901 [Drum Refresh]
(UP)  MP 501/601: [User Tools] -> [Machine Features] -> [Maintenance] ->
[Drum Refresh]
 SP 5300/5310: [Menu] -> [Maintenance] -> [Quality Maintenance] ->
[Drum Refresh]
3-901-001 - ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
3902 [Auto Drum Refresh]

[Auto Drum Refresh]
[Auto Drum Refresh]
3-902-001 - ENG [0 to 3 / 2 / 1 / step]
3903 [Altitude Adjust]

[Altitude Adjustment]
[Altitude Adjustment]
3-903-001 - ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-11 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-3
3904 [MainCharger Output]

[Charger Output]
[Charger Output]
3-904-001 - ENG* [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-12 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-4
3.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)
4011
(MP
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]
501/601
only)
SP Mode Tables
4-011-001 - ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4012
(MP
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale]
501/601
only)
4-012-001 Book: Leading Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-012-002 Book: Trailing Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-012-003 Book: Left ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-012-004 Book: Right ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4013
(MP
[Scanner Free run]
501/601
only)
4-013-002 Book mode :Lamp [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

ENG
On
4020
(MP
[DF Dust Check]
501/601
only)
4-020-001 Dust Detect:On/Off ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-13 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-4
4-020-002 Dust Detect:Lvl ENG [0 to 8 / 4 / 1 / step]
4-020-003 Dust Reject:Lvl ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 / step]
4108
(MP
[Sub Scan Speed.Adjustment]
501/601
only)
4-108-001 - ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
4110
(MP
[L-Edge Timing Adjustment]
501/601
only)
4-110-001 - ENG [-45 to 45 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]
4400
(MP
[Scanner Erase Margin]
501/601
only)
4-400-001 Book: Leading Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-002 Book: Trailing Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-003 Book: Left ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-004 Book: Right ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-005 ADF:Trailing Edge ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-007 ADF:Left ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4-400-008 ADF:Right ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
4417 [IPU Test Pattern]
4-417-001 Test Pattern ENG [0 to 8 / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-14 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-4
4609
(MP
[Gray Balance Set]
501/601
only)
4-609-001 R: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-609-002 R: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4610
SP Mode Tables
(MP
[Gray Balance Set]
501/601
only)
4-610-001 G: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-610-002 G: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-610-003 BW: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-610-004 BW: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4611
(MP
[Gray Balance Set]
501/601
only)
4-611-001 B: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4-611-002 B: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 / 1 digit / step]
4646
(MP
[Scan Adjust Error]
501/601
only)
4-646-001 White level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
4-646-002 Black level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-15 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-4
4647
(MP
[Scanner Hard Error]
501/601
only)
4-647-001 Power-ON ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]
4688
(MP
[ADF Adjustment Density]
501/601
only)
4-688-001 - ENG* [50 to 150 / 103 / 1 % / step]
4699
(MP
[SBU Test Pattern Change]
501/601
only)
4-699-001 - ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
4903
(MP
[Filter Setting]
501/601
only)
4-903-001 Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 / step]
4-903-002 Ind Dot Erase: ENG* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 / step]

Generation Copy
4905
(MP
[Select Gradation Level]
501/601
only)
4-905-001 - ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-16 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-4
4938
(MP
[ACS:Edge Mask]
501/601
only)
4-938-005 Scan:Sub LEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
4-938-006 Scan:Sub TEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
4-938-007 Scan:Main LEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
4-938-008 Scan:Main TEdge ENG* [0 to 31 / 15 / 1 / step]
4939
(MP
[ACS:Color Range]
501/601
only)
4-939-001 - ENG* [-2 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
4954
(MP
[Restore Test Chart]
501/601
only)
4-954-005 Chromaticity Rank ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-17 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-4
4994
(MP
[Adj Txt/Photo Recog Level]
501/601
only)
4-994-001 High Compression ENG* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 / step]

PDF
4996
(MP
[White Paper Detection Level]
501/601
only)
4-996-001 - ENG [0 to 6 / 3 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-18 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-5 (Engine)
3.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 (ENGINE)
3.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
5186 [RK4: Setting]
5-186-001 - ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5801 [Memory Clear]
5-801-002 Engine ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5802 [All Data Initialize]
5-802-001 Result ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5803 [INPUT Check]
5-803-001 Exit Full Sensor ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-803-016 Key Card Set ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-803-017 Key Counter Set ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-803-018 IPU Version ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5804 [OUTPUT Check]
5-804-001 CTLFAN Motor ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-101 FAN:LSU/DLP/CENTER/REAR ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-102 FAN:LVU ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-103 Toner Motor ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-804-202 Scanner Lamp ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5805 [Drum Heater]
SM Appendix 3-19 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-805-002 - ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5810 [SC Reset]
5-810-001 Fusing SC Reset ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [MachineSerial]
5-811-002 Display ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [MachineSerial Set]
5-811-004 IPU ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [Machine Serial Update Date]
5-811-021 Latest ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-022 Previous ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-023 Previous ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5811 [Machine Serial Update Date]
5-811-024 Latest(IPU) ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-025 Previous(IPU) ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-811-026 Previous(IPU) ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5894 [ExternalCountSet]
5-894-001 SW Charge Mode ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-20 SM Appendix

5900 [Engine Log Upload]
5-900-001 Pattern ENG* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-900-002 Trigger ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]
5901 [All Data Initialize]
5-901-005 China ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-006 EU(230V) ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-901-007 NA(120V) ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-008 Asia ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-901-009 Oceania ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5930 [Meter Charge]
5-930-001 Setting ENG* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5931 [Life Alert Disp.]
5-931-001 Mentenance Kit ENG* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-21 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-5 (Controller)
3.7 MAIN SP TABLES-5 (CONTROLLER)
3.7.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
5001
(SP
[All Indicators On]
5300/5310
only)
5-001-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]
5009
(MP
[Add display language]
501/601
only)
5-009-201 1-8 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-009-202 9-16
5-009-203 17-24
5-009-204 25-32
5-009-205 33-40 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-009-206 41-48
5-009-207 49-56
5024 [mm/inch Display selection]
5-024-001 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5045
(MP
[Accounting Counter]
501/601
only)
5-045-001 Counter Method CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-22 SM Appendix

5051
(MP
[TonerRefillDetectionDisplay]
501/601
only)
5-051-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5055 [Display IP address]
SP Mode Tables
5-055-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5071
(MP
[Set Bypass Paper Size Display]
501/601
only)
5-071-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5074
(MP
[Home Key Customization]
501/601
only)
5-074-002 Login Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-050 Show Home Edit CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

Menu
5-074-091 Function Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-092 Product ID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-074-093 Application Screen CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

ID
SM Appendix 3-23 D255/D256/M281/M282

5076
(MP
[Copy:LT/LG Mixed Sizes Setting]
501/601
only)
5-076-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5081
(MP
[ServiceSP Entry Code Setting]
501/601
only)
5-081-001 - CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5083 [LED Light Switch Setting]
5-083-001 Toner Near End CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-083-002 Waste Toner Near CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

End
5113
(MP
[Optional Counter Type]
501/601
only)
5-113-001 Default Optional CTL* [0 to 12 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter Type
5-113-002 External Optional CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter Type
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-24 SM Appendix

5114
(MP
[Optional Counter I/F]
501/601
only)
5-114-001 MF Key Card CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Extension
SP Mode Tables
5118
(MP
[Disable Copying]
501/601
only)
5-118-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5120 [Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal] (MP 501/601 only)
5-120-001 0:Yes 1:StandBy CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

2:No
5121
(MP
[Counter Up Timing]
501/601
only)
5-121-001 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5127
(MP
[APS OFF Mode]
501/601
only)
5-127-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5150 [Length Setting]
5-150-001 Bypass(0:OFF CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

1:Long)
SM Appendix 3-25 D255/D256/M281/M282

5162
(MP
[App. Switch Method]
501/601
only)
5-162-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5167
(MP
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
501/601
only)
5-167-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5169 [CE Login]
5-169-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5188
(MP
[Copy Nv Version]
501/601
only)
5-188-001 - CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5191 [Mode Set]
5-191-001 Power Str Set CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5195 [Limitless SW]
5-195-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
5212
(MP
[Page Numbering]
501/601
only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-26 SM Appendix

5-212-003 Duplex Printout CTL* [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 mm / step]

Left/Right Position
of Left/Right Facing

Top/Bottom Position
of Left/Right Facing

Left/Right Position
SP Mode Tables
of Top/Bottom
Facing

Top/Bottom Position
of Top/Bottom
Facing
5227
(MP
[Page Numbering]
501/601
only)
5-227-201 Allow Page No. CTL* [2 to 9 / 9 / 1 / step]

Entry
5-227-202 Zero Surplus Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5302 [Set Time]
5-302-002 Time Difference CTL* [-1440 to 1440 / 540 / 1 / step]
5305 [Auto Off Set]
5-305-101 Auto Off Limit Set CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5307 [Daylight Saving Time]
5-307-001 Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-307-003 Rule Set(Start) CTL* [0x00 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-27 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-307-004 Rule Set(End) CTL* [0x00 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5401 [Access Control]
5-401-103 Default Document CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

ACL (MP 501/601 only)
5-401-104 Authentication Time CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec / step]
5-401-162 Extend Certification CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 / step]

Detail
5-401-200 SDK1 UniqueID CTL* [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-401-201 SDK1 Certification CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]

Method

Method

Method
5-401-230 SDK Certification CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 / step]

Device
5-401-240 Detail Option CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-101 SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-102 SDKJ2 Limit Setting CTL*
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-28 SM Appendix

SP Mode Tables
5-402-116 SDKJ16 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-29 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-402-141 SDKJ1 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-402-142 SDKJ2 ProductID CTL*
5-402-149 SDKJ9 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-30 SM Appendix

SP Mode Tables
5404 [User Code Count Clear]
5-404-001 User Code Count CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Clear
5-404-101 User Code Count CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Clear Permit Setting
5411 [LDAP-Certification]
5-411-004 Simplified CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Authentication
5-411-005 Password Null Not CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Permit
5412 [Krb-Certification]
5-412-100 Encrypt Mode CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0x1F / 1 / step]
5413 [Lockout Setting]
5-413-001 Lockout On/Off CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-413-002 Lockout Threshold CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 / step]
5-413-003 Cancel On/Off CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-413-004 Cancel Time CTL* [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min / step]
SM Appendix 3-31 D255/D256/M281/M282

5414 [Access Mitigation]
5-414-001 Mitigation On/Off CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-414-002 Mitigation Time CTL* [0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min / step]
5415 [Password Attack]
5-415-001 Permissible Number CTL* [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 / step]
5-415-002 Detect Time CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 / step]
5416 [Access Information]
5-416-001 Access User Max CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 / step]

Num
5-416-002 Access Password CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 / step]

Max Num
5-416-003 Monitor Interval CTL* [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 / step]
5417 [Access Attack]
5-417-001 Access Permissible CTL* [0 to 500 / 100 / 1 / step]

Number
5-417-002 Attack DetectTime CTL* [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec / step]
5-417-003 Productivity Fall CTL* [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec / step]

Waite
5-417-004 Attack Max Num CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 / step]
5420 [User Authentication]
5-420-001 Copy CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-011 DocumentServer CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-32 SM Appendix

5-420-021 Fax CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-031 Scanner CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-420-041 Printer CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-051 SDK1 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-061 SDK2 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-420-071 SDK3 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-420-081 Browser CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5430
(MP
[Auth Dialog Message Change]
501/601
only)
5-430-001 Message Change CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

On/Off
5-430-002 Message Text CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Download
5-430-003 Message Text ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5431
(MP
[External Auth User Preset]
501/601
only)
5-431-010 Tag CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-011 Entry CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-012 Group CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-020 Mail CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-030 Fax CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-33 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-431-031 FaxSub CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-032 Folder CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-033 ProtectCode CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-034 SmtpAuth CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-035 LdapAuth CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-036 Smb Ftp Fldr Auth CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-037 AcntAcl CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-038 DocumentAcl CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-431-040 CertCrypt CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-431-050 UserLimitCount CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5481 [Authentication Error Code]
5-481-001 System Log Disp CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-481-002 Panel Disp CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5490
(MP
[MF KeyCard]
501/601
only)
5-490-001 Job Permit Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5491
(MP
[Optional Counter]
501/601
only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-34 SM Appendix

5501 [PM Alarm]
5-501-001 PM Alarm Level CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-501-002 Original Count CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Alarm (MP 501/601 only)
5504 [Jam Alarm]
SP Mode Tables
5-504-001 Level Setting CTL* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-504-002 Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 10 / 1 / step]
5505 [Error Alarm]
5-505-001 Level Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 19 / 1 / step]
5-505-002 Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 5 / 1 / step]
5507 [Supply/CC Alarm]
5-507-001 Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-507-003 Toner Supply Alarm CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-507-006 WasteTonerBottle CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Supply Alarm
5-507-080 Toner Call Timing CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-507-081 Toner Call CTL* [10 to 90 / 10 / 10 % / step]

Threshold
5-507-128 Interval: Others CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-133 Interval: A4 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-134 Interval: A5 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-142 Interval: B5 CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-164 Interval: LG CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5-507-166 Interval: LT CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-35 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-507-172 Interval: HLT CTL* [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 / step]
5508
(MP
[CC Call]
501/601
only)
5-508-001 Jam Remains CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-508-002 Continuous Jams CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-508-003 Continuous Door CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Open
5-508-011 Jam Detection: Time CTL* [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 / step]

Length
5-508-012 Jam Detection: CTL* [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 / step]

Continuous Count
5-508-013 Door Open: Time CTL* [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 / step]

Length
5515 [SC/Alarm Setting]
5-515-001 SC Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-515-002 Service Parts Near CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

End Call
5-515-003 Service Parts End CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Call
5-515-004 User Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-515-006 Communication Test CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Call
5-515-007 Machine Information CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Notice
5-515-008 Alarm Notice CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-36 SM Appendix

5-515-009 Non Genuine CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Tonner Ararm
5-515-010 Supply Automatic CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Ordering Call
5-515-011 Supply CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Management Report
Call
5-515-012 Jam/Door Open Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 5 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-515-050 Timeout:Manual Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 10 / 1 min / step]
5-515-051 Timeout:Other Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 10 / 1 min / step]
5517 [Get Machine Information]
5-517-031 Get SMC Info: Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 min / step]

Interval
5728 [Network Setting]
5-728-001 NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 49101 / 1 / step]
5-728-002 NAT UI Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 / 55101 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-37 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-728-019 NAT Machine CTL* [1 to 65535 / 49110 / 1 / step]

Port10
5730
(MP
[Extended Function Setting]
501/601
only)
5-730-001 JavaTM Platform CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

setting
5-730-010 Expiration Prior CTL* [0 to 999 / 20 / 1 days / step]

Alarm Set
5731 [Counter Effect]
5-731-001 Change Mk1 CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Cnt(Paper->Combine)
5734
(MP
[PDF Setting]
501/601
only)
5-734-001 PDF/A Fixed CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-38 SM Appendix

5741
(MP
[Node Authentication Timuout]
501/601
only)
5-741-001 - CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 sec / step]
5745 [DeemedPowerConsumption]
5-745-211 Controller Standby CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-745-212 STR CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-213 Main Power Off CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-214 Scanning and CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]

Printing
5-745-215 Printing CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-216 Scanning CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-217 Engine Standby CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-218 Low Power CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]

Consumption
5-745-219 Silent condition CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-745-220 Heater Off CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5748
(MP
[OpePanel Setting]
501/601
only)
5-748-101 Op Type Action CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Setting
5-748-201 Cheetah Panel CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Connect Setting
SM Appendix 3-39 D255/D256/M281/M282

5749 [Import/Export]
5-749-001 Export CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-749-101 Import CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5751
(MP
[Key Event Encryption Setting]
501/601
only)
5-751-001 Password CTL* [0 to 255/ 0 / 1 / step]
5752
(MP
[Copy:WebAPI Setting]
501/601
only)
5-752-001 Copy:FlairAPI CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Setting
5755
(MP
[Display Setting]
501/601
only)
5-755-001 Disp Administrator CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Password Change
Scrn
5-755-002 Hide Administrator CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Password Change
Scrn
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-40 SM Appendix

Rev. 01/20/2017 Main SP Tables-5 (Controller)
5758
(MP
[RemoteUI Setting]
501/601
only)
5-758-001 Authentication CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5761
SP Mode Tables
(MP
[SmartOperationPanel Setting]
501/601
only)
5-761-001 Restore the default CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Home screen
5801 [Memory Clear]
5-801-001 All Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-003 SCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-004 IMH Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-005 MCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-006 Copier application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-007 Fax Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-008 Printer Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-009 Scanner Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-010 Web Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-011 NCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-012 R-FAX CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-41 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-5 (Controller) Rev. 01/20/2017
5-801-014 Clear DCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-015 Clear UCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-016 MIRS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-017 CCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-018 SRM Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-019 LCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-020 Web Uapli CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-021 ECS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-023 AICS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-801-025 websys CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-026 PLN CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-027 SAS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-801-028 Rest WebService CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-42 SM Appendix

5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
5-812-001 Service CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-812-002 Facsimile CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-812-003 Supply CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-812-004 Operation CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
SP Mode Tables
(MP 501/601 only)
5-812-101 Disp Inquiry CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5816 [NRS Function]
5-816-001 I/F Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 / step]
5-816-002 CE Call CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-003 Function Flag CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-007 SSL Disable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-008 RCG Connect CTL* [1 to 90 / 30 / 1 sec / step]

Timeout
5-816-009 RCG Write Timeout CTL* [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec / step]
5-816-010 RCG Read Timeout CTL* [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec / step]
5-816-011 Port 80 Enable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5816 [Remote Service]
5-816-013 RFU Timing CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-816-014 RCG Error Cause CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-021 RCG-C Registed CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-023 Connect Type(N/M) CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-061 Cert Expire Timing CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
SM Appendix 3-43 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-816-062 Use Proxy CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-063 Proxy Host CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-064 Proxy PortNumber CTL* [0 to 0xffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-065 Proxy User Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-066 Proxy Password CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-067 CERT:Up State CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-068 CERT:Error CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-069 CERT:Up ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-083 Firm Up Status CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-085 Firm Up User CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Check
5-816-086 Firmware Size CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-816-087 CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-088 CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-089 CERT:ID2Code CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-090 CERT:Subject CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-091 CERT:Serial No. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-092 CERT:Issuer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-093 CERT:Valid Start CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-094 CERT:Valid End CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-102 CERT:Encrypt CTL* [1 to 2 / 1 / 1 / step]

Level
5-816-103 Client CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

Communication
Method
5-816-104 Client CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Communication
Limit
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-44 SM Appendix

5-816-115 Network CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Information Waiting
timer
5-816-200 Manual Polling CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-201 Regist Status CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-202 Letter Number CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-816-203 Confirm Execute CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-816-204 Confirm Result CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-205 Confirm Place CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-206 Register Execute CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-207 Register Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-208 Error Code CTL [-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / 0

/ step]
5-816-209 Instl Clear CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-240 CommErrorTime CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-241 CommErrorCode 1 CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-816-244 CommErrorState 1 CTL* [0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 / 1 / step]
5-816-247 SSL Error Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-248 Other Err Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-816-250 CommLog Print CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
SM Appendix 3-45 D255/D256/M281/M282

5821 [Remote Service RCG Setting]
5-821-002 RCG IPv4 Address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 / step]
5-821-003 RCG Port CTL* [0 to 65535 / 443 / 1 / step]
5-821-004 RCG IPv4 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Path
5-821-005 RCG IPv6 Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-821-006 RCG IPv6 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Path
5-821-007 RCG Host Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-821-008 RCG Host URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Path
5824 [NV-RAM Data Upload]
5-824-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5825 [NV-RAM Data Download]
5-825-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5828 [Network Setting]
5-828-050 1284 Compatiblity CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

(Centro)
5-828-052 ECP (Centro) CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-065 Job Spooling CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-066 Job Spooling Clear: CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Start Time
5-828-069 Job Spooling CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x7f / 0 / step]

(Protocol)
5-828-087 Protocol usage CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-46 SM Appendix

5-828-090 TELNET(0:OFF CTL* [0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1 / step]

1:ON)
5-828-091 Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-145 Active IPv6 Link CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Local Address
5-828-147 Active IPv6 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Stateless Address 1
SP Mode Tables
Stateless Address 2

Stateless Address 3

Stateless Address 4

Stateless Address 5
5-828-156 IPv6 Manual CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Address
5-828-158 IPv6 Gateway CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Address
5-828-161 IPv6 Stateless Auto CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Setting
5-828-219 IPsec Aggressive CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Mode Setting
5-828-236 Web Item visible CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0xffff / 1 / step]
5-828-237 Web shopping link CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

visible
5-828-238 Web Supplies Link CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

visible
5-828-239 Web Link1 Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-240 Web Link1 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
SM Appendix 3-47 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-828-241 Web Link1 visible CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-242 Web Link2 Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-243 Web Link2 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-828-244 Web Link2 visible CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-249 DHCPv6 DUID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5832 [HDD]
5-832-001 HDD Formatting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(ALL)

(IMH) (MP 501/601 only)

(Thumbnail/OCR) (MP 501/601 only)

(Job Log) (MP 501/601 only)

(Printer Fonts) (MP 501/601 only)

(User Info) (MP 501/601 only)
5-832-007 Mail RX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-832-008 Mail TX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)

(Data for a Design) (MP 501/601 only)

(Log) (MP 501/601 only)

(Ridoc I/F) (MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-48 SM Appendix


(Thumbnail) (MP 501/601 only)
5836
(MP
[Capture Setting]
501/601
only)
5-836-001 Capture Function CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
(0:Off 1:On)
5-836-011 Capture Setting: CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Copy

Doc. Svr.

Fax RX Printer

Fax TX

Printer

Scanner

SDK
5-836-061 Captured File CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Resend (0:Off 1:On)
5-836-072 Reduction for Copy CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

B&W Text
5-836-073 Reduction for Copy CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

B&W Other
5-836-075 Reduction for CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

Printer B&W
SM Appendix 3-49 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-836-082 Format for Copy CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

B&W Text
5-836-083 Format for Copy CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

B&W Other
5-836-085 Format for Printer CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

B&W
5-836-091 Default for JPEG CTL* [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 / step]
5-836-101 Primary srv IP CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0 / step]

address
5-836-102 Primary srv scheme CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-836-103 Primary srv port CTL* CTL*

number
5-836-104 Primary srv URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

path
5-836-111 Secondary srv IP CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / 0 / step]

address
5-836-112 Secondary srv CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

scheme
5-836-113 Secondary srv port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 / step]

number
5-836-114 Secondary srv URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

path
5-836-120 Default Reso Rate CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Switch
5-836-122 Reso: Copy(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-124 Reso: Print(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-125 Reso: Fax(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 / step]
5-836-126 Reso: Fax(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-127 Reso: Scan(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-50 SM Appendix

5-836-128 Reso: Scan(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-129 Reso: SDK(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 / step]
5-836-130 Reso: SDK(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-836-141 All Addr Info Switch CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-836-142 Stand-by Doc Max CTL* [10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1 / step]

Number
5-836-143 ClearLightPDF CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
Switch
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
5-840-006 Channel MAX CTL* [1 to 14 / 14 / 1 / step]
5-840-007 Channel MIN CTL* [1 to 14 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-840-011 WEP Key Select CTL* [0x00 to 0x11 / 0x00 / 1 / step]
5-840-045 WPA Debug Lvl CTL* [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 / step]
5-840-046 11w CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-840-047 PSK Set Type CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5841
(MP
[Supply Name Setting]
501/601
only)
5-841-001 Toner Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Setting:Black
5842 [GWWS Analysis]
5-842-001 Setting 1 CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
5-842-002 Setting 2 CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-51 D255/D256/M281/M282

5844 [USB]
5-844-001 Transfer Rate CTL* [1 to 4 / 4 / 0 / step]
5-844-002 Vendor ID CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0x05ca / 0 / step]
5-844-003 Product ID CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff / 0x0403 / 0 / step]
5-844-004 Device Release CTL* [0 to 9999 / 100 / 1 / step]

Number
5-844-005 Fixed USB Port CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-844-006 PnP Model Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-844-007 PnP Serial Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-844-008 Mac Supply Level CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-844-100 Notify Unsupport CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5845 [Delivery Server Setting]
5-845-001 FTP Port No. CTL* [1 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-002 IP Address (Primary) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-003 Retry Interval CTL* [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 sec / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-845-004 No. of Retries CTL* [0 to 99 / 3 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-845-006 Delivery Error Display CTL* [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 / 1 sec / step]

Time (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-008 IP Address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00 / / step]

(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-009 Delivery Server Model CTL* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-52 SM Appendix

5-845-010 Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-845-011 Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(Ext) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-013 Server CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Scheme(Primary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-014 Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 / step]

Number(Primary) (MP 501/601 only)
SP Mode Tables
5-845-015 Server URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
Path(Primary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-016 Server CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Scheme(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-017 Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 / step]

Number(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-018 Server URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Path(Secondary) (MP 501/601 only)
5-845-022 Rapid Sending Control CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5846 [UCS Setting]
5-846-001 Machine ID (for Delivery CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Server) (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-002 Machine ID Clear (for CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]

Delivery Server) (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-003 Maximum Entries CTL* [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-006 Delivery Server Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Timer (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-007 Delivery Server Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Times (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-008 Delivery Server CTL* [2000 to 20000 / 2000 / 1 / step]

Maximum Entries (MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-53 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-846-010 LDAP Search Timeout CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 / step]
5-846-020 WSD Maximum Entries CTL* [50 to 250 / 250 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-021 Folder Auth Change CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-040 Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Migration(USB->HDD) (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-041 Fill Addr Acl Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-043 Addr Book Media CTL* [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-846-047 Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-048 Initialize Delivery Addr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Book (MP 501/601 only)
5-846-049 Initialize LDAP Addr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Book
5-846-050 Initialize All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-051 Backup All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-052 Restore All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-053 Clear Backup Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-846-060 Search option CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f / 1 / step]
5-846-062 Complexity option 1 CTL* [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-846-091 FTP Auth Port Setting CTL* [0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-846-094 Encryption Stat CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-54 SM Appendix

5847
(MP
[Rep Resolution Reduction]
501/601
only)
5-847-002 Rate for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

Text
5-847-003 Rate for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]

Other
SP Mode Tables
5-847-005 Rate for Printer CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 / step]
B&W
5-847-007 Rate for Printer CTL* [0 to 6 / 1 / 1 / step]

B&W 1200dpi
5-847-021 Network Quality CTL* [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 / step]

Default for JPEG
5848 [Web Service]
5-848-002 Access Ctrl: CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x02 / 0 / step]

Repository(onlyLower4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-003 Access Ctrl: Doc.Svr.Print CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]

(Lower 4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-004 Access Ctrl: udirectory (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits)
5-848-007 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
Fax(Lower 4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-009 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits)
5-848-011 Access Ctrl: CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]

Devicemanagement(Lower
4bits)
5-848-021 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
4bits) (MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-55 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-848-022 Access Ctrl: uadministration CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]

(Lower 4bits)
5-848-024 Access Ctrl: Log Service CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
(Lower 4bits)
5-848-025 Access Ctrl: Rest WebService CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
(Lower 4bits)
5-848-099 Repository: Download Image CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]

Setting (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-100 Repository: Download Image CTL* [1 to 2048 / 2048 / 0 / step]

Max. Size (MP 501/601 only)
5-848-150 Log Operation Mode CTL* [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 / step]
5848 [LogTrans]
5-848-217 Setting: Timing CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5849 [Installation Date]
5-849-001 Display CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-849-002 Switch to Print CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-849-003 Total Counter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 / step]
5851 [Bluetooth]
5-851-001 Mode CTL* [0x00 to 0x01/ 0x00 / 1 / step]
5853
(MP
[Stamp Data Download]
501/601
only)
5-853-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-56 SM Appendix

5856 [Remote ROM Update]
5-856-002 Local Port CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5858 [Save Machine Info]
5-858-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-858-002 Target(0:HDD 1:SD) CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-858-003 Make LogTrace Dir CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-101 Start Date CTL* [0 to 20371212 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-102 Days of Tracing CTL* [1 to 180 / 2 / 1 day / step]
5-858-103 Acquire Fax Address(0:OFF CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

1:ON)
5-858-111 Acquire All Info & Logs CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-121 Acquire Configuration Page CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-122 Acquire Font Page CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-123 Acquire Print Setting List CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-124 Acquire Error Log CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-131 Acquire Fax Info CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-141 Acquire All Debug Logs CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-858-142 Acquire Only Controller CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Debug Logs
5-858-143 Acquire Only Engine Debug CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Logs
5-858-144 Acquire Only Opepanel CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Debug Logs
5-858-145 Acquire Only FCU Debug CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Logs
SM Appendix 3-57 D255/D256/M281/M282

5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4]
5-860-002 SMTP Srvr Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-003 SMTP CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Authentication (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-006 SMTP Auth. CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

Encryption (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-007 POP before SMTP CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-008 POPtoSMTP CTL* [0 to 10000 / 300 / 1ms / step]

Waiting Time (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-009 Mail Receive CTL* [1 to 3 / 1 / 1 / step]

Protocol (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-013 POP3/IMAP4 Auth. CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

Encryption (SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-014 POP3 Srvr Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 110 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-015 IMAP4 Srvr Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 143 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-016 SMTP Rx Port No CTL* [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-017 Mail Rx Interval CTL* [2 to 1440 / 3 / 1min / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-019 Mail Keep Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-860-020 Partial Mail Receive CTL* [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour / step]

Timeout
5-860-021 MDN Response CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

RFC2298
Compliance
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-58 SM Appendix

5-860-022 SMTP Auth. From CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Field Replacement
5-860-025 SMTP Auth. Direct CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0x0 / 8 / step]

Setting
5-860-026 S/MIME:MIME CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]

Header Setting
5-860-028 S/MIME: CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Authentication (MP 501/601 only)
SP Mode Tables
Check
5866 [E-Mail Report]
5-866-001 Report Validity CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-866-005 Add Date Field CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(SP 5300/5310 only)
5-866-110 CounterE-Mail:Validity CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-111 CounterE-Mail:Destination CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Registration (MP 501/601 only)
5-866-112 CounterE-Mail:Send Test CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-113 CounterE-Mail:Next Send Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-866-114 CounterE-Mail:Send Date CTL* [0 to 31 / 0 / 1 / step]

5-866-115 CounterE-Mail:Send Time CTL* [0 to 2359 / 0 / 1 / step]

5-866-121 CounterE-Mail:Destination1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)

(MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-59 D255/D256/M281/M282


(MP 501/601 only)
5869
(SP
[RAM Disk Setting]
5300/5310
only)
5-869-001 Mail Function CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5870 [Common KeyInfo Writing]
5-870-001 Writing CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-870-003 Initialize CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-870-004 Writing: 2048bit CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5873 [SDCardAppliMove]
5-873-001 MoveExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-873-002 UndoExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1 / step]
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
5-875-001 Reboot Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-875-002 Reboot Type CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5878 [Option Setup]
5-878-001 Data Overwrite CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Security
5-878-002 HDD Encryption CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-878-004 OCR Dictionary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-60 SM Appendix

5881
(MP
[Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
501/601
only)
5-881-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5885
(MP
[Set WIM Function]
SP Mode Tables
501/601
only)
5-885-020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
5-885-050 DocSvr Format CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-885-051 DocSvr Trans CTL* [5 to 20 / 10 / 1 / step]
5-885-100 Set Signature CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-885-101 Set Encrypsion CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-885-200 Detect Mem Leak CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 0 / step]
5886
(MP
[Farm Update Setting]
501/601
only)
5-886-100 Skip Version Check CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-886-101 Skip LR Check CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-886-111 Auto Update Setting CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-886-112 Auto Update CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Prohibit Term
Setting
5-886-113 Auto Update CTL* [0 to 23 / 9 / 1 hour / step]

Prohibit Start hour
5-886-114 Auto Update CTL* [0 to 23 / 17 / 1 hour / step]

Prohibit End hour
SM Appendix 3-61 D255/D256/M281/M282

5-886-115 SFU Auto Download CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]

Setting
5-886-116 Auto Update Next CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

Date
5-886-117 Auto Update Retry CTL* [1 to 24 / 1 / 1 hour / step]

Interval Hour
5-886-119 Auto Update CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 0 / step]

@Remote Using
Setting
5-886-120 Auto Update CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

Prohibit Day of
Week Setting
5-886-150 Cheetah Firm CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

Exclusion
5-886-201 Restore Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-886-202 Save Old Version CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

List
5887 [SD Get Counter]
5-887-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
5-888-001 - CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5893 [SDK Application Counter]
5-893-001 SDK-1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-002 SDK-2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-003 SDK-3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-004 SDK-4 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-005 SDK-5 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-62 SM Appendix

5-893-006 SDK-6 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-007 SDK-7 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-008 SDK-8 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-009 SDK-9 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-010 SDK-10 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-893-011 SDK-11 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
SP Mode Tables
5-893-012 SDK-12 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
5-907-001 - CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
5913
(MP
[Switchover Permission Time]
501/601
only)
5-913-002 Print Application CTL* [0 to 30 / 3 / 1 / step]

Timer
5967
(MP
[Copy Server : Set Function]
501/601
only)
5-967-001 (0:ON 1:OFF) CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5973
(MP
[User Stamp Registration]
501/601
only)
5-973-101 Frame deletion CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 / step]

setting
SM Appendix 3-63 D255/D256/M281/M282

5985
(MP
[Device Setting]
501/601
only)
5-985-001 On Board NIC CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-985-002 On Board USB CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5990 [SP Print Mode]
5-990-001 All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-002 SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-003 User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-004 Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-005 Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-006 Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-007 NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-008 Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-022 Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-023 Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-990-024 SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-025 SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-026 Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-990-027 SmartOperationPanel CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

SP (MP 501/601 only)

UP (MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-64 SM Appendix

5990
(MP
[SMC Print]
501/601
only)
5-990-021 Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5992 [SP Text Mode]
SP Mode Tables
5-992-001 All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-002 SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-003 User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-004 Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-005 Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-006 Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-007 NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-008 Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-021 Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-022 Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-023 Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

(MP 501/601 only)
5-992-024 SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-025 SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
5-992-026 Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 0 / step]

SP (MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-65 D255/D256/M281/M282


UP (MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-66 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-6 (MP 501/601 Only)
3.8 MAIN SP TABLES-6 (MP 501/601 ONLY)
3.8.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]

Front
SP Mode Tables
6-006-002 Side-to-Side Regist: ENG* [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm / step]
Rear
6026 [ADF Timing Adjustment]
6-026-001 Leading Edge Start ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Timing: Front
6-026-002 Leading Edge Start ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Timing: Rear
6-026-003 Leading Edge End ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Timing: Front
6-026-004 Leading Edge End ENG [-32 to 32 / 0 / 1 pulse / step]

Timing: Rear
6027 [ADF Adjustment Scan Speed]
6-027-001 Simplex Mode ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
6-027-002 Duplex Mode: Front ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
6-027-003 Duplex Mode: Rear ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 % / step]
SM Appendix 3-67 D255/D256/M281/M282

3.9 MAIN SP TABLES-7 (ENGINE)
3.9.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
7621 [PM Counter Disp:Pages]
7-621-002 PM Parts ENG* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page / step]
7801 [ROM Info Display]
7-801-002 P/#: Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-009 P/#: PFU1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-015 P/#: IPU ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-019 P/#: PFU2 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-040 P/#: PFU3 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-041 P/#: PFU4 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-102 Version: Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-109 Version:PFU1 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-801-115 Version: IPU ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7804 [Reset-PM Count]
7-804-002 Engine ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
7852 [DF Glass Dust Check]
7-852-001 Dust Detection: ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-68 SM Appendix

7-852-002 Dust Detection: Clear ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 / step]

Counter
7935 [Toner Bottle Log]
7-935-001 SerialNo. ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
7979 [ENG Reset Log]
SP Mode Tables
7-979-001 Data1 ENG* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 1 / step]
7-979-002 Data2 ENG* [0x0000 to 0xFFFF / 0x0000 / 1 /

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]
SM Appendix 3-69 D255/D256/M281/M282


step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]

step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-70 SM Appendix

3.10 MAIN SP TABLES-7 (CONTROLLER)
3.10.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
7401 [Total SC]
7-401-001 SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-401-002 Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
SP Mode Tables
7403 [SC History]
7-403-001 Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-403-002 Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7404 [Software Error History]
SM Appendix 3-71 D255/D256/M281/M282

7502 [Total Paper Jam]
7-502-001 Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-502-002 Total Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7503
(MP
[Total Original Jam Counter]
501/601
only)
7-503-001 - CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7503
(MP
[Total Original Jam]
501/601
only)
Total Original
7-503-002 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Counter
7504 [Paper Jam Location]
7-504-001 At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-010 Process Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Transport Not
7-504-011 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Ready
7-504-012 Driving Detection CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-72 SM Appendix

No Duplex Feed
7-504-013 Notification from CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
CTL
7-504-014 Fusing Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-015 Printing Error Jam 1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
SP Mode Tables
Printing Error Jam

7-504-024 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
10
Printing Error Jam

7-504-025 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
11
Printing Error Jam

7-504-026 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
12
Exceed Duplex
7-504-027 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Interleaf Limit
7-504-028 Tray 1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-029 Duplex: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-030 Bypass Tray: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-504-031 Tray 1 Double-Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
SM Appendix 3-73 D255/D256/M281/M282

Duplex
7-504-036 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Double-Feed
Bypass Tray
7-504-037 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Double-Feed
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-504-038 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-504-039 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-504-040 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-504-041 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-504-042 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-504-043 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-504-044 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-504-045 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-504-046 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-504-047 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: ON
7-504-048 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: OFF

7-504-049 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Registration Sensor:
7-504-050 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-74 SM Appendix

7-504-051 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)
7-504-052 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)
7-504-053 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)
7-504-054 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass2 Feed)
SP Mode Tables
7-504-055 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass3 Feed)
7-504-056 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass4 Feed)
7-504-057 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass5 Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-058 Sensor: ON (Cass1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-063 Sensor: ON (Duplex CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
SM Appendix 3-75 D255/D256/M281/M282

Registration Exit
7-504-064 Sensor: ON (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-065 Sensor: OFF (Cass1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-070 Sensor: OFF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Registration Exit
7-504-071 Sensor: OFF (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-072 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-073 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-074 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-075 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-76 SM Appendix

Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-076 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-077 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-504-078 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MFP Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-079 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
SP Mode Tables
Exit Sensor: OFF
7-504-080 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-081 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-082 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-083 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-084 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-504-085 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MFP Feed)
Duplex Trans.
7-504-086 Sensor1: ON CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass2 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass3 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass4 Feed)
SM Appendix 3-77 D255/D256/M281/M282

Duplex Trans.
(Cass5 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
7-504-091 Sensor1: ON (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass1 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass2 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass3 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass4 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass5 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
Feed)
Duplex Trans.
7-504-098 Sensor2: OFF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-78 SM Appendix

7505
(MP
[Original Jam Detection]
501/601
only)
7-505-002 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON
SP Mode Tables
7-505-003 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF
7506 [Jam Count by Paper Size]
7-506-006 A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-044 HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-133 A4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-134 A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-142 B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-164 LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-166 LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-172 HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-506-255 Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7507 [Plotter Jam History]
SM Appendix 3-79 D255/D256/M281/M282

7508
(MP
[Original Jam History]
501/601
only)
7514 [Paper Jam Count by Location]
7-514-010 Process Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Transport Not
7-514-011 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Ready
7-514-012 Driving Detection CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-80 SM Appendix

No Duplex Feed
7-514-013 Notification from CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
CTL
7-514-014 Fusing Not Ready CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
SP Mode Tables
Printing Error Jam

7-514-024 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
10
Printing Error Jam

7-514-025 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
11
Printing Error Jam

7-514-026 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
12
Exceed Duplex
7-514-027 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Interleaf Limit
7-514-029 Duplex: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-514-030 Bypass Tray: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
SM Appendix 3-81 D255/D256/M281/M282

Duplex
7-514-036 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Double-Feed
Bypass Tray
7-514-037 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Double-Feed
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-514-038 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-514-039 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: ON
7-514-040 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-514-041 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-514-042 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed2 Sensor: OFF

7-514-043 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-514-044 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: ON
7-514-045 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-514-046 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Feed3 Sensor: OFF

7-514-047 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: ON
7-514-048 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Feed4 Sensor: OFF

7-514-049 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
7-514-050 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass2 Feed)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-82 SM Appendix

7-514-051 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass3 Feed)
7-514-052 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass4 Feed)
7-514-053 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON (Cass5 Feed)
7-514-054 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass2 Feed)
SP Mode Tables
7-514-055 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass3 Feed)
7-514-056 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass4 Feed)
7-514-057 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF (Cass5 Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-063 Sensor: ON (Duplex CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
SM Appendix 3-83 D255/D256/M281/M282

Registration Exit
7-514-064 Sensor: ON (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-065 Sensor: OFF (Cass1 CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-067 Sensor: OFF (Cass3 CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-070 Sensor: OFF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Registration Exit
7-514-071 Sensor: OFF (MFP CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-072 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-073 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-074 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-075 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-84 SM Appendix

Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-076 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-077 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: ON
7-514-078 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MFP Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-079 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass1 Feed)
SP Mode Tables
Exit Sensor: OFF
7-514-080 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass2 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-081 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass3 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-082 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass4 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-083 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Cass5 Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-084 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
Exit Sensor: OFF

7-514-085 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MFP Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass1 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass2 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass3 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass4 Feed)
SM Appendix 3-85 D255/D256/M281/M282

Duplex Trans.
(Cass5 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass1 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass2 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass3 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass4 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
(Cass5 Feed)
Duplex Trans.
Feed)
Duplex Trans.
7-514-098 Sensor2: OFF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
(Duplex Feed)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-86 SM Appendix

7515
(MP
[Original Jam Count by Detection]
501/601
only)
7-515-002 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
ON
SP Mode Tables
7-515-003 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
OFF
7516 [Paper Size Jam Count]
7-516-006 A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-044 HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-133 A4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-134 A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-142 B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-164 LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-166 LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-172 HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-516-255 Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 0 / step]
7520 [Update Log]
7-520-001 ErrorRecord1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
SM Appendix 3-87 D255/D256/M281/M282

[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-011 Auto:StartDate1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-021 Auto:EndDate1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-031 Auto:Piecemark1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-88 SM Appendix

[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-520-041 Auto:Version1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
SP Mode Tables
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
7-520-051 Auto:Result1 CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-89 D255/D256/M281/M282

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
(MP 501/601 only)
7801 [ROM No./ Firmware Version]
7-801-255 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7803 [PM Counter Display]
7-803-001 Paper CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0 / step]
7804 [PM Counter Reset]
7-804-001 Paper CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7807 [SC/Jam Counter Reset]
7-807-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7826
(MP
[MF Error Counter]
501/601
only)
7-826-001 Error Total CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-826-002 Error Staple CTL* [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 0 / step]
7827
(MP
[MF Error Couter Clear]
501/601
only)
7-827-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-90 SM Appendix

7832 [Self-Diagnose Result Display]
7-832-001 - CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7836 [Total Memory Size]
7-836-001 - CTL [0 to 0xffffffff/ 0 / 0 MB / step]
7840
SP Mode Tables
(MP
[Service SP Entry Code Chg Hist]
501/601
only)
Change
7-840-001 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
Time :Latest
7-840-002 Change Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
Initialize
7-840-101 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
Time :Latest
7-840-102 Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7901 [Assert Info.]
7-901-001 File Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-901-002 Number of Lines CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-901-003 Location CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7910 [ROM No]
7-910-001 System/Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-002 Engine CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-003 Lcdc CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-009 Bank CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-012 FCU CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-91 D255/D256/M281/M282

7-910-015 Engine(IPU) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-018 NetworkSupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-019 Bank2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-022 BIOS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-023 HDD Format Option CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-040 Bank3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-041 Bank4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-150 RPCS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-151 PS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-158 PCL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-159 PCLXL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-162 PDF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-165 PJL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-166 IPDS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-167 MediaPrint:JPEG CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-168 MediaPrint:TIFF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-169 XPS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-180 FONT CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-181 FONT1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-182 FONT2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-183 FONT3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-184 FONT4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-185 FONT5 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-200 Factory CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-92 SM Appendix

[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-201 Copy CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-202 NetworkDocBox CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-203 Fax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-204 Printer CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-205 Scanner CTL*
SP Mode Tables
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-206 RFax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-210 MIB CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-211 Websupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-212 WebUapl CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-910-213 SDK1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-214 SDK2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-215 SDK3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-910-250 Package
(MP 501/601 only)
7911 [Firmware Version]
7-911-001 System/Copy CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-002 Engine CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-003 Lcdc CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-009 Bank CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-012 FCU CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-015 Engine(IPU) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
SM Appendix 3-93 D255/D256/M281/M282

7-911-018 NetworkSupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-019 Bank2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-022 BIOS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-023 HDD Format Option CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-040 Bank3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-041 Bank4 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-150 RPCS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-151 PS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-158 PCL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-159 PCLXL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-162 PDF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-165 PJL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-166 IPDS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-167 MediaPrint:JPEG CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-168 MediaPrint:TIFF CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-169 XPS CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-180 FONT CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-181 FONT1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-182 FONT2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-183 FONT3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-184 FONT4 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-185 FONT5 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-200 Factory CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-201 Copy CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-94 SM Appendix

7-911-202 NetworkDocBox CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-203 Fax CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-204 Printer CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-205 Scanner CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-206 RFax CTL*
SP Mode Tables
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-210 MIB CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-211 Websupport CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
[0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-212 WebUapl CTL*
(MP 501/601 only)
7-911-213 SDK1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-214 SDK2 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-215 SDK3 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0 / step]
7-911-250 Package
(MP 501/601 only)
SM Appendix 3-95 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
3.11.1 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2)

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server.
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server.
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications
(C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
F: Fax application.
document server.
P: Print application.
S: Scan application.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-96 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
Prefixes What it means
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
(document server) The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
SP Mode Tables
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
SM Appendix 3-97 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,

Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-98 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows
SP Mode Tables
print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters
are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
SM Appendix 3-99 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
 All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each

*CTL
8001 application is used to do a job.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8002 C:Total Jobs *CTL
Note: The L: counter is the total number of
8003 F:Total Jobs *CTL times the other applications are used to send
a job to the document server, plus the
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL
number of times a file already on the
8005 S:Total Jobs *CTL document server is used.
8006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
 When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not
(the document server is not used).
 A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are
not counted separately).
 A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-100 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
has been completed.

 A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
 The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
 When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
 When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
 When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
 When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
SP Mode Tables
 When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
 When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored
to the document server by each application,
8012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL
to reveal how local storage is being used for
8013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL input.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
8016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
8017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
 When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
 When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
 When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the
8022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL
SM Appendix 3-101 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL document server originally.

[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL
8025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.
8026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
8027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
 When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
 When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
 When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the
L: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
 When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were

used to output documents from the document
8032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
server.
8033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
printed from within the document server
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL mode screen at the operation panel.
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
 When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
 When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-102 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
files on the document server that were later
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
accessed for transmission over the telephone
8043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail,
or as a fax image by I-Fax).
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
SP Mode Tables
separately.
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL scanned from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
 When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to
send files from the document server over the
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
telephone line or over a network (attached to
8053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
from within the document server mode screen
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
at the operation panel.
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
 If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
8061 T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
8062 C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
SM Appendix 3-103 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
8063 F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
8064 P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
8065 S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
8066 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
8067 O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application,
over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Last three digits for SP8 061 to 067
806x-001 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored

copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the
document server, the L: counter increments. (See
SP8 066 1)
806x-002 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x-003 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
806x-004 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the

machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter also
increments.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-104 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
806x-005 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the
Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
806x-006 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch

is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See
SP8 064 6.)
806x-007 Other Reserved. Not used.
806x-008 Inside-Fold Not used
SP Mode Tables
806x-009 Three-IN-Fold Not used
806x-010 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
806x-011 Four-Fold Not used
806x-012 KANNON-Fold Not used
806x-013 Perfect-Bind Not used
806x-014 Ring-Bind Not used
806x-015 3rd Vendor
8071 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in
the job, regardless of which application was used.
8072 C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
8073 F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the
8074 P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
8075 S:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
SM Appendix 3-105 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the
8076 L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages
in the job.
8077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
807x-001 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x-002 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x-003 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x-004 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x-005 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x-006 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x-007 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 More than 1001 Pages
 For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
 Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
 For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-106 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8111 T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax,
either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
8113 F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax
directly on a telephone line.
SP Mode Tables
811x-001 B/W
811x-002 Color
 These counters count jobs, not pages.

 This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents
stored on the document server.
 If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job
started.
 If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where
both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also
increments.
 The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8121 T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent, either
directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax.
8123 F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored
on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
812x-001 B/W
812x-002 Color
SM Appendix 3-107 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
 The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this
time.
 The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
8131 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used
or not.
8135 S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and
attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.
813x-001 B/W
813x-002 Color
813x-003 ACS

 If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
 If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting
to be sent, the job is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage
of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
 If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or
if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example,
if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice
(once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
8141 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
and sent to a Scan Router server.
8145 S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in

scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-108 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
814x-001 B/W
814x-002 Color
814x-003 ACS

 The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
server cannot be confirmed.
 If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
SP Mode Tables
"Color" job.
 If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting
to be delivered, the job is not counted.
 Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8151 T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
8155 S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
and sent with Scan-to-PC.
815x-001 B/W
815x-002 Color
815x-003 ACS

 If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
 Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
SM Appendix 3-109 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
transmission jobs. A job is counted from
8163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL
when it is registered for sending, not when it
is sent.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
 This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to
the destination from the PC through the copier.
8171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL
001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS
8181 T:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages
in a media by the scanner application.
8185 S:Scan to Media Jobs *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS
8191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned
by each application that uses the
8192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL
scanner to scan images.
8193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
 SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-110 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
pages.
 These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
 Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
 A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
 Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SP Mode Tables
8201 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
A3/DLT, Larger
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper scanned for fax transmission is not
counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display.
8203 F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]

A3/DLT, Larger
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax
transmission.
display.
8205 S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]

A3/DLT, Larger
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan jobs only. Large size paper scanned for fax transmission is not counted.
display.
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
SM Appendix 3-111 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen.
 Reading user stamp data is not counted.

 If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
 If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
 If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
8221 ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back
side scanning.
001 Front
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is
the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count
is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The
front side is determined by which side the user loads face up.)
002 Back
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the
same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning.
 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
 If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-112 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8231 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
001 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be

loaded in the ADF at one time.
002 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through

the ADF.
SP Mode Tables
003 Mixed Size Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation
panel.
004 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
005 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.
006 Mixed 1side/2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
 If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
 The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original's page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
 If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
 In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
8241 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
8242 C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
8243 F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
SM Appendix 3-113 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8245 S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.
8246 L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
824x-001: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x-002: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x-003: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x-004: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x-005: Map Yes Yes No No Yes
824x-006: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
824x-007: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
824x-008: Binary Yes No No Yes No
824x-009: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
824x-010: Color Yes No No Yes No
824x-011: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
 If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
8251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
features have been selected at the operation
8252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
panel for each application. Some examples of
8255 S : Scan PGS/ImgEdr *CTL these editing features are:
 Erase Border
8256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-114 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL  Erase Center

 Image Repeat
 Centering
 Positive/Negative
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
Note: The count totals the number of times
the edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have
been used is not given.
SP Mode Tables
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8261 T:Scn PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8262 C:Scn PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
Last three digits for SP8 261, 262, 265 and 266
826x-001 Color Conversion These SPs show how many times color
creation features have been selected at the
826x-002 Color Erase
operation panel.
826x-003 Background
826x-004 Other
8281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is
used for delivery functions.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
SM Appendix 3-115 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
8301 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
8302 C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
8303 F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
8305 S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
output page size [SP 8-445].
8306 L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to
compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-116 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
830x-001 A3 830x-007 LG
830x-002 A4 830x-008 LT
830x-003 A5 830x-009 HLT
830x-004 B4 830x-010 Full Bleed
830x-005 B5 830x-254 Other (Standard)
830x-006 DLT 830x-255 Other (Custom)
SP Mode Tables
8311 T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
8315 S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
Last three digits for SP8 311 and 315
831x-001 1200 dpi
831x-002 600 dpi to 1199 dpi
831x-003 400 dpi to 599 dpi
831x-004 200 dpi to 399 dpi
831x-005 199 dpi or less
 Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

 The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for
the Fax application.
SM Appendix 3-117 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8321 T:Sacn Poster *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8322 C:Sacn Poster *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8326 L:Sacn Poster *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
832x-001 2 Sheet
832x-002 4 Sheet
832x-003 9 Sheet
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of

pages printed by the customer. The
8382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL
counter for the application used for
8383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL storing the pages increments.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of
8385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL pages stored from within the
document server mode screen at the
8386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
operation panel. Pages stored with
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored is counted
for the application that stored them.
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-118 SM Appendix
Main SP Tables-8
8391 LSize PrtPGS
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A4/LT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 A3/DLT, Larger *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
003 BannaerPaper *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of
pages printed from the document
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
server. The counter for the application
8403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL used to print the pages is
incremented.
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL jobs stored from within the document
server mode screen at the operation
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
panel.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
 Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used
for duplex printing. Last pages printed
only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
pages processed for printing by the copier application.
SM Appendix 3-119 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
8423 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
pages processed for printing by the fax application.
8424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8425 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at
the operation panel.
8427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
pages processed for printing by Other applications
842x-001 Simplex> Duplex -
842x-002 Duplex> Duplex -
842x-003 Book> Duplex -
842x-004 Simplex Combine -
842x-005 Duplex Combine -
842x-006 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-120 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
842x-012 Booklet -
842x-013 Magazine -
842x-014 2in1 + Booklet -
SP Mode Tables
842x-019 2in1 + Magazine -
 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
 Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
SM Appendix 3-121 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
8431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8432 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
below with the copy application.
8434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
below with the print application.
8436 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
8437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
below with Other applications.
843x-001 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
843x-002 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
843x-003 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-122 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8442 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy
application.
8443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
application.
8444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
8445 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
scanner application.
8446 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within
the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x-001 A3
844x-002 A4
844x-003 A5
844x-004 B4
844x-005 B5
844x-006 DLT
SM Appendix 3-123 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
844x-007 LG
844x-008 LT
844x-009 HLT
844x-010 Full Bleed
844x-254 Other (Standard)
844x-255 Other (Custom)
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
8451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1 Machine
003 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
006 Tray 5 Not used
007 Tray 6 Not used
008 Tray 7 Not used
009 Tray 8 Not used
010 Tray 9 Not used
011 Tray10 Not used
012 Tray11 Not used
013 Tray12 Not used
014 Tray13 Not used
015 Tray14 Not used
016 Tray15 Not used
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-124 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
SP Mode Tables
8462 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
8463 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
8464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8466 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
846x-001 Normal
846x-002 Recycled
846x-003 Special
846x-004 Thick
846x-005 Normal (Back)
846x-006 Thick (Back)
846x-007 OHP
SM Appendix 3-125 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
846x-008 Other
8471 PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 49% or less
002 50% to 99%
003 100%
004 101% to 200%
005 201% or more
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
8491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of

pages printed in the Color Mode by
8492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-126 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL each application.
8496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
Last three digits for SP8 491 to 493, 496 and 497
849x-001 B/W
849x-002 Single Color
SP Mode Tables
849x-003 Two Color
849x-004 Full Color
849x-051 B/W(Banner)
849x-052 Single Color(Banner)
849x-053 Two Color(Banner)
849x-054 Full Color(Banner)
8501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of

pages printed in the Color Mode by
8504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
the print application.
8507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
Last three digits for SP8 501, 504 and 507
850x-001 B/W
850x-002 Mono Color
850x-003 Full Color
850x-004 Single Color
850x-005 Two Color
850x-051 B/W(Banner)
850x-052 Full Color(Banner)
SM Appendix 3-127 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
850x-053 Single Color(Banner)
850x-054 Two Color(Banner)
8511 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8514 P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
Last three digits for SP8 511 and 514
851x-001 RPCS -
851x-002 RPDL -
851x-003 PS3 -
851x-004 R98 -
851x-005 R16 -
851x-006 GL/GL2 -
851x-007 R55 -
851x-008 RTIFF -
851x-009 PDF -
851x-010 PCL5e/5c -
851x-011 PCL XL -
851x-012 IPDL-C -
851x-013 BM-Links Japan Only
851x-014 Other -
851x-015 IPDS -
851x-016 XPS -
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-128 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
 SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
8521 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
all applications.
8522 C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
the Copy application.
8523 F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
the Fax application.
Note: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
8524 P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
the Print application.
8525 S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
the Scanner application.
8526 L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
852x-001 Sort 852x-009 Three-IN-Fold
852x-002 Stack 852x-010 Three-OUT-Fold
852x-003 Staple 852x-011 Four-Fold
852x-004 Booklet 852x-012 KANNON-Fold
852x-005 Z-Fold 852x-013 Perfect-Bind
SM Appendix 3-129 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
852x-006 Punch 852x-014 Ring-Bind
852x-007 Other 852x-015 3rd Vendor
852x-008 Inside-Fold
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
8531 Staple
This SP counts the amount of staples used (-001) or count stapled (-002)
by the machine.
001 Staples *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Stapless *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8551 T:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
8552 C:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
8554 P:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
8556 L:PrtBooks/FIN *CTL -
855x-001 Perfect-Bind Not used
855x-002 Ring-Bind Not used
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8562 C:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8563 F:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8566 L:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-130 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
856x-001 Total: Over A3/DLT
856x-002 Total: Under A3/DLT
856x-003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT
856x-004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT
SP Mode Tables
8581 T:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
001 Total
002 Total: Full Color
003 B&W/Single Color
004 Development: CMY
005 Development: K
006 Copy: Color
007 Copy: B/W
008 Print: Color
009 Print: B/W
010 Total: Color
011 Total: B/W
012 Full Color: A3
013 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
014 Full Color Print
015 Mono Color Print
SM Appendix 3-131 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
016 Full Color GPC
017 Twin Color Mode Print
018 Full Color Print(Twin)
019 Mono Color Print(Twin)
020 Full Color Total(CV)
021 Mono Color Total(CV)
022 Full Color Print(CV)
028 Development: CMY(A3)
029 Development: K(A3)
030 Total: Color(A3)
031 Total: B/W(A3)
032 Total: B/W(A3)
8582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color
8583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by
color output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-132 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
001 B/W
002 Mono Color
003 Full Color
004 Single Color
SP Mode Tables
005 Two Color
8586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by
color output.
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color
8591 O:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
001 A3/DLT
002 Duplex
005 Banner
8601 T:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
pages for each printing mode.
SM Appendix 3-133 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
001 B/W
002 Color
011 B/W Printing Pages
012 Color Printing Pages
021 Coverage Counter 1
031 Coverage Counter 1 (YMC)
8602 C:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
8603 F:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
P:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
8604 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
L:Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1%/step]
8606 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
8 602 8 603 8 604 8 606
860x-001: B/W Yes Yes Yes Yes
860x-002: Single Color Yes Yes Yes Yes
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-134 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
860x-003: Two Color Yes No Yes Yes
860x-004: Full Color Yes No Yes Yes
8617 SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
001 SDK-1
SP Mode Tables
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
007 SDK-7
008 SDK-8
009 SDK-9
010 SDK-10
011 SDK-11
012 SDK-12
8621 Func Use Counter DFU
001 to 064 Function 001 to Function 064
8631 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
8633 F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
SM Appendix 3-135 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
863x-001 B/W
863x-002 Color
 If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately
as B/W or Color.
 At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and
SP8633 are the same.
 The counts include error pages.
 If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
 Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
 Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
8641 T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
8643 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
864x-001 B/W
864x-002 Color
 If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately
as B/W or Color.
 At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and
SP8643 are the same.
 The counts include error pages.
 If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
 Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
 Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-136 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8651 T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
8655 S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for the Scan application only.
865x-001 B/W
SP Mode Tables
865x-002 Color
 The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If
the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
 If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the
pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
 If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the
document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
 Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted
separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10
for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for
a total of 20.).
8661 T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8665 S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
866x-001 B/W
866x-002 Color
SM Appendix 3-137 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
 The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan
Router server.
 If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are
not done.
 The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router
server.
8671 T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8675 S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
867x-001 B/W
867x-002 Color
8681 T:PCFAX *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by
TXPGS PC Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
8683 F:PCFAX *CTL
SP8 683 are the same.
TXPGS
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
 This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier
to the destination.
 When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are
only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The
counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent
from the document server. The counter for the
8692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL
application that was used to store the pages is
8693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-138 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
8696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen go to the C: counter.
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
 If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
SP Mode Tables
for the application that stored them.
 When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.
8701 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
8711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8715 S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
871x-001 JPEG/JPEG2000
871x-002 TIFF(Multi/Single)
871x-003 PDF
871x-004 Other
871x-005 PDF/Comp
SM Appendix 3-139 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
871x-006 PDF/A
871x-007 PDF(OCR)
871x-008 PDF/Comp(OCR)
871x-009 PDF/A(OCR)
8721 T: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8725 S: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
872x-001 B/W
872x-002 Color
8731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
8735 S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by
each scanner mode.
873x-001 B/W
873x-002 Color
8741 RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used
to receive them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-140 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8771 Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the

development rollers) for black and other color toners.
001 Total
002 K
003 Y
004 M
SP Mode Tables
005 C
8781 Toner_Botol_Info. *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.

Note: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
001 BK The number of black-toner bottles
002 Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
003 M The number of magenta-toner bottles
004 C The number of cyan-toner bottles
8791 LS Memory Remain *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/%]
This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server

for storing documents.
001 BK The number of black-toner bottles
8801 Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1%
steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure
in increments of 10 (10% steps).
SM Appendix 3-141 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
001 K
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8811 Eco Counter
001 Eco Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the color, full color, duplex
and combine function.
004 Duplex *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the duplex function.
005 Combine *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the number of pages reduced by using the combine function.
008 Duplex(%) *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/%]
Displays the utilization ratio of the duplex function.
009 Combine(%) *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/%]
Displays the utilization ratio of the combine function.
010 Paper Cut(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
Displays the paper reduction ratio.
051 Sync Eco Total *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
054 Sync Duplex *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
055 Sync Combine *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
058 Sync Duplex(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
059 Sync Combine(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
060 Sync Paper Cut(%) *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-142 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
104 Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
105 Combine:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
108 Duplex(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
109 Combine(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
110 Paper Cut(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
151 Sync Eco Totalr:Last *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
154 Sync Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
155 Sync Combine:Last *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]
158 Sync Duplex(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
159 Sync Combine(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
160 Sync Paper Cut(%):Last *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1/%]
8851 CVr Cnt: 0-10% *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage
of each color is from 0% to 10%.
011 0 to 2%: BK 031 5 to 7%: BK
012 0 to 2%: Y 032 5 to 7%: Y
013 0 to 2%: M 033 5 to 7%: M
014 0 to 2%: C 034 5 to 7%: C
021 3 to 4%: BK 041 8 to 10%: BK
022 3 to 4%: Y 042 8 to 10%: Y
023 3 to 4%: M 043 8 to 10%: M
024 3 to 4%: C 044 8 to 10%: C
SM Appendix 3-143 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8881 CVr Cnt: 31%- *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
of each color is 31% or higher.
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8891 Page/Toner Bottle *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each
color.
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-144 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
004 C
8901 Page/Toner_Prev1 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each
color.
001 BK
002 Y
SP Mode Tables
003 M
004 C
8911 Page/Toner_Prev2 *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for
each color.
001 BK
002 Y
003 M
004 C
8921 Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1/%]
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage(%):BK
002 Coverage (%) Y
003 Coverage (%) M
004 Coverage (%) C
8921 Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
011 Coverage /P: BK
SM Appendix 3-145 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
012 Coverage /P: Y
013 Coverage /P: M
014 Coverage /P: C
8941 Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with
ISO Standards.
001 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time
while controller is saving data to HDD (while
engine is not operating).
002 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while

controller saves data to HDD. Does not include
time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off
modes.
003 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
004 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with
Engine on. Includes time while machine is
performing background printing.
005 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing

background printing. Does not include time
machine remains powered off with the power
switches.
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
007 PrtJam Total time when paper jams have been staying
during printing.
008 OrgJam Total time when original jams have been

staying during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-146 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
8951 AddBook Register *CTL -
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
001 User Code /User ID User code registrations. [0 to 99999/ 0 /

1/step]
002 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
003 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
004 Group Group destination
SP Mode Tables
registrations.
005 Transfer Request Fax relay destination

registrations for relay TX.
006 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
007 Copy Program Copy application registrations [0 to 255 / 0 /

with the Program (job 1/step]
settings) feature.
008 Fax Program Fax application registrations

with the Program (job
settings) feature.
009 Printer Program Printer application

registrations with the Program
(job settings) feature.
010 Scanner Program Scanner application

registrations with the Program
(job settings) feature.
8961 Electricity Status *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
001 Ctrl Standby Time
002 STR Time
003 Main Power Off Time
004 Reading and Printing Time
SM Appendix 3-147 D255/D256/M281/M282

Main SP Tables-8
005 Printing Time
006 Reading Time
007 Eng Waiting Time
008 Low Pawer State Time
009 Silent State Time
010 Heater Off State Time
011 LCD on Time
101 Silent Print
8971 Unit Control *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1/step]
001 Engine Off Recovery Count
002 Power Off Count
003 Force Power Off Count
8999 Admin. Counter List
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
002 Copy: Full Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
003 Copy: BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
004 Copy: Single Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
005 Copy: Two Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
006 Printer Full Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
007 Printer BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
008 Printer Single Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
009 Printer Two Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-148 SM Appendix

Main SP Tables-8
010 Fax Print: BW *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
011 Fax Print: Single Color *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
013 Duplex *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
022 Copy: Full Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
023 Copy: BW(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
024 Copy: Single Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
SP Mode Tables
025 Copy: Two Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
026 Printer: Full Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
027 Printer: BW(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
028 Printer: Single *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]

Color(%)
029 Printer: Two Color(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
030 Fax Print: BW(%) *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]
031 Fax Print: Single *CTL [0 to 2147483647/ 0 / 1]

Color(%)
101 Transmission Total: *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

Color
102 Transmission Total: *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

BW
103 FAX Transmission *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
104 Scanner *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

Transmission: Color
105 Scanner *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

Transmission: BW
SM Appendix 3-149 D255/D256/M281/M282

Printer Service Mode
3.12 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
3.12.1 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 Responding with the hostname as the Model Hostname

sysName name
(PnP
name)
This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName.

 0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP 501SPF"
 1: Host name
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout Disabled Enabled
Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If enabled, the MFP I/O Timeout

setting will have no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled
If this BitSwitch is enabled, print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and
not output to paper.
bit 5 [PS and PDF] Paper size error margin ±5pt ±10pt
When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size, the job might not
be printed because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation
error. By default, the error margin for matching to a paper size is ±5
points. By enabling this bit switch, the error margin for matching to a
paper size can be extended to ±10 points.
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border Disabled Enabled
Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area.
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-150 SM Appendix

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Not used - -
bit 3 [PCL5e/c.PS]: PDL Auto Switching Enabled Disabled
SP Mode Tables
Enables/disable the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.
Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 Not used - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
to 1
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Disabled Enabled
Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.

In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A".
bit 3
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
SM Appendix 3-151 D255/D256/M281/M282

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal Disabled Enabled
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side
because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce
printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type Disabled Enabled

mismatch occurs (Single (Multiple
copy) copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSwitch, the
device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch
occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering Disabled Enabled

the contents of a job.
If this BitSwitch is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print
data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a
module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSwitch is for troubleshooting the effects
of SDK applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-152 SM Appendix

1001 Bit Switch
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpereter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not. For details, refer to page 4-1
"Printing Features".
 Pattern3: The larger the pattern number, the greater the number of
criterion used.
 Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max. number of stored jobs. Disabled Enabled
SP Mode Tables
(100)
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD.
The default (disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to
750 or 1000 depending on the model.
bit 5 Not used - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation Disabled Enabled

for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed
orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 Letterhead mode printing Enabled

Disabled
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex
job, are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems
with letterhead/pre-printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
SM Appendix 3-153 D255/D256/M281/M282

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 Not used - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Not used - -
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 Not used - -
bit 4 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 PCL, RPCS, PS: Forced BW print Enabled Disabled
Switches whether to ignore PDL color command.

(MP 501/601 Only)
bit 7 Not used - -
1001 Bit Switch
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-154 SM Appendix

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs Disabled Enabled

submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE (Immediately) (10 seconds)
1284).
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection does

not necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the
device whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10
seconds.
SP Mode Tables
bit 1 Not used - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled (Not Enabled

cancelld) (Cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this BitSwitch is enabled, printing under the following conditions
might result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 Not used - -
bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB Disabled Enabled

END) when printing multiple collated
copies.
This BitSwitch determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent
when multiple collated copies are being printed.
 0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy
has completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented
after the first copy and then again at the end of the job.
 1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has
finished printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the
end of each job.
bit 5 Display UTF-8 text in the operation panel Enabled Disabled
SM Appendix 3-155 D255/D256/M281/M282

1001 Bit Switch
 Enabled (=0): Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in

the operation panel.
 Disabled (=1): UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation
panel.
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8
encoded characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they
will be garbled unless this BitSwitch is enabled (=0).
bit 6 Disable super option Disabled Enabled
Switches super option disable on / off. It this is On, multiple jobs are grouped
at LPR port. PJL settings are enabled even jobs that are specified queue
names are sent.
bit 7 Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's

Enabled Disabled
Preview function
Determines whether Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function. (MP
501/601 Only)
 Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
 Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.
1001 Bit Switch
010 Bit Switch A 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 Store and Skip Errored Job locks the Queue is Queue
queue not locked locked after
after SSEJ SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job
(SSEJ), new jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has
been completely printed. (MP 501/601 Only)
bit 6 Allow use of Store and Skip Errored Job if Does not Allows SSEJ
connected to an external charge device. allow with ECD
SSEJ with
ECD
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-156 SM Appendix

1001 Bit Switch
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically

disabled if an external charge device is connected. (MP 501/601 Only)
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bit switch (1). Use it at
your own risk.
bit 7 Job cancels remaining pages when the

Job does
paid-for pages have been printed on an Job cancels
not cancel
external charge device
SP Mode Tables
When setting 1 is enabled, after printing the paid-for pages on an external
charge device, the job that includes any remaining pages will be
canceled.
This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary
pages from the previous user's print job. (MP 501/601 Only)
1001 Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch B 0 1
bit 0 Show Menu List Hide Menu Show Menu

List List
If this is 0, the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features. (MP
501/601 Only)
bit 1 Print job interruption Does not Allow

allow interruption
interruption
 0 (default): Print jobs are not interrupted. If a job is promoted to the top
of the print queue, it will wait for the currently printing job to finish.
 1: If a job is promoted to the top of the queue, it will interrupt the
currently printing job and start printing immediately.
bit 2 Switch for enabling or disabling Limitless Enabled Disabled

Paper Feeding for the Bypass Tray
SM Appendix 3-157 D255/D256/M281/M282

1001 Bit Switch
When the Bypass Tray is the target of the Auto Tray Select and Any
Size/Type is configured for the Tray Setting Priority setting of the Bypass
Tray, this BitSwitch can switch the behavior whether or not Limitless Paper
Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.* The default is Enabled (=0).
*Limitless Paper Feeding will try a matching tray of the next highest priority
if a job specified to Auto Tray Select as the tray setting is submitted and the
tray runs out of paper.
 Enabled (=0: Default): Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the
Bypass Tray. If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's
paper size and type but has run out of paper, printing will occur from
the Bypass Tray.
 Disabled (=1): Limitless Paper Feeding is not applied to the Bypass
Tray. If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size
and type but has run out of paper, printing will stop and an alert will
appear on the LCD screen, stating that the tray has run out of paper.
This prevents unexpected use of the Bypass Tray.
Limitations when this BitSwitch is set to "1":
- The "Paper Tray Priority: Printer" setting must be configured to a tray
other than the Bypass Tray.
- Jobs that contain more than one paper size cannot be printed.
bit 3 Not used - -
bit 4 Add "Apply Auto Paper Select" is the Disabled Enabled

condition that decides if the device's
paper size or paper type should be
overwritten.
If this BitSwitch is set to "1" (enabled), the "Apply Auto Paper Select"
setting will decide if the paper size or paper type that is specified in the
device settings should be overwritten by the job's commands when "Tray
Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s
commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the
device settings)
bit 5 DFU - -
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-158 SM Appendix

1001 Bit Switch
Bit 6 The tray selection setting when a paper Disabled Enabled

size or paper type mismatch occurs.
If the tray selection setting is enabled, selecting the tray that the "Apply
Auto Paper Select" setting is configured to "Off" cannot be done when a
paper size or paper type mismatch occurs.
bit 7 DFU - -
SP Mode Tables
1001 Bit Switch
012 Bit Switch C 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 Change the user ID type displayed on the Disabled Enabled

operation panel
As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the

operation panel. The user ID type displayed on the operation panel can be
changed by configuring BitSwitch #12-5 as follows:
 0 (default): Login User Name
 1: User ID. If this is enabled, User ID will be displayed, which is
equivalent to the behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit 6 AirPrint Enabled Disabled
AirPrint can be disabled by changing this BitSwitch from 0 (default) to 1.
bit 7 DFU - -
1003 [Clear Setting]
1003-001 Initialize System Initializes settings in the System menu of the

user mode.
1003-003 Delete Program DFU
SM Appendix 3-159 D255/D256/M281/M282

1004 [Print Summary]
1004-001 Service Summary Prints the service summary sheet (a

summary of all the controller settings).
1004-002 Service Summary2
1005 [Display Version]
1005-001 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller

firmware. (SP 5300/5310 only)
1005-002 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller

firmware. (MP 501/601 only)
1006 [Sample / Locked Print]

(MP
501/601
only)
1006-001 0:Link with Doc. Srv -

1:Enable
1007 [Supply Display]

(SP
5300/5310
only)
1007-001 Development Enables or disables the display for

information on each consumable supply.
1007-002 PCU
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
1007-003 Transfer 0: OFF, 1: ON
1007-004 Int. Transfer
1007-005 Transfer Roller
1007-006 Fuser
1007-007 Fuser Oil
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-160 SM Appendix

1110 [Media Print Device Setting]

(MP
Enable or disable the media print support function.
501/601
only)
1110-002 0:Disable 1:Enable [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]
SP Mode Tables
(MP
Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full
501/601
cancellation from the SCS job list.
only)
1111-001 0:excluding New Job [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

1:including New Job
SM Appendix 3-161 D255/D256/M281/M282

Scanner Service Mode (MP 501/601 Only)
3.13 SCANNER SERVICE MODE (MP 501/601 ONLY)
3.13.1 SP1-XXX
1005 [Erase Margin(Remote scan)]
1-005-001 Range from 0 to 5 CTL* [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 / step]

mm
1009 [Remote scan disable]
1-009-001 0:Enable CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

1:Disable
1010 [Non Display ClearLight PDF]
1-010-001 0:Display CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]

1:Nondisplay
1011 [Org Count Disp]
1-011-001 0:ON 1:OFF CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1012 [UserInfo Release]
1-012-001 0:No 1:Yes CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting]
1-013-002 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set]
1-014-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-162 SM Appendix

1040 [Scan:LT/LG Mixed Sizes Setting]
1-040-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
1041 [Scan:FlairAPI Setting]
1-014-001 0x00 - 0xff CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 / step]
SP Mode Tables
3.13.2 SP2-XXX
2021 [Compression Level(Grayscale)]
2-021-001 Comp1:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 / step]
2-021-002 Comp2:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 / step]
2-021-003 Comp3:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 / step]
2-021-004 Comp4:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 / step]
2-021-005 Comp5:5-95 CTL* [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 / step]
2023 [ClearLightPDF:ACS Setting]
2-023-001 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
2024 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF]
2-024-001 Compression CTL* [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 / step]

Ratio(Normal)

Ratio(High)
SM Appendix 3-163 D255/D256/M281/M282

2025 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000]

Ratio(Normal)
JPEG2000

Ratio(High)
JPEG2000
2030 [OCR PDF DetectSens]
2-030-001 White Lumi Value: 0 CTL* [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step]

- 255
2-030-002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - CTL* [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]

100
2-030-003 White Tile Ratio: 0 CTL* [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]

-100
D255/D256/M281/M282 3-164 SM Appendix

Input and Output Check
3.14 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK
3.14.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-803)

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SP Mode Tables
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Reading
SP Description
0 1
5-803-001 Exit Full Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
5-803-016 Key Card Set Set Not set
5-803-017 Key Counter Set Set Not set
5-803-018 IPU Version - -
3.14.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE (SP5-804)

Activates the electrical components for functional check.
It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time.
SP Display
5-804-001 CTLFAN Motor
5-804-101 FAN:LSU/DLP/CENTER/REAR
5-804-102 FAN:LVU
5-804-103 Toner Motor
5-804-202 Scanner Lamp
SM Appendix 3-165 D255/D256/M281/M282

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
11 ~ 12 04/13/2017 Corrected The Setting of SMTP Authentication in Scan to Email
Printing Features
4. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
4.1 PRINTING FEATURES
4.1.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION

An MFP/LP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data,
the machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed.
SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP/LP requires a printer driver
Configuration
installation:
Software
 OFF
If SP5-844-005 is set to OFF, the unique serial number of the device is sent to the computer.
As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up messages
will appear, because the serial numbers between the two are different.
 Level 1
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 1, a common serial number for the product such as "MP 305+"
series is sent to the computer. As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the
same product, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are recognized as
having the same serial number.
 Level 2
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 2, a common serial number for all GW/GW+ models is sent to
the computer. As a result, if a GW/GW+ device is swapped out for a different GW/GW+ device,
pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as being based
on GW/GW+.
4.1.2 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION
Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of
specific parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if
the job contains multiple PDLs. This is only possible if the job was not created using a driver.
Conditions for detection of the PDL

The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
 No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job
 No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the
PDL
 User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto

Printing Features
 The printer is unable to detect PCL6 or RPCS. However these are almost always created
using a driver and therefore contain the PJL command specifying the PDL.
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter

There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be
searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up to 256
bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will
abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The
entire page (regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.
 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

 If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be
disabled.
 An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an
interpreter detects a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been submitted
and will be output using the previously detected PDL.
 If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one
configured in "Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".
The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:

Printing Features
PDL selection and switching

3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:
1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the
printer system
Configuration
Software
2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system
3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system
Triggers
Printer system

Printing Features
PCL5 triggers [ESC]E

[FF]
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1
"%!"
"dict begin"
"bind def"
"findfont"
"showpage"
"/statusdict"
"0 startjob"
[EOT]
"}" + space character + "def"
"userdict" (*)
PDF triggers %PDF-

%!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)
* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.
 Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
 "%%" can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1
 If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a
regular PS job.
PS interpreter
PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL

commands
 Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.

Printing Features
Some possible problems

Garbled output:
If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is
applied, the output will be garbled.
Incorrect printer settings:
Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the
printer settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no
settings were configured for the rest of the job.
Configuration
Printer Bit Switch description
Software
Bit Switch 2-3
This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter
will search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of
the job such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result
garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1
should be used in such a case.
 A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will wait
10 seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB of
a job and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to detect
the end of jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not wait 10
seconds if jobs of less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting time is the

Printing Features
purpose of BitSw 9-0.

BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
4.1.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION

Bit Switch 5-6
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages will
always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or
Z-folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex
long-edge bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.
Bit Switch #5-6=0:
Bit Switch #5-6=1:

Printing Features
Configuration
 Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs might
Software
cause unexpected results.
4.1.4 PJL USTATUS

Bit Switch 9-4
These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies of
a job are being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all copies
have been printed.
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with legacy
software.
BitSw 9-4=1:
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3

Printing Features
@PJL USTATUS JOB

END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9

Printing Features
@PJL USTATUS JOB

END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>
Configuration
Software

Scanner Features (MP 501/601 Only)
4.2 SCANNER FEATURES (MP 501/601 ONLY)
4.2.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN

DESTINATION
Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared.
Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using
Scanner SP 1-012-001.
By default, this is cleared to avoid subsequent users scanning to it by mistake.
Scanner SP 1-012-001
1 (default): Clear
0: Do not clear
This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete:
 Destination
 Sender
 Email subject
 Email message
 File name
Scanner SP 1-012-001=1 (default):
Exceptions:
 User Auth.:
If SP 1-012-001 = 0 and if User Auth. (excluding User Code authentication) is enabled, the
most recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs out.
 Scanner Auto Reset timer:
Even if SP 1-012-001 = 0 the most recently used scan destination can still be cleared by the
Scanner Auto Reset timer. If the Scanner Auto Reset timer is shorter than the System Auto
Reset timer, then the most recently used scan destination will be cleared when the Scanner
Auto Reset timer elapses.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-10 SM Appendix

Rev 04/13/2017 Scanner Features (MP 501/601 Only)
4.2.2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO

EMAIL
Scan to Email fails with the error message "Transmission has failed ". The SMTP username and
password are correct. How can I make Scan to Email pass?
Change SP 5-860-022 "SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement" to On. By doing this, Scan to Email
will pass the SMTP authentication.
 Using this option to solve the above problem, the device SMTP email address will appear
in the email's "From" field. The email address of the user who sent the email or the
Configuration
Software
administrator will appear in the "Reply-to" field.
Explanation
This is an SMTP authentication issue that aborts transmission of an already started Scan to Email.
Currently this has only been reproduced using MS-Exchange server.
MS-Exchange requires that all of the following match:
1. The sender's address in the "MAIL FROM" field. This is also known as the "envelope sender"
or "MIME sender". It is an SMTP command sent at the beginning of the email transmission
process.
2. The sender's address in the mail header "From:" field. This appears as "From" in email clients.
It is a part of the email itself.
3. The email address corresponding to the SMTP username used to login into the SMTP server.
When the MFP logins into the SMTP server, the email address of the username 3) will be
compared to 1) and 2). If these comparisons fail, authentication will also fail. Exchange server will
stop the transmission procedure, and the "Transmission has failed" message will be returned to
the sender.
Typical example
NG case:
SP5-860-022 is Off:
1. The "MAIL FROM" field = SMTP email address (Fig.1 )
2. The mail header "From:" field = User or administrator (Fig.2 )
3. The SMTP username = SMTP user name (Fig.1 )
When the SMTP server compares 2) and 3) the Exchange Server will stop the transmission
procedure.
OK case:
SP5-860-022 can be used to make the values in the above example, match.
In this example, if SP5-860-022 is On, the user's email address or administrator’s email address
in the mail header '2)' will be replaced by the Administrator's email address. (see Fig.3 )
To solve the problem, the “Mail From”, field must be the same as the mail header “From” field.
SM Appendix 4-11 D255/D256/M281/M282

Scanner Features (MP 501/601 Only) Rev 04/13/2017
If this is done:
1. The "Mail From: field = SMTP email address (Fig.1 )
2. The mail header "From:" field = SMTP email address (Fig.3 )
3. The SMTP username = SMTP user name (Fig.1 )
1,2 and 3 must match and the authentication should be successful.
• When SP5-860-022 is on, the user’s email address or administrator’s email address will
be inserted into the reply-to field.
Fig.1 Default device SMTP username, password and email address
Fig.2 A user's email address in the Address Book
Fig.3 Administrator's email address
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-12 SM Appendix

4.2.3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER

Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of
System SP 5-846-021.
This method depends on how the destination is accessed, whether authentication is being used,
and SP 5-846-021.
Cases:
Destination Account used to access the

Case User auth.
Configuration
selection folder
Software
Either enabled
A Manual entry The user's account *
or disabled
The recipient's account

(as configured in the Address
B disabled
Book's Folder Authentication
setting)
If SP 5-846-021 =
Destination list 0 (default): The authenticated
user's account
C enabled 1: The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address
Book's Folder Authentication
setting)
* The "user's account" will be either the one entered during scanning (see the Manual Entry
screen capture) or if User Auth. is enabled, the account configured in the user's Folder
Authentication setting will be used.
The destination's access logs:
Case A or Case C with SP=0: The access logs can be used to determine which user sent the
scan.
SM Appendix 4-13 D255/D256/M281/M282

Case B or Case C with SP=1: All access will be logged as the same user.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-14 SM Appendix

Management Features
4.3 MANAGEMENT FEATURES
4.3.1 HOW TO DISABLE THE DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTION

1. Enter 'Copy' SP mode.
2. Change SP5-967-001 to 1. (0:ON 1:OFF)
3. Reboot the machine.
 When the above SP mode (SP5-967-001) is OFF (=1), both the Document Server
Configuration
and Locked Print functions will be disabled.
Software
How to Use Locked Print When the Document Server Is Disabled
1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.
2. Set SP1-006-001 to 1.
0: Link with Doc. Srv (default)
Locked print will only be enabled if the document server is enabled.
1: Enable
Enable Locked
Print will be enabled no matter the status of the document server.
3. Turn OFF then ON the main power.
SM Appendix 4-15 D255/D256/M281/M282

Security Features
4.4 SECURITY FEATURES
4.4.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU

1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.
2. Set SP5-888-001
0: (default): "Job" menu is enabled.
1: "Job" menu is disabled.
 This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code auth.) is
disabled.
4.4.2 HOW TO RESTRICT WEB IMAGE MONITOR ACCESS TO THE

DOCUMENT SERVER (MP 501/601 ONLY)
System (Copier) SP 5-885-020 bit 0, 1 and 7 restrict Web Image Monitor access to the DS. It
disables the following WIM settings:
 The entire Document Server menu (shown in blue in fig1)
 Job > Document Server (shown in red in fig1)
See the following for details:
Bit 0:
Bit 0 = 0 (default): Allows anyone (guests, users, admins) access to the DS via WIM.
Bit 0 = 1: Prevents everyone from accessing the DS via WIM.
Bit 1:
Bit 1 = 1: Only administrators can access the DS via WIM.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-16 SM Appendix

Security Features
 Without admin privileges, even authenticated users will be unable to access the DS via
WIM.
Bit 7:
Bit 7 = 1: Only administrators and authenticated users can access the DS via WIM.
The most restrictive result of combining these three configurations will take priority. So for
example:
Bit 0 = 0
Bit 1 = 1
Configuration
Bit 7 = 1
Software
As Bit 1 = 1 is the most restrictive of the three, it will take presedence over the other two and only
administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM.
 In order for SP5-885-020 to have any effect, the Document Server must be enabled
(SP5-967-001=0). For information about SP5-967-001, refer to Disabling the Document
Server using System SP5-967-001 and Printer SP1-006-001.
 Access to the entire "Job" menu can be restricted using SP 5-888-001. For details, refer
to Use of SP 5-888-001 to restrict access to the "Job" menu on WIM.
SM Appendix 4-17 D255/D256/M281/M282

Security Features
4.4.3 USER AUTHENTICATION FOR SPECIFIC MFP APPLICATIONS

The SP5-420 settings enable/disable User Authentication for specific MFP applications.
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP5-420-001 Copy
SP5-420-011 Document Server
SP5-420-021 Fax 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
SP5-420-031 Scanner
SP5-420-041 Printer
1. Enable User Authentication for the device as a whole:

User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > User Authentication Management
2. Use the SP5-420 settings to specify the applications to which User authentication is to
apply.
D255/D256/M281/M282 4-18 SM Appendix

D255/D256
FAX OPTION
67 10/19/2016 Removed Bit Switch 1 G3 Communication Parameter Resol: 44
D255/D256
FAX OPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION ................................................................................ 1
1.1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M24 (D3CP-05, 06, 07)................................................ 1
1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ........................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .............................................................................. 1
Installing the fax connection unit ................................................................................ 2
Registering the client machine(s) ............................................................................... 4
Registering the remote machine ................................................................................ 6
Configuring the remote reception settings ................................................................. 7
Remote fax icon addition for remote machine ........................................................... 9
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT .......................................... 10

2.1 FCU ................................................................................................................................. 10
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE ............................................................ 10
When replacing the Fax modular cable ................................................................... 21
3. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................... 22
3.1 ERROR CODES ............................................................................................................. 22
3.1.1 ERROR CODES ................................................................................................... 22
3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES................................................................... 45
3.2.1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODE LIST.................................................. 45
MACHINE_ERR_01 ................................................................................................. 45
MACHINE_ERR_02 ................................................................................................. 45
MACHINE_ERR_03 ................................................................................................. 46
MACHINE_ERR_04 ................................................................................................. 46
MACHINE_ERR_05 ................................................................................................. 46
MACHINE_ERR_06 ................................................................................................. 47
MACHINE_ERR_07 ................................................................................................. 47
MACHINE_ERR_08 ................................................................................................. 47
3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................... 48
3.3.1 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................ 48
3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 51
3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION...................................................................................... 51
SM i D255/D256 FAX OPTION

Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name................................................................... 51
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway ............................................................................... 52
Cannot send by Alias Fax number ........................................................................... 53
3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ............................................................................................ 54
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name .............................................................. 54
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway ............................................................................ 55
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number ....................................................................... 55
4. SERVICE TABLES ......................................................................... 58

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ...................................................................................... 58
4.1.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) ................................................................................. 58
4.1.2 SP2-XXX (RAM) ................................................................................................... 59
4.1.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET) .................................................................................. 60
4.1.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) ............................................................................... 61
4.1.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) ...................................................................................... 61
4.1.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ......................................................................................... 62
4.1.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS) ............................................................................................... 64
4.2 BIT SWITCHES - 1 ......................................................................................................... 65
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES........................................................................................... 65
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 2 ......................................................................................................... 80
4.3.1 I-FAX SWITCHES................................................................................................. 80
4.3.2 PRINTER SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 87
4.4 BIT SWITCHES - 3 ......................................................................................................... 95
4.4.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES .......................................................................... 95
4.5 BIT SWITCHES - 4 ....................................................................................................... 105
4.5.1 G3 SWITCHES ................................................................................................... 105
4.6 BIT SWITCHES - 5 ....................................................................................................... 115
4.6.1 IP FAX SWITCHES ............................................................................................ 115
4.7 NCU PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 124
4.8 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ........................................................... 128
4.8.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 128
4.8.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................................... 128
Fax Parameters ...................................................................................................... 128
E-mail Parameters.................................................................................................. 132
4.9 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ...................................................................................... 136
4.9.1 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES............................................................................ 136
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 148

5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................... 148
5.2 BOARDS ....................................................................................................................... 149
D255/D256 FAX OPTION ii SM

5.2.1 FCU .................................................................................................................... 149
FACE3.5 (Fax Application Control Engine) ............................................................ 149
Modem (FAME2) .................................................................................................... 149
DRAM ..................................................................................................................... 149
SAF Memory Back-up ............................................................................................ 150
ROM ....................................................................................................................... 150
SRAM ..................................................................................................................... 150
SRAM Back-up ....................................................................................................... 150
Switches ................................................................................................................. 150
CPU ........................................................................................................................ 150
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ....................................................................................................... 151
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ................................................................................................ 151
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission ................................... 151
Immediate Transmission ........................................................................................ 152
JBIG Transmission ................................................................................................. 152
5.3.2 RECEPTION....................................................................................................... 152
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ........................................................................... 154
5.4.1 DOCUMENT SERVER ....................................................................................... 154
5.4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ................................................................ 155
Mail Transmission ................................................................................................... 155
Data Formats .......................................................................................................... 155
Direct SMTP Transmission ..................................................................................... 156
Selectable Options ................................................................................................. 156
Secure Internet Transmission ................................................................................ 156
Mail Reception ........................................................................................................ 157
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure ............................................................... 157
SMTP Reception .................................................................................................... 157
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP ........................ 157
Auth. E-mail RX ...................................................................................................... 158
Handling Mail Reception Errors ............................................................................. 158
Remaining SAF capacity error ............................................................................... 159
Secure Internet Reception...................................................................................... 159
Transfer Request: Request By Mail ....................................................................... 159
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) .............................................................................. 160
Subject and Level of Importance ............................................................................ 160
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................................... 160
Subjects Displayed on the PC ................................................................................ 161
E-mail Messages .................................................................................................... 161
Message Disposition Notification (MDN) ............................................................... 162
SM iii D255/D256 FAX OPTION

Handling Reports .................................................................................................... 162
Report Sample........................................................................................................ 163
5.5 IP-FAX ........................................................................................................................... 164
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? .............................................................................................. 164
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT...................................................................................... 164
UDP Related Switches ........................................................................................... 164
5.5.3 SETTINGS .......................................................................................................... 164
6. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 165

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 165
6.1.1 FCU .................................................................................................................... 165
6.1.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS ................................................. 166
6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................ 167
6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 168
6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... 169
D255/D256 FAX OPTION iv SM

READ THIS FIRST
Symbols and Abbreviations

Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Spring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed [A]
LEF Long Edge Feed [B]
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
 Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death.

 Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
 Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
 Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds, damage to
originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine. bold is added for
emphasis.
 This document provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Fax Connection Unit Type M24 (D3CP-05, 06, 07)
1. INSTALLATION
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
1.1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M24 (D3CP-05, 06, 07)
No. Description Q'ty
1 Fax Connection Unit SD card 1
- EMC address decal (EU only) 1

This unit allows a machine without the fax unit installed (client machine) to send and receive faxes
via a machine with the fax unit installed (remote machine).
Requirements:
 Up to six machines can be registered as the client machines.
 Machines that have the fax unit installed cannot be used as the client machine.
 Only one machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.
 Firmware for this unit: "aics" (software number: D3CP5759)
 Remote Fax transmissions are possible on a G3 line.
 The remote fax function does not support User Code Authentication. Disable the User Code
Authentication on the remote machine.
 Use this function to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent. Also,
use this function to cancel a transmission from the client machine.
Order of installation:
1. Install the Fax Connection Unit in the remote machine (fax unit is already installed).
SM 1 D255/D256 FAX OPTION

2. Install the Fax Connection Unit in the client machine (fax unit is not installed).
3. Register the client machine in the remote machine.
 Do not register the remote machine before the client machine is registered on the
remote machine. Otherwise, the remote machine can not be registered.
4. Register the remote machine in the client machine.
Installing the fax connection unit
 Before starting this procedure, connect the network cable to the target machine(s), and
then configure the network settings.
 When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. For details about
how to merge, refer to "SD Card Appli Move" in "Main Chapters" of the field service
manual.
3. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release a hook of the controller cover [B].
D255/D256 FAX OPTION 2 SM

FAX OPTION
D255/D256
 Be careful not to damage the hooks at the rear of the controller cover when you
5. Insert the Fax Connection Unit Type M24 SD card into SD card slot 1 [A] (upper slot).

8. Press [Firmware Version] in the [Administrator Tools].

 [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools]
9. Check whether the aics version is displayed.
Registering the client machine(s)
 Do not register the remote machine in the client machine before registering the client
machine in the remote machine. Otherwise, registering the remote machine fails.
 Before starting this procedure, connect the network cable to the target machine(s), and
then configure the network settings.
1. On the remote machine, press the [User Tools] icon on the operation panel.
5. Press [Program/Change/Delete Remote Machine].
6. Press [* Not Programmed], and then enter the IP address or host name of one of the
client machines.
 Up to six machines can be registered as the client machines.

FAX OPTION
D255/D256
7. Press [Connection Test] to check the connection with the client machine.
 If an error message is displayed, check the network connection with the client- machine
and make sure that the IP address of the client machine is correct.
8. Press [OK] after "Connection Test" has been successfully done.

9. Press [Exit].
Registering the remote machine
 Only one machine can be registered as the remote machine.

 First register the client machine in the remote machine before proceeding this procedure.
Otherwise, registering the remote machine fails.
1. On the client machine, press [User Tools] icon on the operation panel.
5. Press [Program/Change/Delete Remote Machine].
6. Press [* Not Programmed], and then enter the IP address or host name of o the remote
machine.
 Only one machine can be registered as the remote machine.
7. Press [Connection Test] to check the connection with the remote machine.
 If an error message is displayed, check the network connection with the remote machine
and make sure that the IP address of the remote machine is correct.

FAX OPTION
D255/D256
8. Press [OK] after "Connection Test" has been successfully done.
9. Press [Exit].
Configuring the remote reception settings

Perform the following procedure to enable the client machine(s) to receive faxes via the remote
machine. You can forward or route received documents per line or special sender.
 By performing procedures described above (Installing the fax connection unit,

Registering the client machine(s), Registering the remote machine), the client machines
can send faxes via the remote machine. The procedures shown below are necessary to
enable the client machines to receive faxes.
1) If you use "Remote Reception Setting per Line"
1. On the remote machine, press [User Tools] icon on the operation panel.
2. Press [Facsimile Features] in [Machine Features].
3. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Line] in [Reception Settings].
4. Enter an IP address or a host name of the client machine to connect.
5. Press [Set], and [Exit] to exit from the setting.
2) If you use "Remote Reception per Sender"
1. On the remote machine, press [User Tools] icon on the operation panel.
2. Press [Facsimile Features] in [Machine Features].
3. Press [Program Special Sender] in [Reception Settings].

4. Select the Special Sender.
5. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Sender].
6. Press [On].
7. Press [Remote Machine].
8. Enter an IP address or a host name of the client machine to connect.

9. Press [OK] to exit from the setting.

Remote fax icon addition for remote machine
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
This procedure allows the [Remote Fax] icon to appear on the home screen of the operation
panel.
 The [Remote Fax] icon is supposed to appear automatically on the home screen of the
client machine(s) after installing the Remote Fax Function. If the icon does not appear,
perform the procedure below to add the [Remote Fax] icon manually.
1. Press the application list icon in the home screen.
2. Press [APPS] tab.
3. Press and hold down the [Remote Fax] icon from the list.
4. Drag the icon to where you want to place it on the home screen.

FCU
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
2.1 FCU
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE

When you replace the FCU board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU board to the new
FCU board. Perform the following procedure to back up the SRAM data.
 The following data can be transferred: TTI, RTI, CSI, Fax bit switch settings, RAM
address settings, NCU parameter settings.
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into [A] to release a hook of the controller cover [B].
3. Release the hook by opening the right side of the cover as shown below, and then
remove the cover [A] by rotating it in the direction of the blue arrow.

FCU
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
4. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the order of , , and to release three hooks.


FCU
6. Disconnect the connector of the speaker.
8. Remove the bracket [A] from the fax unit [B].

FCU
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
10. Remove the FCU board [A].
11. Change the orientation of the battery jumper switch [A] on the removed FCU board [B],
and then attach the battery jumper switch [C].
The battery jumper switch [C] is provided with the new FCU board.

FCU
12. Change the orientation of the battery jumper switch [A] on the new FCU board [B].
 If the battery jumper switch is not in the correct position, SC820 will occur.
13. Install the new FCU board to the fax unit.
1. Attach the two brackets [A] to the new FCU board [B].

FCU
2. Connect the connector.
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
3. Attach the bracket [A].
14. Attach the flat cable [A] to CN603 of the new fax unit.
Make sure that the blue tape of the flat cable faces outward.
15. Remove the cap [A] from the controller box cover [B].

FCU
18. Install the new fax unit [A] to the main machine.
 When installing the new fax unit [A], be careful not to damage the flat cable [B]. After
installing the new fax unit [A], pull out the flat cable [B] from the main machine, as

FCU
shown below.
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
19. Connect the connector of the speaker.
20. Connect the flat cable [A] to CN603 of the removed FCU board [B].

SRAM data transmission starts. When the transmission is completed, you will hear a beeper
sound.
 The beeper sound is at the same volume as the speaker sound.

 The beeper sounds even if the speaker sound is turned off.
 If the beeper does not sound, repeat the main power OFF/ON until the beeper
sounds, and then perform the transmission procedure. If the data cannot be
transmitted, repeat transmission 2 or 3 times.
 If the beeper does not sound after turning the main power OFF/ON 3 times, you need

FCU
to input the settings stored in SRAM memory manually.

22. When the message "Ready" is displayed on the operation panel, turn the main power
OFF.
23. Disconnect the flat cable [A] from the removed FCU board [B].
24. Disconnect the connector of the speaker.
25. Remove the new FCU board [A] from the main machine.
26. Reattach the controller box cover [A].

FCU
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
 The screw [B] is a small screw. Be careful not to use the wrong screw.
27. Reattach the slot cover [A].
28. Reattach the cap [A].
29. Install the new fax unit [A] to the main machine.

FCU
30. Connect the connector of the speaker.

32. Turn ON the main power. Execute SP6-101 to print the system parameter list.
33. Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data is transferred correctly.
34. Set the correct date and time from the [User Tools].
 User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Timer Setting > Set Date/Time
 If any of the SRAM data was not transferred, input those settings manually.

FCU
When replacing the Fax modular cable
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
When you replace the Fax modular cable, attach the ferrite core with the following procedure.
1. Make three loops 5 cm (2.0 inches) [A] from the end of the modular cable (connection
side to the machine) and attach the ferrite core to the loops as shown.
2. Fix the modular cable with the bind [A] as shown below.

Error Codes
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
3.1.1 ERROR CODES

If an error code is displayed, retry communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below.
 Error codes appear in the error code display and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
 Check the connection.

 The other party may be incompatible.
DIS/NSF not detected within  Replace the FCU.
0-00
40 s of Start being pressed  Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
 If the RX signal is weak, there may be a
bad connection.
 The other party is out of paper or has a

paper jam.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly
 The other party pressed [Stop] during
communication.
Incompatible modem at the

0-03  The other party is incompatible.
other party

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
 Try changing the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
 Replace the FCU.
 The other machine may be defective. Try
sending to another machine.
CFR or FTT not received after
0-04  If the RX signal is weak or defective, there
modem training
may be a bad connection.
Reference:
 TX level: NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
 Cable equalizer: G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
 Dedicated TX parameters in Service
Program Mode

 Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer.
Modem training fails even G3
0-05  Replace the FCU.
shifts down to 2400 bps.
 Check for line problems.
Reference:
See error code 0-04.

equalizer settings.
The other terminal did not  The other party may be defective or
0-06
reply to DCS incompatible; try sending to another
machine.
Reference:

Error Codes

 The other party is out of paper or has a
No post-message response paper jam.
0-07 from the other party after a  The other party may have disconnected
page was sent the call.
 Check for a bad line.
 The other machine may be defective. Try
sending to another machine.

 The other party may have a paper jam, or
run out of paper or memory space.
equalizer settings.
The other party sent RTN or
 The other party may have a defective
PIN after receiving a page,
0-08 modem/FCU; try sending to another
because there were too many
machine.
errors
 Check for line problems and noise.
Reference:
 TX level: NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
 Cable equalizer: G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
 Dedicated TX parameters in Service
Program Mode
 Incompatible or defective remote terminal;

try sending to another machine.
 Noisy line; resend.
Non-standard post message  Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
0-14
response code received equalizer settings.
Reference:

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
The other party is unable to accepting the
following functions, or the other party's memory
The other terminal is not is full.
0-15
capable of specific functions.  Confidential RX
 Transfer function
 SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

equalizer settings.
CFR or FTT not detected after  The other machine may have
0-16 modem training in confidential disconnected, or it may be defective. Try
or transfer mode sending to another machine.
 If the RX signal level is too low, there may
be a line problem.
Reference:
 If [Stop] was not pressed and this error

Communication was
0-17 keeps occurring, replace the operation
interrupted by pressing [Stop]
panel or the operation panel drive board.

 Try calling another fax machine.
Facsimile data not received  Try adjusting the reconstruction time for
0-20
within 6 s of retraining the first line and/or RX cable equalizer
setting.
Reference:
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, Bit 6
RX cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

Error Codes
 Check the connection between the FCU

and line.
 Check for line noise or other line problems.
EOL signal (end-of-line) from
the other party not received
0-21  The remote machine may be defective or
within 5 s of the previous EOL
may have been disconnected.
signal
Reference:
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, Bit 4

The signal from the other  The remote machine may be defective.
party was interrupted for more  Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-22 than the acceptable modem  Try adjusting the acceptable modem
carrier drop time (default: 200 carrier drop time.
ms) Reference:
Acceptable modem carrier drop time: G3
Switch 0A, Bits 0 and 1

 The remote machine may be defective.
 Try asking the other party to adjust their
Too many errors during TX level.
0-23
reception  Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer
setting and/or RX error criteria.
Reference:
RX cable equalizer: G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
RX error criteria: Communication Switch 02,
Bits 0 and 1

Data block format failure in
0-29  Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
ECM reception
 Replace the NCU or FCU.

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
The other terminal did not
equalizer settings.
0-30 reply to NSS(A) in AI short
 The other terminal may not be compatible.
protocol mode
Reference:
Dedicated TX parameters - Section 4
The other terminal sent a

 Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained
0-32  Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving
manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.
The data reception (not ECM)  Check the connection.

0-33 is not completed within 10  The other terminal may have a defective
minutes. modem/FCU.
Polarity changed during  Check the connection.

0-52
communication Retry communication.
 FCU firmware or board defective.

0-55 FCU does not detect the SG3.
 SG3 firmware or board defective.
The stored message data

0-56 exceeds the capacity of the  SG3 firmware or board defective.
mailbox in the SG3.
 The other terminal did not have a

The communication mode compatible communication mode (e.g., the
specified in CM/JM was not other terminal was a V.34 data modem and
0-70 available not a fax modem.)
(V.8 calling and called  A polling TX file was not ready at the other
terminal) terminal when polling RX was initiated
from the calling terminal.
 The calling terminal could not detect

The calling terminal fell back
ANSam due to noise, etc.
to T.30 mode, because it
0-74  ANSam was too short to detect.
could not detect ANSam after
 Check the connection and condition.
sending CI.
 Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

Error Codes
The called terminal fell back to  The terminal could not detect ANSam.
T.30 mode, because it could  Check the connection and condition.
0-75
not detect a CM in response  Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
to ANSam (ANSam timeout). fax.
The calling terminal fell back

 The called terminal could not detect a CM
to T.30 mode, because it
due to noise, etc.
0-76 could not detect a JM in
 Check the connection. and condition.
response to CM
 Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
 The calling terminal could not detect a JM

The called terminal fell back to due to noise, etc.
T.30 mode, because it could  A network that has narrow bandwidth
0-77 not detect a CJ in response to cannot pass JM to the other party.
JM  Check the connection and condition.
(JM timeout).  Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
fax.
The called terminal detected  Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-79 CI while waiting for a V.21  If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
signal. back to T.30 mode.
The line was disconnected  The guard timer expired while starting
0-80 due to a timeout in V.34 phase these phases. Serious noise, narrow
2 – line probing. bandwidth, or low signal level can cause
these errors.
The line was disconnected
If these errors happen at the transmitting
0-81 due to a timeout in V.34 phase
terminal:
3 – equalizer training.
 Try making a call later.
The line was disconnected  Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
due to a timeout in the V.34 dedicated TX parameters.
0-82
phase 4 – control channel  Try increasing the TX level.
start-up.  Try adjusting the TX cable equalizer

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
The line was disconnected  Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer
due to a timeout in the V.34 setting.
0-83
control channel restart  Try increasing the TX level.
sequence.  Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the
same error is frequent when receiving from
multiple senders.
 The signal did not stop within 10 s.

 Turn OFF the main power, and then turn it
due to abnormal signaling in
0-84 back ON.
V.34 phase 4 – control
 If the same error is frequent, replace the
channel start-up.
FCU.
 The signal did not stop within 10 s.

The line was disconnected  Turn OFF the main power, and then turn it
0-85 due to abnormal signaling in back ON.
V.34 control channel restart.  If the same error is frequent, replace the
FCU.

because the other terminal
 The other terminal was incompatible.
requested a data rate using
0-86  Ask the other party to contact the
MPh that was not available in
manufacturer.
the currently selected symbol
rate.
 The receiving terminal restarted the control

The control channel started channel because data reception in the
0-87 after an unsuccessful primary primary channel was not successful.
channel.  This does not result in an error
communication.

because PPR was
 Try using a lower data rate at the start.
0-88 transmitted/received 9
 Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.

Error Codes
Only one V.21 connection flag

was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity  Replace the FCU.

back ON.
2-13 Modem initialization error
 Update the modem ROM.
If error occurs frequently, change the settings

Counter overflow error of
2-22 for resolution, paper size, and compression
JBIG chip
type.
JBIG compression or Turn OFF the main power, and then turn it back
2-23
reconstruction error ON.

2-24 JBIG ASIC error
back ON.
JBIG data reconstruction error

2-25
(BIH error)

2-26  JBIG data error
(Float marker error)
 Check the sender's JBIG function.
JBIG data reconstruction error  Update the FCU ROM.
2-27
(End marker error)

2-28
(Timeout)
 FCU defective
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker error
 Check the destination device.
The machine resets itself for a  If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
2-50
fatal FCU system error replace the FCU.
The machine resets itself

 If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
2-51 because of a fatal
replace the FCU.
communication error

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Snd msg() in the manual task
 The user did the same operation many
is an error because the
2-53 times, and this gave too much load to the
mailbox for the operation task
machine.
is full.
 Check the line connector.

4-01 Line current was cut  Check for line problems.
Communication failed
 Get the ID Codes the same and/or the
because of an ID Code
CSIs programmed correctly, and then
mismatch (Closed Network) or
4-10 resend.
Tel. No./CSI mismatch
 The machine at the other party may be
(Protection against Wrong
defective.
Connections)
Data reconstruction not

possible
5-10 DCR timer expired  Replace the FCU.
Storage impossible because

5-20  Temporary memory shortage.
of a lack of memory
 Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow
Print data error when printing  Test the SAF memory.

5-23 a substitute RX or confidential  Ask the other party to resend the
RX message message.
 Replace an SD card or HDD.

5-25 SAF file access error
G3 ECM - T1 time out during

6-00
reception of facsimile data
 Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer.
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was
received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was received

Error Codes

 Check for a bad line or defective remote
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected
terminal.

 Check for a bad line or defective remote
G3 ECM - facsimile data
terminal.
frame not received within 18 s
of CFR, but there was no line
 Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer
fail
Reference:
 RX cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
G3 ECM - coding/decoding  Defective FCU.

6-06
error  The other terminal may be defective.
 The other party pressed [Stop] during

G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in
6-08 communication.
reply to PPS.NULL
 The other terminal may be defective.
 Check for a noisy line.

 Adjust the TX levels of the communicating
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received
machines.
 See code 6-05.
 Check for line noise.

G3 ECM - error frames still  Adjust the TX level (use NCU parameter
received at the other party 01 or the dedicated TX parameter for that
6-10
after all communication address).
attempts at 2400 bps  Check the connection.
 Defective remote terminal.
V.21 flag detected during high  The other terminal may be defective or
6-21
speed modem communication incompatible.
The machine resets the  Check for line noise.

sequence because of an  If the same error occurs frequently, replace
6-22
abnormal handshake in the the FCU.
V.34 control channel  Defective remote terminal.

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
V.21 signal not stopped within
6s
 Double registration of the SIP user name.

SIP user name registration
13-17  Capacity for user-name registration in the
error
SIP server is not sufficient.
 Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.

13-18 SIP server access error
 Defective SIP server.
 Registered password in the device does

13-24 SIP authentication error
not match the password in the SIP server.
 IPV4 is not active in the active protocol

13-25 Network I/F setting error setting.
 IP address of the device is not registered.
 Active protocol setting does not match the

Network I/F setting error at
13-26 I/F setting for SIP server.
power on
 IP address of the device is not registered.
13-27 IP address setting error  IP address of the device is not registered.
 Error occurred during sending to the SMTP

server. Occurs for any error other than
14-00 SMTP Send Error 14-01 to 16. For example, the mail address
of the system administrator is not
registered.
 Failed to connect to the SMTP server

(timeout) because the server could not be
found.
 The PC is not ready to transfer files.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed
 SMTP server not functioning correctly.
 The DNS IP address is not registered.
 Network not operating correctly.
 Destination folder selection not correct.

Error Codes
 SMTP server operating incorrectly or the

destination for direct SMTP sending is not
correct.
 Contact the system administrator and
No Service by SMTP Service
14-02 check that the SMTP server has the
(421)
correct settings and operates correctly.
 Contact the system administrator for direct
SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.
 Failed to access the SMTP server because

the access is denied.
 SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Contact the system administrator to
determine if there is a problem with the
SMTP server and to check that the SMTP
server settings are correct.
 Folder send destination is incorrect.
Contact the system administrator to
Access to SMTP Server
14-03 determine that the SMTP server settings
Denied (450)
and path to the server are correct.
 Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the
user name and password settings are
correct.
 Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact
the system administrator to determine if
there is a problem at the destination and
that the settings at the destination are
correct.
 SMTP server operating incorrectly

Access to SMTP Server
14-04  Direct SMTP sending not operating
Denied (550)
correctly

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
the HDD on the server is full.
 Insufficient free space on the HDD of the
SMTP server. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the SMTP server
HDD.
 Insufficient free space on the HDD where
the destination folder is located. Contact
the system administrator and check the
amount of space remaining on the HDD
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full (452)
where the target folder is located.
 Insufficient free space on the HDD at the
target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator. Check
the amount of space remaining on the
target HDD or check if the mail size setting
is the default value (2MB).
 Check the size of the original data. For
example, if the original has too many
pages, the data size can be too big to
send.
 The designated user does not exist.

 The designated user does not exist on the
User Not Found on SMTP
14-06 SMTP server.
Server (551)
 The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.

the transmission failed.
 PC not operating correctly.
Data Send to SMTP Server  SMTP server operating incorrectly.
14-07
Failed (4XX)  Network not operating correctly.
 Destination folder setting incorrect.
 Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly.

Error Codes

the transmission failed.
 SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Data Send to SMTP Server
14-08  Destination folder setting incorrect.
Failed (5XX)
 Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly.
 Software application error.
 POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization

Authorization Failed for
14-09 failed.
Sending to SMTP Server
 Incorrect setting for file transfer
 Number of broadcast addresses exceeded

14-10 Addresses Exceeded
the limit for the SMTP server.
 The send buffer is full so the transmission

could not be completed. Buffer is full due
14-11 Buffer Full
to using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is
being used send mail at the same time.
 Transmission was cancelled because the

14-12 Data Size Too Large
detected size of the file was too large.
 Processing is interrupted because the user

14-13 Send Cancelled
pressed [Stop].
 Update the software because of the

14-14 Security Locked File Error
defective software.
 The transmitting a mail is interrupted via

DCS due to the incorrect data.
14-15 Mail Data Error
defective software.
 When a mail is divided for the mail

transmission and the division number of a
Maximum Division Number mail are more than the specified number,
14-16
Error the mail transmission is interrupted.
defective software.

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
14-17 Incorrect Ticket
defective software.
 The access to MCS file is denied due to

the no permission of access.
14-18 Access to MCS File Error
defective software.
 Make sure the administrator's e-mail

address is same as the SMTP
14-20 SMTP Authentication error
authentication address or POP before
SMTP address.
 Register the correct user certificate and

14-21 Transmission error of S/MIME
device certificate.
Failed to create the MCS file because:

 The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed
exceeded the limit.
 HDD is full or not operating correctly.
 Software error.
UFS file could not be created:

 Not enough space in UFS area to handle
both Scan-to-Email and IFAX
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed
transmission.
 HDD full or not operating correctly.
 Software error.
Cancelled the Mail Due to  Error detected with NFAX and send was
14-32
Error Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.
 Neither the mail address of the machine

No Mail Address For the
14-33 nor the mail address of the network
Machine
administrator is registered.

Error Codes
 Operational error in normal mail sending or

Address designated in the direct SMTP sending.
14-34 domain for SMTP sending  Check the address selected in the address
does not exist book for SMTP sending.
 Check the domain selection.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send

was cancelled:
14-50 Mail Job Task Error  Address book was being edited during
creation of the notification mail.
 Software error.
Not even one return notification can be

downloaded:
UCS Destination Download  The address book was being edited.
14-51
Error  The number for the specified destination
does not exist (it was deleted or edited
after the job was created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed  The cancel operation by the user failed.
Notification Mail Send Failed  All addresses for return notification mail
14-61
for All Destinations failed.
 When the 0 line page exists in received

Transmission Error due to the
14-62 pages with G3 communication, the
existence of zero line page
transmission is interrupted.
Check the followings.

 Name of SMTP server
 Port number of SMTP
 DNS setting
Fax Communication Unit:  Server name (FTP)
14-63
Transmission Error  Path name (computer name and shared
folder name at SMTP/ NCP)
 Active protocol setting (Netware/ NCP)
 NW flame type (NCP)
 Log-on mode (NDS tree/ bindery)

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Check the SMTP server.
 Check if the SMTP server works normally
- and is connected to the network.
 Check if the settings of the SMTP are
correct.
Check the DNS server.

 Check if the DNS server works normally
- and is connected to the network.
 Check if the settings of the DNS server are
correct.
Check the network.

-  Check if the LAN works normally.
 Check if the no firewall exists.
Check the destination folder for the data

transfer.
 Check if the destination folder works
-
normally.
 Check if the settings of the destination
folder are correct.
Ask an administrator of the direct SMTP server

in which the data is supposed to be transferred.
 Check if the destination SMTP server
-
works normally.
 Check if the settings of the destination
SMTP server are correct.
 At startup, the system detected that the IP

POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
15-01 address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has
Registered
not been registered in the machine.
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account  The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not

15-02
Information Not Registered been registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered  The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error  Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.

Error Codes
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be

found:
 The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4
15-11 Connection Error
server is not stored in the machine.
 The DNS IP address is not registered.
 Network not operating correctly.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

 Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
15-12 Authorization Error  Another device, such as the PC, attempted
access.
 POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
 Occurs only during manual reception.

Transmission cannot be received due to
15-13 Receive Buffer Full
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is
being used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
 The mail header is not standard format.

15-14 Mail Header Format Error For example, the Date line description is
incorrect.
 The e-mail is not in standard format. There

15-15 Mail Divide Error is no boundary between parts of the
e-mail, including the header.
 The mail cannot be received because it is

15-16 Mail Size Receive Error
too large.
 May occur during manual receiving only

15-17 Receive Timeout because the network is not operating
correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received  Only one portion of the mail was received.
Final Destination for Transfer

 The format of the final destination for the
15-31 Request Reception Format
transfer request was incorrect.
Error

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
The transmission cannot be delivered to the
final destination:
Send/Delivery Destination
15-39  Destination file format is incorrect.
Error
 Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
 Reception rejected because the

15-41 SMTP Receive Error transaction exceeded the limit for the
"Auth. E-mail RX" setting.
 The delivery destination address was

15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error
specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
 Format error in the address of the Off

15-43 Address Format Error
Ramp Gateway.
 The number of addresses for the Off Ramp

15-44 Addresses Over
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format Error  The attached file is not TIFF format.
Could not receive transmission due to:

 Resolution error
 Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi
without extended memory.
 Resolution is not supported.
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error
 Page size error
 The page size was larger than A3.
 Compression error
 File was compressed with other than MH,
MR, or MMR.
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not

be received because the TIFF header is
incorrect:
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error  The TIFF file attachment is a type not
supported.
 The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
 Software error.

Error Codes
The file received as an attachment caused the

TIFF decompression error:
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error  The TIFF format of the attachment is
corrupted.
 Software error.
 The file could not be received because the

15-71 Not Binary Image Data
attachment was not binary image data.
 The disposition line in the header of the

15-73 MDN Status Error Return Receipt could not be found, or
there is a problem with the firmware.
 Could not find the Original Message ID line

15-74 MDN Message ID Error in the header of the Return Receipt, or
there is a problem with the firmware.
 Could not receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and
the destination could not be created (this
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error
error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
 Could not repeat receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and
Repeated Destination the destination could not be created (this
15-81
Registration Error error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final

destination:
 The format of the final destination or the
15-91 Send Registration Error
transfer destination is incorrect.
 Destinations are full so the final and
transfer destinations could not be created.

Error Codes
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
 Transmission could not be received
15-92 Memory Overflow because memory overflowed during the
transaction.
 Transaction could not complete due to a

15-93 Memory Access Error
malfunction of SAF memory.
 The machine rejected an incoming e-mail

for transfer request, because the ID code
15-94 Incorrect ID Code
in the incoming e-mail did not match the ID
code registered in the machine.
 The machine rejected an incoming e-mail

15-95 Transfer Station Function for transfer because the transfer function
was unavailable.
 The machine does not get an IP address

because the DNS server has not been
registered for the remote machine or IP
address of the remote machine has not
16-00 No IP address registered
been registered.
 Register the DNS server for the remote
machine or configure an IP address of the
remote machine.
 Divide the original into more than one

page.
Original length exceeded the
22-00  Check the resolution used for scanning.
maximum scan length
Lower the scan resolution if possible.
 Add optional page memory.
 Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

 Delete unnecessary files from memory.
 Transfer the substitute reception files to
Memory overflow while
22-01 another fax machine, if the machine's
receiving
printer is busy or out of order.
 Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.

Error Codes
 The job started normally but did not finish

TX or RX job stalled due to
normally; data may or may not have been
22-02 line disconnection at the other
received fully.
party
 Restart the machine.
The machine cannot store  Update the ROM

22-04
received data in the SAF  Replace the FCU.
No G3 parameter confirmation
22-05  Defective FCU board or firmware.
answer
Data read timeout during  Restart the machine.

23-00
construction  Replace the FCU.
The machine software resets

 Update the ROM
25-00 itself after a fatal transmission
error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error  Replace the FCU.
 Update the SG3 modem ROM.

 Replace the SG3 board.
F6-xx SG3 modem error
 Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.

Fax Connection Unit Error Codes
3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
3.2.1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODE LIST
MACHINE_ERR_01
Error
Possible Causes Troubleshooting Procedures
Code
01(1) IPv4/IPv6 not enabled Enable IPv4 and IPv6
01(3) "Cancel" is pressed by user. -
01(4) A false connection ID is being used.

Check that the network is
Network is disconnected because of no established.
01(5)
response within a specified time.
 Either this machine or the machine

 Exit SP mode or initial settings.
at the other party has entered SP
01(14)  Wait until the connection has
mode or Initial settings.
finished.
 An established connection exists.
MACHINE_ERR_02
Error
Code
 Wrong IP address/host name was  Enter the correct IP

used. address/host name
 The main power of the other  Turn ON the main power.
02(5)
machine at destination is OFF.  Connect the LAN cable
 LAN cable is disconnected.  Wait until rebooting has
 Network is rebooting. finished.

MACHINE_ERR_03
Error
Code
Configure the user authentication

setting for client and remote
machines as follows:
 No user authentication (i.e.
Basic/Windows/LDAP/Custom Client Machine Remote Machine
Auth.) applies to fax application.
03 OFF OFF
 Settings other than user
authentication are applied to the fax ON OFF
application.
ON ON
MACHINE_ERR_04
Error
Code
 Register the same user to both

Although the same user is registered on
the remote machine and client
the remote machine and client machine,
04 machine.
the user name and login password do
 Make sure to match the
not match.
username and login password.
MACHINE_ERR_05
Error
Code
Authorize the user to use fax

05 An unauthorized user tried to connect.
connection.

MACHINE_ERR_06
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Error
Code
Adjust the value of SP5-741-001 to

06 Timeout error on the node authentication prolong the timeout for node
authentication.
MACHINE_ERR_07
Error
Code
On the client machine, execute

Multiple destinations are set in the client
07 SP5-801-021 to clear AICS
machine.
memory
MACHINE_ERR_08
Error
Code
 A client machine connects to  Connect to the remote

another client machine. machine.
08(1)  The client machine is not registered  Register the client machine to
on the remote machine as the remote machine as a
destinations. destination.
 A remote machine connects to  Connect to the client machine.

another Remote Machine.  Check the remote machine
08(2)
 The wrong remote machine is registered on the client
registered on the client machine. machine.

IFAX Troubleshooting
3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING
3.3.1 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication
Item Troubleshooting Procedures
Route
General LAN 1. Connection with  Check that the LAN cable is connected
the LAN to the machine.
 Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the

LAN can communicate through the LAN.
Between IFAX and 1. Network settings  Check the network settings on the PC.
PC on the PC  Check with the network administrator
for the IP address. (Is the IP address
registered in the TCP/IP properties in
the network setup correct?)
2. Check that PC Use the "ping" command on the PC to

can connect with the contact the machine.
machine At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the
IP address of the machine, then press
Enter.
3. LAN settings in  Check the LAN parameters

the machine  Check if there is an IP address conflict
with other PCs.
Use the "Network" function in the User
Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform
the administrator.

Communication
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Route
Between machine 1. LAN settings in  Check the LAN parameters

and e-mail server the machine  Check if there is an IP address conflict
with other PCs.
Use the "Network" function in the User
Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.
2. E-mail account on  Make sure that the machine can log

the server into the e-mail server.
 Check that the account and password
stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
Ask the administrator to check.
3. E-mail server Make sure that the client devices which

have an account in the server can
send/receive e-mail.
Send a test e-mail with the machine's own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.
Between e-mail 1. E-mail account on  Make sure that the PC can log into the
server and internet the Server e-mail server.
 Check that the account and password
stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.

Communication
Route
2. E-mail server Make sure that the client devices which

have an account in the server can
send/receive e-mail.
Send a test e-mail with the machine's own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.
3. Destination e-mail  Make sure that the e-mail address is

address actually used.
 Check that the e-mail address contains
no incorrect characters such as
spaces.
4. Router settings  Use the "ping" command to contact the

router.
 Check that other devices connected to
the router can sent data over the
router.
Ask the administrator of the server to
check.
5. Error message by  Check whether e-mail can be sent to

e-mail from the another address on the same network,
network of the using the application e-mail software.
destination.  Check the error e-mail message.
Inform the administrator of the LAN.

IP-Fax Troubleshooting
3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point Troubleshooting Procedures
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
2 Specified IP address/hostname correct? Check the IP address/host name.
3 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send

by another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.
5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.
6 Remote terminal port number setting other Send by specifying the port number.
than 1720 (when using H.323) or 5060
(when using SIP)?
7 Specified port number correct? Confirm the port number of the remote
fax.
8 DNS server registered when host name Contact the network administrator.
specified?
9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.
10 Remote fax switched off or busy? Check that the remote fax is ON.
11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to

increase the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.

(IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3)
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.

12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway
2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
5 Is the IP address/host name of the Check the IP address/host name.

specified Gateway correct?
6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.

9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
10 DNS registered when host name Contact the network administrator.

specified?
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned ON? Check that G3 fax is ON.

Raise the network delay level.

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.

FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Cannot send by Alias Fax number
2 Number of specified Alias fax correct? Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.
Error Code: 13-14

5 Gatekeeper/SIP server installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
6 Gatekeeper/SIP server power turned ON? Contact the network administrator.
7 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper/SIP Check the IP address/host name.

server correct?
8 DNS server registered when Contact the network administrator.

Gatekeeper/SIP server host name
specified?
9 Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to on? Check the settings.

See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW
34 Bit 1
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
11 Alias number of local fax registered? Register the Alias number of the local
fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.
15 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to


Raise the delay level.

Lower the modem transmission baud

rate.
(IPFAX SW 05)
16 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.
3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name
2 Firewall/NAT installed? The firewall cannot be breached. Send by

another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
4 Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
fax (if required)? number.
5 Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port
required)? number.
specified on sender side?
 The sender machine displays this
error code if the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.

Lower the start modem reception baud

rate on the receiving side.
(IPFAX SW06)

8 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
the transmission.
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power turned ON? Contact the network administrator.
5 IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
Gateway correct on sender's side? address/host name.
specified on sender side?

8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.
9 G3 fax power turned ON? Check that G3 fax is ON.
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number


3 Gatekeeper/SIP server installed Contact the network administrator.

correctly?
error code when the sender fax is
a Ricoh model.
4 Power to Gatekeeper/SIP server Contact the network administrator.

turned ON?
a Ricoh model.
5 IP address/host name of Request the sender to check the IP

Gatekeeper/SIP server correct on the address/host name.
sender's side?
a Ricoh model.
6 DNS server registered when Contact the network administrator.

Gatekeeper/SIP server host name
specified on sender's side?  The sender machine displays this
a Ricoh model.
7 Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW set to Request the sender to check the settings.
on? User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW 34 Bit 1
 Only if the remote sender fax is a

Ricoh fax.
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.

Lower the start modem reception baud rate

on the receiving side.
(IPFAX SW06)

11 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
the transmission.
12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper/SIP Contact the network administrator.

server?
a Ricoh model.

Service Program Tables
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
4.1.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)
1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settings for the
fax option
Refer to page 65 "Bit Switches - 1": "System
Switches".
102 Ifax Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for
the fax option
Refer to page 80 "Bit Switches - 2": "I-Fax Switches".
103 Printer Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax
option
Refer to page 80 "Bit Switches - 2": "Printer
Switches".
104 Communication Switch
001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings

for the fax option
Refer to page 95 "Bit Switches - 3": "Communication
Switches".
105 G3-1 Switch
001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of
the standard G3 board
Refer to page 105 "Bit Switches - 4": "G3 Switches".
111 IP fax Switch

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for optional IP fax
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
parameters
Refer to page 115 "Bit Switches - 5": "IP Fax
Switches".
4.1.2 SP2-XXX (RAM)
2 Mode No. Function
101 RAM Read/Write
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.

Refer to page 136 "Service RAM Addresses".
102 Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Dump Refer to page 136 "Service RAM Addresses".
103 G3-1 NCU Parameters
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3

board.
Refer to page 124 "NCU Parameters".

4.1.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET)
3 Mode No. Function
101 Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
102 Serial Number
000 Enter the fax unit's serial number.
103 PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If
the machine is installed on a PABX line, select
"PABX", "PABX (GND)" or "PABX (FLASH)".
002 PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
Number G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock Not used

Disabled
107 IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port Sets the H323 port number.
002 SIP Port Sets the SIP port number.
003 RAS Port Sets the RAS port number.
004 Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number.
005 T.38 Port Sets the T.38 port number.
006 SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number.
007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SIP".

Priority
201 FAX SW
001 – 032 00 – 1F

FAX OPTION
D255/D256
301 Fax:FlairAPI Setting
101 -
4.1.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)
4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
4.1.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR)
5 Mode No. Function
101 Initialize SRAM (except Secure)
000 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in
the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches (except Secure)
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
104 Factory Setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
SRAM and files in the SAF memory.
105 Reset All Bit Switches
000 Resets all the current bit switch settings.
106 Reset Security Bit Switches

000 Resets only the security bit switches. If you select automatic
output/display for the user parameter switches, the security
settings are initialized.
4.1.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)
6 Mode No. Function
101 System Parameter List
000 - Touch the "ON" button to print the system

parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 - Touch the "ON" button to print the service

monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all

Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
105 All Files print out
000 - Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,
including confidential messages.
 Do not use this function, unless the

customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication

records on the report.

002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
after the specified date.
107 Log List Print out
001 All log files These log print out functions are for designer
use only.
002 Printer
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3 CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
108 IP Protocol Dump List
001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all

communications for the IP fax line.
002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last

communication for the IP fax line.

4.1.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test

Bit Switches - 1
4.2 BIT SWITCHES - 1
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
 Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES
System Switch 00 (SP No. 1-101-001)
No Function Comments
0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated

parameter programming transmission parameters.
0: Disabled This setting is automatically reset to "0" after
1: Enabled turning off and on.
1 Not used Do not change this setting.
2 Technical data printout on the 1: Instead of the personal name, the following
journal data are listed in the journal for each G3
0: Disabled communication.
1: Enabled

Bit Switches - 1
Example:
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): RX level (see below for how to read the RX level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
 EQM and RX level are fixed at "FFFF" in TX mode.

 The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at "00" for transmission
records and ECM reception records.
RX level calculation
Example:
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the RX level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of
N by -16 to get the RX level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual RX level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
4 Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) printed on the printout if a line error occurs
during reception. This shows error locations
when ECM is turned off.
5 G3 communication parameter This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the

display key parameters (see "G3 Communication
0: Disabled Parameters" below this table). This is normally
1: Enabled disabled because it cancels the CSI display for
the user.
Be sure to reset this bit to "0" after testing.

Rev. 10/19/2016 Bit Switches - 1
6 Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
each communication troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
0: Off transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
1: On reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps

312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)

D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
⇒
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM

mode NML: With no ECM
Width and A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

reduction B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction

Bit Switches - 1
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line

5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
 "40" is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI

short protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.
2 Forced reset after transmission With this setting on, the machine resets itself
stalls automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to
0: Off complete the job.
1: On
3 Not used Do not change these settings.
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not
0: Depends on User Parameter be erased unless the communication is
24 [18(H)] successful.
1: No limit
5-7 - Do not change this setting

Bit Switches - 1
3 Printing dedicated TX 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
parameters on Quick/Speed printed with the dedicated TX parameters (10
Dial Lists bytes each).
0: Disabled The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
1: Enabled dedicated TX parameters; 34 bytes of data are
printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for
service technicians).
0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on page of confidential messages will be printed
the transmission result report on transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Print timing of communication 0: The Journal is printed only when image data
reports on the Journal when no is sent.
image data was exchanged. 1: The Journal is printed when any data is sent.
0: After DCS/NSS
communication (default),
1: After polling
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically
after failed communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report This can be used for detecting an error which
0: No 1: Yes occurs rarely.

Bit Switches - 1
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically

0: Disabled printed after the power is turned ON if a fax
1: Enabled (default) message disappeared from the memory when
the power was turned off last.
NOTE: If "0" is selected, no reports are printed
and no one may recognize that fax data is gone
due to a power failure.
6 Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when
protocol dump list system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a
1: Print only when there is a protocol dump list only for communications with
communication error errors.
NOTE: The memory size is limited. Use this bit
switch only when some log reports are
necessary.
System Switch 0A (SP No. 1-101-011)
0 Automatic port selection When "1" is selected, a suitable port is

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled automatically selected if the selected port is not
used.
NOTE: This bit is useful if all communication
lines at a customer site are not the same
quality
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad when 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while
the external telephone is the external telephone is off-hook. Use this
off-hook setting when the external telephone is not by
0: Disabled 1: Enabled the machine, or if a wireless telephone is
connected as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key
pad when the handset is off-hook.

Bit Switches - 1
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
6-7 Not used Do not change these settings
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E (SP No. 1-101-015)
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 Enable/disable for direct Direct sending cannot operate when the

sending selection capture function is on during sending. Setting
0: Direct sending off this switch to "1" enables direct sending without
1: Direct sending on capture.
Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct
sending function on the operation panel so
direct sending with ScanRouter cannot be
selected.
3 Action when the external 0: Manual TX is possible while the external

handset goes off-hook handset is off-hook. However, manual TX
0: Manual TX and RX operation during handset off-hook may not be sent to a
1: Memory TX and RX correct direction. Manual TX is not possible.
operation (the display remains 1: The display stays in standby mode even
the same) when the external handset is used, so that
other people can use the machine for memory
TX operation. Note that manual TX and RX are
not possible with this setting.

Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016)
0 Country/area code for functional This country/area code determines the

to settings (Hex) factory settings of bit switches and RAM
7 addresses. However, it has no effect on
00: France 12: Asia
the NCU parameter settings and
01: Germany 13: Japan communication parameter RAM
addresses.
02: UK 14: Hong Kong
Cross reference
03: Italy 15: South Africa NCU country code:
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
04: Austria 16: Australia
SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
05: Belgium 17: New Zealand SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
06: Denmark 18: Singapore
07: Finland 19: Malaysia
08: Ireland 1A: China
09: Norway 1B: Taiwan
0A: Sweden 1C: Korea
0B: Switz. 1D: Brazil
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: --- 24: Poland
11: USA

Bit Switches - 1
0-7 Threshold memory level for Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
parallel memory transmission N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints

0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
data important (G3 transmissions).
1: Printed before the data NOTE: If "1" is selected, it is possible that sent
leading edge data is printed on two sheets of paper.
3 TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected
0: The TTIs selected for each for all destinations during broadcasting.
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
0-7 TTI printing position in the main TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm

scan direction Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position
for the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the
TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
overwrite the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is
moved over by more than 50 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.

Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Going into the Energy Saver 1: The machine will restart from the Energy
mode automatically Saver mode quickly, because the +5V power
0: Enabled supply is active even in the Energy Saver
1: Disabled mode. The LED of the operation switch is
flashing instead of entering Energy Saver
mode.
Use this setting if an external telephone has to
be used when the machine is in the Energy
Saver mode.
4-5 Interval for preventing the If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
machine from entering Energy machine does not go to Energy Saver mode
Saver mode if there is a pending during the selected period.
transmission file. After transmitting the file, if there is no file
waiting for transmission, the machine goes to
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
the Energy Saver mode.
0 0 1 min
0 1 30 min
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
6-7 Not used Do not change

Bit Switches - 1
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
0 Parallel Broadcasting 1: The machine sends messages

0: Disabled simultaneously using all available ports during
1: Enabled broadcasting.
NOTE: If a customer wants to keep a line
available for fax reception or other reasons,
select "0" (Disable).
6 Extended scanner page 0: After installing the memory expansion option,

memory after memory option is the scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB
installed from 2 MB.
0: Disabled 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the
1: Enabled memory expansion option, the scanner page
memory is extended to 12 MB. But the SAF
memory decreases to 18 MB.
7* Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit

0: Disabled a form or letterhead which has a colored or
1: Enabled printed background, change this bit to "1".
"Original 1" and "Original 2" can be selected in
addition to the "Text", "Text/Photo" and "Photo"
modes.
* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.

Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 1A (SP No. 1-101-027)
0 LS RX memory capacity Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of

to threshold setting available memory drops below this setting, RX
7 00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Hex) documents are printed to conserve memory.
Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
 If a customer wants available memory

size to be larger, decrease this
threshold.
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D (SP No. 1-101-030)
0 RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the
0: Enable top line of the LCD panel during
1: Disable communication.
1: Codes are switched off (no display)
System Switch 1E (SP No. 1-101-031)

Bit Switches - 1
0 Communication after the 0: When this switch is on and the journal
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Journal data storage area has history becomes full, the next report prints. If
become full the journal history is not deleted, the next
0: Impossible transmission cannot be received. This prevents
1: Possible overwriting communication records before the
machine can print them.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
records for the Journal is full, fax
communications are still possible. But the
machine will overwrite the oldest
communication records.
 This setting is effective only when

Automatic Journal printout is enabled
but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
1* Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during
has become full during scanning for a memory transmission, the
scanning successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
0: The current page is erased. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
1: The entire file is erased. scanning for a memory transmission, the file is
erased and no pages are transmitted.
 This setting is effective only when

Automatic Journal printout is enabled
but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI,
0: RTI 1: CSI is displayed on the LCD while the machine is
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled NOTE: The file numbers may not be printed in
1: Disabled the sequential order. If a customer does not like
this numbering, select "0".

Bit Switches - 1
4 Action when authorized 0: If the user has stored no acceptable sender

reception is enabled but RTIs or CSIs, the user can select "ON" in the
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not authorized reception setting but the setting
yet programmed becomes invalid ("OFF"). The machine will not
0: All fax reception is disabled be able to receive any fax messages.
1: Faxes can be received if the If the customer wishes to receive messages
sender has an RTI or CSI from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI,
and to block messages from senders that do
not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to
"0", then enable Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at "1 (default setting)".
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings
System Switch 1F (SP No. 1-101-032)
1 Report printout after an original 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
jam during SAF storage or if the overflows during scanning, a report will be
SAF memory fills up printed.
0: Enabled Change this bit to "1" if the customer does not
1: Disabled want to have a report in these cases.
Memory TX – Memory storage report
Parallel memory TX – Transmission result
report
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately
(G3 reception) after the machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message
1: After receiving all pages after the machine receives all the pages in the
memory.
4-6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

Bit Switches - 1
7 Action when a fax SC has 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
occurred other than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit
0: Automatic reset automatically resets itself.
1: Fax unit stops 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code,
the fax unit stops.
Reference:
For fax SC codes, see "Troubleshooting".

Bit Switches - 2
4.3.1 I-FAX SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-102-001)
Original Width of TX Attachment File This setting sets the maximum size of the
original that the destination can receive. (Bits 3
to 6 are reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4 -
1 B4
2 A3
3-6 Reserved
7 Not used
0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the larger size has priority. For
example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to "1" then the maximum size is "A3" (Bit
2).
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width
selected with this switch is used as the RX machine's original width setting, and
the original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can
accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error.

Bit Switches - 2
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of

Attachment File the original that the destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard 0: Not selected

1: Selected
1 200x200 Detail
If more than one of these three bits is set to "1",
2 200x400 Fine the higher resolution has priority. For example,
if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" Then The
3 300 x 300 Reserve
Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
4 400 x 400 Super Fine
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
7 mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to
determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
 Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
 Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
 Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
 Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
 Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
 Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
 Images received in mm are converted to inches.

Bit Switches - 2
0 RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and
"Subject" address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.
This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their
intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms
the transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: "Dispatched"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "dispatched" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.
01: "Displayed"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "displayed" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00"
(for "dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than "displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.

Bit Switches - 2
4 Media accept feature
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used
7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The "1" setting requires installation of the Memory Unit in order to have enough
SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change these settings)
0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the
RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the
RTI or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in
the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to
determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.

Bit Switches - 2
1 Subject corresponding to mail post database

0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the
following three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP
server
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
 This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up
for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and
when operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving
transmissions).
2-7 Not Used
0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive

transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a
broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1 IFAXTX Retries
Determines whether the machine retries sending IFAX when connection and
transmission fails due to errors.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2 Size Setting: Tiff: Mail/Folder

Bit Switches - 2
Enables or disables a function to adjust the file size in the main scan direction
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
when sending a TIFF file to e-mail destination or folder destination.
0: OFF (Disable)
1: ON (Enable)
3-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF
stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and
also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of
SAF memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received;
received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount
of memory.
4-7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries

when connection and transmission fails due to
errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Bit Switches - 2
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0D (SP No. 1-102-014)
2-3 Select the signature when sending mail In response to IEEE2600.1.

notification of the send results
Bit 2 Bit 3 Setting
0 0 No sign
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
4-5 Select the signature when sending mail. In response to IEEE2600.1.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 No sign
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0F (SP No. 1-102-016)
0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

Bit Switches - 2
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
or output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1 Set to select the signature when receiving SMTP mail.
0: No sign
1: Always sign
2 Set to encrypt the data when receiving SMTP mail.
0: No encryption
1: Encryption
3-7 Not used
4.3.2 PRINTER SWITCHES
Printer Switch 00 (SP No. 1-103-001)
0 Select page separation marks 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is

0: Off printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page
1: On and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner
of the 2nd page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two
pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom
right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is
printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
 This helps the user to identify pages that

have been split because the size of the
paper is smaller than the size of the
document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)

Bit Switches - 2
1 Repetition of data when the 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the

received page is longer than previous page are repeated at the top of the next
the printer paper page.
0: Off 0: The next page continues from where the
1: On previous page stopped without any repeated text.
2 Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter
received fax messages 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
0: Disabled received fax messages) is enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed
date and time at the bottom of each received
page.
7 Received message width 0: The machine informs the transmitting

restriction in the protocol signal machine of the print width depending on the
to the sender paper size available from the paper feed
0: Disabled stations.
1: Enabled Refer to the table on the next page for how the
machine chooses the paper width used in the
setup protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: The machine informs the transmitting
machine of the fixed paper width which is
specified by bits 3 and 4 above.
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width

Bit Switches - 2
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
0* 1st paper feed station usage for 0: The paper feed station can be used to print
fax printing fax messages and reports.
0: Enabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be
1: Disabled used for printing fax messages and reports.
1* 2nd paper feed station usage

 Do not disable usage for a paper feed
for fax printing
station which has been specified by
0: Enabled
User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or
1: Disabled
which is used for the Specified
2* 3rd paper feed station usage for Cassette Selection feature.
fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3* 4th paper feed station usage for

fax printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4* LCT usage for fax printing

0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Bit Switches - 2
0* Length reduction of received 0: Incoming pages are printed without length

data reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03,
1: Enabled bits 4 to 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when
printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches
04, bits 0 to 4)
4 Page separation setting when Page separation threshold (with reduction

to sub scan compression is disabled with switch 03-0 above).
7 forbidden For example, if this setting is set to "10", and
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) A4 is the selected paper size:
Default: 6 mm If the received document is 10 mm or less
longer than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and
only 1 page prints.
If the received document is 10 mm longer than
A4, then the document is split into 2 pages.
0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
to above.
4 [Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + (N x 5mm)
"N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm

Bit Switches - 2
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has
6 taken place.
Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting
0 0 4 mm
0 1 10 mm
1 0 15 mm
1 1 Not used
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
0* Printing while a paper cassette Reference:

is pulled out, when the Just Size Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
Printing feature is enabled.
0: Printing will not start
1: Printing will start if another
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.

Bit Switches - 2
4 Receiver name printed on the Selects the printing target on the transmission
transmission result report result report.
0: All receivers
1: Printing only receivers which have received
fax transmission.
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E (SP No. 1-103-015)
0* Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width
0: Width as the received data is selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length
to print all the received lines without
reduction is selected first.
1* Paper size selected for printing A4 This switch determines which paper size
width fax data is selected for printing A4 width fax data,
0: 8.5" x 11" size when the machine has both A4 and 8.5" x
1: A4 size 11" size paper.
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require

0: Enabled page separation to print a received fax
1: Disabled message, the machine does not print the
message (Substitute Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a
cassette, the machine automatically
prints the fax message.
3-4 Printing the sample image on reports "Same size" means the sample image is

Bit Switches - 2
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting printed at 100%, even if page separation
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
occurs.
0 0 The upper half only
User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4
0 1 50% reduction must be set to "0" to enable this switch.
(sub-scan only)
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio among 0: When page separation has taken
separated pages place, all the pages are reduced with the
(Page Separation) same reduction ratio.
0: Enabled 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the
1: Disabled selected paper size when page
separation has taken place. Other pages
are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F (SP No. 1-103-016)
0-1* Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the

machine receives halftone images from
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
other manufacturers fax machines
0 0 Disabled frequently.
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2* Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received

0: Disabled fax messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled

Bit Switches - 2
3 Binding direction for Duplex printing 0: Sets the binding for the left edge of
0: Left binding the stack.
1: Top binding 1: Sets the binding for the top of the
stack.

Bit Switches - 3
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
4.4.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
Communication Switch 00 (SP No. 1-104-001)
0-1 Compression modes available in receive These bits determine the

mode compression capabilities to be
declared in phase B (handshaking)
Bit 1 Bit 0 Modes
of the T.30 protocol.
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
2-3 Compression modes available in transmit These bits determine the

mode compression capabilities to be used
in the transmission and to be
Bit 3 Bit 2 Modes
declared in phase B (handshaking)
0 0 MH only of the T.30 protocol.
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

Bit Switches - 3
5 JBIG compression method: Reception Change the setting when

0: Only basic supported communication problems occur
1: Basic and optional both supported using JBIG compression.
6 JBIG compression method: Transmission Change the setting when

0: Basic mode priority communication problems occur
1: Optional mode priority using JBIG compression.
7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the

0: Disabled polling ID code of the remote
1: Enabled terminal does not match the polling
ID code of the local terminal. This
function is only available in
NSF/NSS mode.
0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

0: Off 1: On communications.
In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression
are switched off automatically.
2-3 Wrong connection prevention (0,1): The machine will disconnect the line
method without sending a fax message, if the last 8
digits of the received CSI do not match the last
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This
0 0 None does not work when manually dialed.
(1,0): The same as above, except that only the
0 1 8 digit CSI
last 4 digits are compared.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,1): The machine will disconnect the line
without sending a fax message, if the other end
1 1 CSI/RTI

Bit Switches - 3
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
(0,0): Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
 This function does not work when

dialing is done from the external
telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
6-7 Maximum printable page length The setting determined by these bits is
available informed to the transmitting terminal in the
pre-message protocol exchange (in the
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364 mm)
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used
0 G3 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in

0: Low 1: High the received page than the threshold, the
machine will send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values
depend on the sub-scan resolution, and
are as follows.
100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)
200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)
300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)
400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)
1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the
0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the
other end.

Bit Switches - 3
2 Treatment of pages received with 0: Pages received with errors are not
errors during G3 reception printed.
0: Deleted from memory without
printing
1: Printed
3 Hang-up decision when a negative 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN
code (RTN or PIN) is received or PIN is received.
during G3 immediate transmission 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up if it receives RTN or PIN.
This bit is ignored for memory
transmissions or if ECM is being used.
0-7 Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.

retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
0 Remote mode switch (TEL mode) Set this bit to ON when you wish to switch
0: Disable TEL mode to FAX mode remotely.
1: Enable (Active)
1 Remote mode switch (FAX mode) Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on
0: Disable the remote mode switch after automatic
1: Enable (Active) reception with FAX mode.
2 Remote mode switch (AUTO mode) Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on
0: Disable the remote mode switch after automatic
1: Enable (Active) reception with AUTO mode.

Bit Switches - 3
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
0-3 Remote mode switch number Enter the number to switch between
00-09 (0-9:HEX) TEL/FAX modes using the external phone.
Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
0-7 Minimum interval between This value is the minimum time that the
automatic dialing attempts machine waits before it dials the next
destination.
Communication Switch 0A (SP No. 1-104-011)
0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page

transmission upon redialing where transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page,
1: From page 1 using normal memory transmission.
Communication Switch 0B (SP No. 1-104-012)

Bit Switches - 3
4 Printout of the message when When the machine is acting as a Transfer

acting as a Transfer Station Station, this bit determines whether the
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled machine prints the fax message coming in
from the Requesting Terminal.
Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0D (SP No. 1-104-014)
0-7 The available memory 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 Kbytes

threshold, below which ringing (e.g., 06(H) = 24 Kbytes)
detection (and therefore One page is about 24 Kbytes.
reception into memory) is The machine refers to this setting before each fax
disabled reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
any fax messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E (SP No. 1-104-015)
0-7 Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s

automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)

Bit Switches - 3
0-7 Memory transmission: 01 – FE (Hex) times
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Maximum number of dialing
attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
0-7 Memory transmission: Interval 01 – FF (Hex) minutes

between dialing attempts to the
same destination
Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data

transmission scanned in inch format are transmitted
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in
the SAF memory in mm format are
transmitted without conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data
into SAF memory, the fax unit always
converts the data into mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned
data or stored data in the SAF memory
to the format which was specified in the
set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

Bit Switches - 3
6-7 Available unit of resolution in which fax For the best performance, do not change
messages are received the factory settings.
The setting determined by these bits is
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit
informed to the transmitting terminal in
0 0 mm the pre-message protocol exchange (in
the DIS/NSF frames).
0 1 inch
1 0 mm and inch
1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)
1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to 1 when installing the first
0: Not installed optional G3 unit.
1: Installed
2 Not used
3 Select PSTN connection This switch enables the G3-2.

0: Off 0: Off, no connection
1: On 1: Recognizes and enables G3-2.
This switch can be used only after G3-2 has been
installed.
0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker's

0: Disabled machine using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal
1: Enabled is disabled.

Bit Switches - 3
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker's
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD

0: Disabled (Password) signal reception.
1: Enabled
5 PSTN dial-in routing setting 1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in
0: OFF numbers in the PSTN dial-in line and transfers
1: ON received data from each PSTN dial-in number to
each address.
7 Action when there is no box Change this setting when the customer requires.
with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
5 IP-Fax dial-in routing selection 1: Transfers received data to each IP-Fax dial-in
0: Off number.
1: On IP-Fax dial-in number is a 4-digit number.
6 PSTN 2 dial-in routing Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 2
0: Off connection.
1: On
7 PSTN 3 dial-in routing Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 3
0: Off connection.
1: On

Bit Switches - 3
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B (SP No. 1-104-028)
0-7 Extension access code (0 to 7) If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off procedure, set this bit to "1" to disable V.8.
0: On Example: If "0" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
1: Off to 1. When the machine detects "0" as the first
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (Alternatively, if "3" is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C (SP No. 1-104-029)
0-1 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B.

9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If "8" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
0: On to 1. When the machine detects "8" as the first
1: Off dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
protocol. (If "9" is the PSTN access code, use bit
1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

Bit Switches - 4
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
4.5.1 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-105-001)
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all
1 communication (TX and RX) through the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
phase B in the T.30 protocol.
0 0 Disabled (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor
speaker is on all through the
0 1 Up to Phase B
communication. Make sure that you reset
1 0 All the time these bits after testing.
1 1 Not used
2 Monitor speaker during memory 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during

transmission memory transmission.
6 Dedicated G3 line mode selection Set this bit to 1 when you wish to dedicate a
0: Off 1: On (Dedicated) line for G3.
G3 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-105-002)

Bit Switches - 4
4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
6 Forbid CED/ANsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off),

0: Off unless communication problem is caused by a
1: On (Forbid output) CED or ANSam transmission.
G3 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-105-003)
0 G3 protocol mode used Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can
0: Standard and non-standard only communicate with machines that send
1: Standard only T.30-standard frames only.
1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile

0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
G3 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-105-004)
0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the

(Echo countermeasure) same DIS frame twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
1: 2 the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
line.
1 Not Used Do not change the settings.

Bit Switches - 4
2 Not Used Do not change the settings.
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

0: After one PPR signal mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
received modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
1: After four PPR signals condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
received (ITU-T standard) 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine's TX modem rate will fall back
page after receiving a negative before sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN) received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not used Do not change the settings
7 Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in

polarity in ringing ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
0: Off ringing). Do not change this setting
1: On 0: No detection
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-105-005)

Bit Switches - 4
0-3 Training error detection 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
G3 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-105-006)
0-3 Initial Tx modem rate (kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem
rate for transmission.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps
Use the dedicated transmission
0 0 0 1 2.4 parameters if you need to change this for
specific receivers.
0 0 1 0 4.8
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 0 1 1 7.2 selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
manually.
0 1 0 0 9.6
Cross reference
0 1 0 1 12.0 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
0 1 1 0 14.4
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
1 1 1 0 33.6
Other settings - Not used
4-5 Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps. These bits set the initial modem type for
9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting

Bit Switches - 4
0 0 V.29 is set at these speeds.
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
G3 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-105-007)
0-3 Initial RX modem rate(kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem
rate for reception.
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
0 0 0 1 2.4 problems during reception.
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 0 1 0 4.8
selected, V.8 protocol should be
0 0 1 1 7.2 disabled manually.
Cross reference
0 1 0 0 9.6
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 0 1 12.0
0 1 1 0 14.4
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
1 1 1 0 33.6

Bit Switches - 4
4-7 Modem types available for reception

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17, V.34
G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008)
0-1 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss
(TX mode: Internal) at higher frequencies because of the
length of wire between the modem and
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission
parameters for specific receivers.
0 1 Low
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one
1 0 Medium or more of the following symptoms
occurs.
1 1 High
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
 This setting is not effective in

V.34 communications.
2-3 PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss
(RX mode: Internal) at higher frequencies because of the

Bit Switches - 4
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting length of wire between the modem and
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
the telephone exchange.
0 0 None
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one
0 1 Low or more of the following symptoms
occurs.
1 0 Medium
Communication error with error codes
1 1 High such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
 This setting is not effective in

V.34 communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at "1".

(V.8/V.17 RX mode: External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
6 Parameter selection for dial tone 0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM
detection for dial tone detection.
0: Normal parameter 1: This uses the specific parameter
1: Specific parameter adjusted with SRAM (69ECBEH -
69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone
cannot be detected when the "Normal
parameter: 0" is selected.
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-105-011)
0-1 Maximum allowable carrier drop These bits set the acceptable modem
during image data reception carrier drop time.

Bit Switches - 4
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
frequent.
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
2 Select cancellation of high-speed RX This switch setting determines if

if carrier signal lost while receiving high-speed receiving ends if the carrier
0: Off signal is lost when receiving during
1: On non-ECM mode
3 Not used Do not change the settings
4 Maximum allowable frame interval This bit set the maximum interval
during image data reception. between EOL (end-of-line) signals and
0: 5 s 1: 13 s the maximum interval between ECM
frames from the other end.
Try using a longer setting if error code
0-21 is frequent.
6 Reconstruction time for the first line in When the sending terminal is controlled
receive mode by a computer, there may be a delay in
0: 6 s 1: 12 s receiving page data after the local
machine accepts set-up data and sends
CFR. This is outside the T.30
recommendation. But, if this delay
occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the
sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 5 s of CFR.
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 0C (SP No. 1-105-013)
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
4-5 Select detection of DTMF/DP This setting determines how to detect the
detection when using remote signals from the handset when remote switch is
switch. active.
00: DTMF+PSTN
(Simultaneous detection)
01: DTMF
10: DP (10 PPPS)
11: DP (20 PPS)
G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-015)
0-7 Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the
3-second CNG interval.
High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms

3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= FF (2250
ms)
Low order bit 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms

3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= 0F (3700
ms)
G3 Switch 0F (SP No. 1-105-016)

Bit Switches - 4
0 Alarm when an error occurred If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
in Phase C or later error communication, change this bit to "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
off-hook at the end of handset is off-hook at the end of fax
communication communication, change this bit to "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
4 Manual calibration setting 1: manually calibrates for communication with a

0: Off line whose current change occurs such as an
1: On optical fiber line.

Bit Switches - 5
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
4.6.1 IP FAX SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-111-001)
No. Function Comments
IP Fax Transport Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax

1
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection Selects single data port.

2
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
3 port) selection
IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.

4
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse Reverses the T30 bit signal.
5
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
IP Fax max bit rate setting When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does
0: Not affected, 1: Affected not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
When "1" is selected, the max bit rate
affects the value of the DIS/DCS.

Bit Switches - 5
IP Fax received telephone number When "0" is selected, fax data is received
confirmation without checking the telephone number.
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation When "1" is selected, fax data is received
only when confirming that the telephone
7
number from the sender matches the
registered telephone number in this
machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.
IP Fax delay level setting

Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
Default is "0000" (level 0).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0-3
0 0 0 0 Level 0
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary
4-7 switch combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

Bit Switches - 5
0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
0: Maker code setting method is decided by the maker code.
1: Internal bit switch setting When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
1 IP Fax transmission speed setting Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
0: Modem speed communication.
1: No limitation
2 SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has
0: TCP priority for receiving IP Fax data.
1: UDP This function is activated only when the
sender has both TCP and UDP.
3 CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection

0: No CCM connection call message with H.323 or no tunneled
1: CCM connection H.245 is transmitted via CCM.
4 Message reception selection from 0: This answers the INVITE message from
non-registered SIP server the SIP server not registered for the
0: Answer machine.
1: Not answer 1: This does not receive the INVITE
message from the SIP server not registered
for the machine and send a refusal
message.
5 ECM communication setting 0: This does not limit the type of the image
0: No limit for image compression compression with ECM communication.
1: Limit for image compression 1: When the other end machine is Ciscco,
this permits the image compression other
than JBIG or MMR with ECM
communication.

Bit Switches - 5
0 Effective field limitation for G3 Limits the effective field for standard G3
standard function information function information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1 Switching between G3 standard Enables/disables switching between G3

and G3 non standard standard and G3 non-standard.
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
3 ECM frame size selection at Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4 DIS detection times for echo Sets the number of times for DIS to detect
prevention echoes.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5 CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission

0: PPRx1 condition is decided by error frame
1: PPRx4 numbers.
When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.
6 Shift down setting at receiving Selects whether to shift down when

negative code negative codes are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON
0-3 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f]
The default is "1111" (0fH).

Bit Switches - 5
Modem bit rate setting for transmission Sets the modem bit rate for
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
(kbps) transmission. The default is "0110"
(14.4K bps).
0 0 0 1 2.4
0-3 0 0 1 1 4.8
0 0 1 1 7.2
0 1 0 0 9.6
0 1 0 1 12.0
0 1 1 0 14.4
Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem type for

transmission.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Types
The default is "00" (V29).
0 0 V29
4-5
0 1 V17
1 0 Not used
1 1 Not used
Modem bit rate setting for reception

0-3
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types

4-7
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33

Bit Switches - 5
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33
0 TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to

0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).
1 DCN transmission setting at T1 Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1

timeout timeout.
0: Not transmitted
1: Transmitted
3 Hang up setting at DIS reception Sets whether the machine disconnects after
disabled DIS reception.
0: No hang up
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4 Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times at the same bit rate.
5 Space CSI transmission setting at When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
no CSI registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted all spaces.
1: Transmitted
0-1 T1 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer.

The default is "00" (35 seconds).
Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 35 s
0 1 40 s

Bit Switches - 5
1 0 50 s
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
1 1 60 s
2-3 T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer.

The default is "00" (3 seconds).
Bit 3 Bit 2
0 0 3s
0 1 3.5 s
1 0 4s
1 1 5s
4-5 T0 timer adjustment Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets
the interval between "setup" data
Bit 5 Bit 4
transmission and T.38 phase decision. If
0 0 75 s your destination return is late on the
network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
0 1 120 s
longer interval timer.
1 0 180 s The default is "00" (75 seconds).
1 1 240 s
0 Network I/F setting for SIP Selects the connection type (IPV4 or IPV6)
connection to connect to the SIP server.
0: IPv4
1: IPv6.
1 Network I/F setting for Fax 0: The I/F setting for fax communication
communication follows the setting for SIP server
0: Same setting as SIP server connection.
connection 1: The negotiation between the SIP server
1: Automatic setting and the device decides whether IPv4 or
IPv6 is used for the I/F setting for fax
communication.

Bit Switches - 5
2 Record-route setting 0: Disables the record-route function of the

0: Disable SIP server.
1: Enable 1: Enables the record-route function of the
SIP server.
3-4 re-INVITE transmission delay timer This changes the interval for transmit
setting re-INVITE after receiving the ACK message
transmitted by T.38 device.
Bit 4 Bit 3
0 0 No delay
0 1 1 sec
1 0 2 sec
1 1 3 sec
5 SIP-IPFAX: Adding vender 0: Use this setting normally.

information selection 1: This setting is used only when a
0: Declare T38VendorInfo=RICOH customer wants to connect the machine
1: Not declare with SIP server + VOIP-GW provided by
T38VendorInfo=RICOH AVAYA Inc.
6-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0E (SP No. 1-111-013)
0-1 SIP: IP-FAX port mode (UDP) Switch the port mode for IP-FAX (T38
00: 3 port mode transport: UDP) at SIP call control.
01: 2 port mode
10: 1 port mode

Bit Switches - 5
2-3 SIP: IP-FAX port mode (TCP) Switch the port mode for IP-FAX (T38
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
00: 3 port mode transport: TCP) at SIP call control.
01: 2 port mode
10: 1 port mode
4-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.

NCU Parameters
4.7 NCU PARAMETERS
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each
country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some
can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103); if SP2-103 can be used, this will
be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is
included in the Unit column.
 The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.
# RAM Addr. Function Remarks
CC 680500 Country/Area code for NCU Use the Hex value to program the
parameters country/area code directly into
this address, or use the decimal
value to program it using
SP2-103-001
Country Code List
Country Decimal Hex Country Decimal Hex

/Area /Area
France 00 00 Asia 18 12
Germany 01 01 Japan 19 13
UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14
Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15
Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16
Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17
Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18
Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19
Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A
Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B

NCU Parameters
Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D
# RAM Function Unit Remarks

Addr.
01 6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm SP2-103-002
02 680572 Acceptable ringing signal 1000/ N SP2-103-003

frequency: range 1, upper limit (Hz).
03 680573 Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-004

frequency: range 1, lower limit

frequency: range 2, upper limit

frequency: range 2, lower limit
06 680576 Number of rings until a call is SP2-103-007

detected 1 The setting must not
be zero.
07 680577 Minimum required length of the first See Note B.

20 ms
ring SP2-103-008
08 680578 Minimum required length of the SP2-103-009

20 ms
second and subsequent rings
09 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-010

20 ms
(LOW)
10 68057A Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011

(HIGH)
11 68054A Time between opening or closing See Notes A, D and

the DO relay and opening the 1 ms E. SP2-103-012
OHDI relay
12 68054B Break time for pulse dialing See Note A.

1 ms
SP2-103-013

NCU Parameters
13 68054C Make time for pulse dialing See Note A.

1 ms
SP2-103-014
14 68054D Time between final OHDI relay EU only.

closure and DO relay opening or SP2-103-015
1 ms
closing See Notes A, D and
E.
15 68054E Minimum pause between dialed See Note A and E.

20 ms
digits (pulse dial mode) SP2-103-016
16 68054F Time waited when a pause is SP2-103-017

entered at the operation panel See Note A.
17 680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018
18 680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019
19 680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 SP2-103-020

signals while dialing –3.5 dBm See Note C.
20 680553 Tone attenuation value difference SP2-103-021

between high frequency tone and The setting must be
low frequency tone in DTMF less than –5dBm,
signals -dBm x 0.5 and should not
exceed the setting
at 680552h above.
See Note C.
21 680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation -N x 0.5 SP2-103-022

level after dialling –3.5 dBm See Note C.
22 680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level See Note C

-dBm x 0.5
after dialling
 A: Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20
pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.
 B: The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by
this parameter.
 C: The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:

NCU Parameters
– 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
FAX OPTION
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
D255/D256
Low frequency tone:
– 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
*Note: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
 D: 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing
and Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and
Di closing
 E: 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of
the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.

Dedicated Transmission Parameters
4.8 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated
to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal's fax
number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
4.8.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Press the [Address Book Management] icon in the home screen.
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. For the fax parameter, select [Fax Dest.], for the E-mail parameter, select [Email], then press
[Start].
5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to
change.
 To scroll through the parameter switches, press [Next] or [Previous].

6. After the setting is changed, press [OK].
7. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
4.8.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF (H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

Switch 01
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-4 TX level If communication with a particular

remote terminal often contains
Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
errors, the signal level may be
0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the TX level for
communications with that terminal
0 0 0 0 1 –1
until the results are better.
0 0 0 1 0 –2 If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU
parameter 01 setting is used.
0 0 0 1 1 –3
0 0 1 0 0 –4  Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
0 1 1 1 1 –15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
5-7 Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None loss at higher frequencies because
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low of the length of wire between the
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium modem and the telephone exchange
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High when calling the number stored in
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled this Quick/Speed Dial.
Also, try using the cable equalizer if
one or more of the following
symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error
codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs
frequently.
 Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit
switch setting is used.
Switch 02

0-3 Initial TX modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal

always takes too long, the initial modem rate
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps
may be too high. Reduce the initial TX
0 0 0 0 Not used modem rate using these bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch
0 0 0 1 2400
04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0 0 1 0 4800
 Do not use settings other than listed
0 0 1 1 7200
on the left. If the setting is
0 1 0 0 9600 "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
0 1 0 1 12000
0 1 1 0 14400
0 1 1 1 16800
1 0 0 0 19200
1 0 0 1 21600
1 0 1 0 24000
1 0 1 1 26400
1 1 0 0 28800
1 1 0 1 31200
1 1 1 0 33600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used
Switch 03

0-1 Inch-mm conversion before If "inch only" is selected on the machine uses
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
TX inch-based resolutions for scanning, the printed
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
= Inch-mm conversion that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
available If the setting is "Inch-mm conversion available ",
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only Inch-mm conversion become effective to the
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not used special senders.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
2-3 DIS/NSF detection method (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
= First DIS or NSF transmission. The machine will then wait for the
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
= Second DIS or NSF If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not used used.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = Disabled
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always

0: Off end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
1: Disabled disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
5 Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
in transmit mode informed to the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
6-7 ECM during transmission For example, if ECM is switched on but is not
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On the (0, 0) setting.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not used
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Disabled  V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
are automatically disabled if ECM is
disabled.
 If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
setting is used.

Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
0 MH Compression mode Switches MH compression on and off for files

for e-mail attachments attached to e-mails for sending.
0: Off
1: On
1 MR Compression mode Switches MR compression on and off for files

0: Off
1: On
2 MMR Compression mode Switches MMR compression on and off for files
0: Off
1: On
7 Designates the bits to The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
reference for Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
compression method of selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
e-mail attachments
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.

FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Switch 01
0 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
attachment: A4 A4.
0: Off
1: On
attachment: B4 B4.
0: Off
1: On
attachment: A3 A3.
0: Off
1: On
reference for original size Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
of e-mail attachments selections of Bit 00.
1: No registration.
Switch 02
0 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
attachment: 200 x 100 200 x100.
0: Off
1: On
attachment: 200 x 200 200 x 200.
0: Off
1: On

attachment: 200 x 400 200 x 400.
0: Off
1: On
3 Not used Do not change these settings.
attachment: 400 x 400 400 x 400.
0: Off
1: On
reference for original size Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores
of e-mail attachments the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
Switch 04
0 Full mode address If the other ends have the addresses, which have
selection the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine
0: Full mode address determines them as full mode standard machines.
1: No full mode (simple  This machine attaches the "demand of reception
mode) confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
 This machine updates the reception capability to
the address book when receiving.
Switch 05

0 Directr transmission Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
selection to SMTP server SMTP server.
0: ON
1: OFF

Service RAM Addresses
4.9 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
4.9.1 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
 Do not change the settings that are marked as "Not used" or "Read only."
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) – Machine's serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680016(H) - Language code
0: Japanese, 1: UK English, 2: US English, 3: French, 4: German, 5: Spanish, 6: Italian, 7: Dutch,
8: Swedish, 9: Norwegian, 10: Danish, 11: Finnish, 12: Czech, 13: Hungarian, 14: Polish, 15:
Portuguese, 16: Russian, 17: Traditional Chinese, 18: Simplified Chinese, 19: Korean
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00): Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01): Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Not used
FAX OPTION
Bit 7: Not used
D255/D256
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender's name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute RX when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end,
toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Specify the order of the information shown under "Destination" in the Journal, the Immediate
TX Result Report, and on the [Transmission File Status] screen for fax transmission.
Bit 1: V8 protocol (G3-1: Super G3) 0: Off, 1: On


Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1:
On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log)
– up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is
pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Not used

6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not
available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the "Add" button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for
broadcasting 0: Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press "Start" key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,
0: displays "Cannot detect original size". 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Japan only
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait TX (This switch is not printed on the user parameter
list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E
bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off,
1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory, which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error
occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1: PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used

6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: Do not Change this Bit.
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not
used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C): Not used
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D): Not used
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not
used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4.
Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Redial interval when sending a backup file
Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file
Bit 0: Whether to stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the
machine is sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file. 0: No, • 1: Yes
Bit 2 and 3: Backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report when a backup
file transmission failure occurs. 00: Do not print, 01: Print first page only, 10: Print whole file
Bit 4: Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations to plain
characters only. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 6: When using the remote fax function, the sub-machine beeps to let you know when it has
printed a received document (If you specify "On", the machine will beep according to the setting of
[Panel Key Sound] under [System Settings].) 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 7: Not used
Maximum number of transmissions the machine attempts before determining that a fax cannot be
forwarded from a sender (including special senders) to a folder destination
Interval (in minutes) between resend attempts after failing to forward a fax from a sender
(including special senders) to a folder destination
Bit 0: When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes,
creating memory space for storage of new faxes. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1 to 7: Not used
6800FD(H) - User parameter switch 45 (SWUSR_2D)
Bit 0 and 1:
Bit 2: File format for files transmitted to e-mail addresses and folders registered as forwarding,
destinations of backup file transmission, receivers for Personal Box, or end receivers for Transfer
Box. 0: PDF 1: PDF/A
Bit 3:
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801A3(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
6801A4 to 6801B7(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
6801B8 to 6801CB(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
6801CF to 68020E(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68020F to 68024E(H) - TTI 2
68024F to 68028E(H) - TTI 3
68028F to 6802CE(H) - TTI 4
6802CF to 68030E(H) - TTI 5
68030F to 68034E(H) - TTI 6
68034F to 68038E(H) - TTI 7
68038F to 6803CE(H) - TTI 8
6803CF to 68040E(H) - TTI 9
68040F to 68044E(H) - TTI 10

FAX OPTION
 If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a stop
D255/D256
code (00[H]) after the last character.
68044F(H)
Printing format for TTI 1
0: DOM (Japan), 1:EXP (Export)
680450(H)
0: DOM, 1: EXP
680451(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680452(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680453(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680454(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680455(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680456(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680457(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680458(H)
0: DOM, 1: EXP
680459 to 68046C(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68046D to 680480(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680481 to 680494(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680495(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)

6804C6(H) - Memory Lock ID (BCD)

6804D2 to 6804D9(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
6804D2(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
6804D3(H) - Year (BCD)
6804D4(H) - Month (BCD)
6804D5(H) - Day (BCD)
6804D6 (H) – Hour
6804D7 (H) – Minute
6804D8(H) – Second
6804D8 (H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ///, 06: Sunday
6804E6(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory (4M) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 2: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 3 to 7; Not used
6804E7(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
6804EE(H) - Machine code (Check ram 3)
680500(H) - Start address of G3 table for G3-1
680800 to 68081F(H) - Service station's fax number (SP3-101)
680820 to 680829(H) - Own fax PABX extension number – Not used
68082A to 680833(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used
680834 to 680847(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used
680848 to 680853(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
680854 to 68085F(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
680860 to 68086B(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
68086C to 680877(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6808A0 to 6808B7(H) - G4TID registered information (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6808B8 to 6808CB(H) - ISDN CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
6808CC(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex)
6808D1 to 6808D4(H) - ISDN G3 sub address registered information
6808D5 to 6808D8(H) - G4 sub address registered information
6808DE to 6808E2 – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
6808DE(H) - Suffix (BCD)

6808DF(H) - Version (BCD)
FAX OPTION
6808E0(H) - Year (BCD)
D255/D256
6808E1(H) - Month (BCD)
6808E2(H) - Day (BCD)
6808E3 to 6808E7 – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
6808E3(H) - Suffix (BCD)
6808E4(H) - Version (BCD)
6808E5(H) - Year (BCD)
6808E6(H) - Month (BCD)
6808E7(H) - Day (BCD)
6808E8(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
6808EA(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)
6808EC(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)
6808F8(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
68094E(H) - Time for economy transmission (Not used)
68094F(H) - Time for economy transmission (Not used)
68096A(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096B(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096C(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096D(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096E(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
68096F(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
680980(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
680982(H) - Machine serial number (ASCII)
687178 to 68717B(H) - Transmission counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
68717C to 68717F(H) - Reception counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6871E8 to 6871EB(H) - Mail transmission counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6871EC to 6871EF(H) - Mai reception counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6A6DEE(H) to 6A70ED(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
6A6DEE(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6E6E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6EEE(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6F6E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6FEE(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A706E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A70EE(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A716E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A71EE(H) - Alias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A726E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A72EE(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A736E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
6A8F2A(H) - NGN initial setting method 0: Simple, 1: Manual
6A8F2B(H) - SIP digest authentication user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A8FAB(H) - NGN-SIP domain name (Max. 64 characters - ASCII)
6A8FEB(H) - NGN-home gateway address (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A906C(H) - Stand-by port number for H.323 connection
6A906E(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A9070(H) - RAS port number
6A9072(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A9074(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A9076(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A9078(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A9079(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A907A(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A907B(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6B3AE4(H) - 6B3B04 (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]
6B3AE4(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6B3AE5(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)
6B3AE6(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)
6B3AE7(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)
6B3AE8(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6B3AE9 to 6B3AEA – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
Area 6B35A9 6B35AA
NA F4 01
EU F4 01
ASIA F4 01
6B3AEB(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
FAX OPTION
6B3AEC(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
D255/D256
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11

Overview
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
5.1 OVERVIEW
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller
board. Also, the FCU contains the ROM, SRAM and NCU circuits.

Boards
5.2 BOARDS
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
5.2.1 FCU
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base
copier's engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3.5 (Fax Application Control Engine)

 CPU
 Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
 DMA control
 Clock generation
 DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME2)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
 SAF memory: 4MB
 Working memory: 4MB
 Page memory: 4MB
 The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.

Boards
SAF Memory Back-up

A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 12 hours.
ROM
4 MB flash ROMs for system software storage
SRAM
The 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery.
SRAM Back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in case
the base copier's main power switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
CPU
This controls the energy-efficient operation of the FCU board.

Video Data Path
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The BiCU
processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
 When scanning a fax original, the BiCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit's scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to
store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory
before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or
reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.

Video Data Path
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal.
The BiCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
 When scanning a fax original, the BiCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit's scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The
NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the
QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page
memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
5.3.2 RECEPTION
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data
goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be

Video Data Path
done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the BiCU.
FAX OPTION
JBIG Reception
D255/D256
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and
transferred to the BiCU.

Fax Communication Features
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES
5.4.1 DOCUMENT SERVER
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The BiCU video
processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses
the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation will be done, the image is
rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU decompresses the
image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax application. The stored
documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times. More than
one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be
transmitted.
 When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
 The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
 Up to 9,000 pages can be stored (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax application.
 Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
 Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as "FAX001". But it is possible to
change the file name, user name and password.
 Up to 30 files can be selected at once.

FAX OPTION
 The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy application. The
D255/D256
storing time is longer than the copier storing.
 When selecting "Print 1st page", the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.
5.4.2 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION
Mail Transmission
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532). The difference
between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.
Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode
Resolution 200 x 100 200 x100

200 x 200 200 x 200
200 x 400
400 x 400 (if available)
RX Paper Width A4, 8.5" x 14" A4, B4, A3
RX Data Compression Method MH MH (default), MR, MMR
Signals Image data Image data transmission,

transmission only exchange of capability
information between the two
terminals, and
acknowledgement of receipt of
fax messages
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination

Field Content
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content Type Multipart/mixed

Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how

files are attached to e-mail messages)
Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP
server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)
For example:
e-mail address: gts@ricoh.co.jp
SMTP server address: gts.abcd.com
In this case, this feature destination e-mail address (gts@ricoh.co.jp) is read as the SMTP server
address "gts.abcd.com", and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
 With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm
conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super
Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.
 The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the
same as for G3 fax memory TX.
 The default compression is TIFF-F format.
 IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
 IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

SMTP Authentication:
 User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > File Transfer > SMTP Authentication

POP Before SMTP:
FAX OPTION
 User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > File Transfer > POP Before SMTP
D255/D256
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
 POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
 IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
 For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable in the
range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
 User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > File Transfer > E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
1. The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server, and the
address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
2. To enable SMTP reception: User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > File Transfer
> Reception Protocol
 Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received with
SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
 However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX
record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting:
User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > File Transfer > Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1. The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
User Tools > Machine Features > Facsimile Features > Reception Settings > SMTP RX File
Delivery Settings
2. If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from
designated senders, the machine's "Auth. E-mail RX" feature must be set (User Tools>
Machine Features > Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings > SMTP RX File Delivery Settings).
3. If the "SMTP RX File Delivery Setting" is set to "0" to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is
mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools > Machine
Features > Facsimile Features > E-mail Settings > SMTP RX File Delivery Settings)
4. If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost, and

the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using
the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1. Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
2. Conditions
 The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
 If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match,
the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an
error. However, in this case an error report is not output.
 If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a
delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase
the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by
e-mail to the sender address (specified in the "From" or "Reply-to" field of the message). If there is
an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after a
certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header Supported Types
Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be

handled, and some garbage may appear in the data.

Header Supported Types
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Content-Transfer- Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Encoding
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is less
than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received when the
SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been printed). The error
handling method for this type of error is the same as for "Abnormal files".
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in the
same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to "Abnormal files" above).
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> Machine Features >
System Settings > File Transfer > POP3/IMAP4 Settings > Encryption (set to "On")
Transfer Request: Request By Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC – Internet/LAN
Fax Boards – Transfer Request
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Blind carbon copy
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Content-Type Multipart/mixed
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Field Content
Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01….
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating
the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode > E-mail Options
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject can also be
prefixed with an "Urgent" or "High" notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type
Mail Type Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
Subject Entry Condition

---
Entry
1. "CSI" ("RTI") Fax Message No.

+
No Subject 2. "RTI" CSI not registered
File No.
Entry 3. "CSI" RTI not registered
4. None CSI, RTI not registered
1. "CSI" ("RTI") Normal:

Return Receipt
(dispatched).
2. "RTI" CSI not registered You can select

Confirmation "displayed" with IFAX
From
of Reception SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
3. "CSI" RTI not registered Error:

Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)

Mail Type Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated for
Mail delivery, delivery
memory RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3

transfer, sender memory Fax Message No. +
From
SMTP File Number
receiving Mail address
Memory sending
and delivery of sender
SMTP receiving and

Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
Items 1, 2, and 3 in the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools > Machine Features >
System Settings > File Transfer > Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
Limitations on Entries
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters

Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

Fax Boards – E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or
not. This function is enabled only when "I-FAX switch 02 Bit 4" is set to "1". This confirmation is
done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as
MDN):
2. Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options
3. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
4. Send confirmation of mail reception
5. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party's machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met:
 The other party's machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
 The other party's machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -
The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1. The "Disposition Notification To" field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in
the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and
2. Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H])
Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:
Normal reception: "Return Receipt (dispatched)" in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) "Return Receipt (displayed)" in the Subject line
Error: "Return Receipt (processed/error)" in the Subject line
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender's journal is
annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a "Q" in the Mode column.
2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receiver's
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an "A" in the Mode
column.
3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail

 After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender's journal
FAX OPTION
about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with "OK" in the Result
D255/D256
column.
 When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an "E" in the Result
column.
 The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate
communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of "OK" or "E" in the Result
column.
 If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination;
the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See "How to set up Mail Delivery"),
the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For
example, if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of
the communication with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the
first 4 destinations are not shown.
Exceptions: If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,
even if subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the
first error only.
Report Sample

IP-Fax
5.5 IP-FAX
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?

Fax Boards – IP-FAX
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT

TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW 00 Bit
1.
UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01
0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher
setting if too many transmission errors
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Level
are occurring on the network.
0 0 0 0 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network,
raise this setting on the T.30 machine.
0 0 0 1 1
Increasing the delay time allows the
0 0 1 0 2 recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the
0 0 1 1 3
number of redundant packets.
Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
5.5.3 SETTINGS
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage, 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)

General Specifications
6. SPECIFICATIONS
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1.1 FCU
Item Spec.
Type: Desktop type transceiver
PSTN
Circuit:
PABX
Connection Direct couple
 Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 356 mm (14.0 inch)
Maximum Width: 216 mm (8.5 inch)
Original Size:
 ARDF (Face up)
Maximum Length: 356 mm (14.0 inch)
Maximum Width: 216 mm (8.5 inch)
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 8 × 7.7

Resolution:
lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character)
3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution (JBIG

Transmission Time:
transmission: 2 seconds)
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
TCM: V.34, V.17

QAM: V.29, V.17
Modulation:
PhM: V27ter
FSK: V.8, V21
33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 / 19,200 /

Data Rate: 16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 / 4,800 / 2,400 bps (auto
shift down system)

General Specifications
Item Spec.
With ECM: 0 ms/line

I/O Rate:
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
 SAF: 4 MB
Memory Capacity:
 Page Memory: 4 MB
6.1.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows the capabilities of each programmable items.
Item Maximum Value
Number of destinations you can register in the address book 2000
Number of groups you can register 100
Number of destinations you can register in a group 500
Number of destinations you can register into a keystroke program 500
Number of programs you can register in a group 100
Number of communication results you can check on this machine 200
Number of special senders you can register 250
Number of documents you can store in memory for memory

800
transmission
Number of pages you can send for memory transmission 1000
Number of pages you can store in memory for memory transmission

*1
320
*1: Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution, auto image
density mode, and Text mode.

IFAX Specifications
6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
Item Spec.
 Standard: Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10

Connectivity: BASE-T)
 Optional: IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
200 × 100 dpi (Standard resolution), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail

Resolution:
resolution)
1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Transmission Time:
Resolution: 200 × 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Document Size: Maximum Original Size: A4
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

E-mail File Format: Attached file fomrs: TIFF-F (MH, MR*, MMR*)
*: Full mode
Transmission: SMTP, TCP/IP

Protocol:
Reception: POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
1000 Mbps (1000 Base-T), 100 Mbps (100 Base-Tx), 10 Mbps

Data Rate:
(10 Base-T)
Authentication
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Method:
The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before

installation. Any client PCs connected to the machine through a
Remark:
LAN must also be e-mail clients, or some features will not work
(e.g. Autorouting).

IP-FAX Specifications
6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Item Spec.
Network:  Standard: Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10

BASE-T)
 Optional: IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Scan line density: 200 × 100dpi (standard character), 200 × 200dpi (detail
character)
Maximum Original A4 (SEF), 81/2" × 14" (SEF)

size:
Maximum scanning 216 mm × 356 mm (8.5" × 14.0")

size:
Transmission Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP (RFC

protocol: 3261 compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible IP-Fax compatible machines

machines:
IP-Fax transmission Specify IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax
function: through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a
function: network.
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.

Fax Unit Configuration
6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
FAX OPTION
D255/D256
No. Component
1 FCU
2 Speaker

MP 501 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MP 501 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MP 501 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D255/D256/M281/M282

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2016 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh USA, Inc.

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 4-1

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................. 5-1

7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................ 7-1

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

Flat Flexible Cable

SEF Short Edge Feed [A]

LEF Long Edge Feed [B]

1.1.1 MAIN MACHINE

No. Item Machine Code

No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310

2 Caster Table Type M24 D3C7-01 Yes Yes

XPS Direct Print Option Type

No. Item Machine Code MP 501/601 SP 5300/5310

Extended USB Board Type

IEEE 1284 Interface Board

IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type

File Format Converter Type

Enhanced Security HDD

Hard Disk Drive Option Type

- NFC Card Reader Type M24 D3CP-08 Yes No

Optional Counter Interface

*1 You can attach up to four paper feed units.

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

 White area: permissible range

2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1. Rear: Over 300 mm (11.9")

2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS

 [A]: 420 mm (16.6")

2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS

2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

2.2.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART

(For MP 501/601 only)

2.2.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

5 Telephone cable with ferrite core 1 - -

9 Manual: Read This First 1 1 -

10 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 1 -

11 Manual: Initial Guide for FAX 1 1 -

13 Manual: Start Guide 1 - 1

14 Caution Sheet: Operation panel 1 1 1

15 Caution Sheet: NFC tag 2 2 2

Sheet: EULA (End User License

19 Sheet: Safety Information - - 1

20 Sheet: User Registration 1 - -

21 Sheet: Help Desk Card 1 - -

1 Decal: Paper grade 1 - - -

2 Sheet: Safety Information - 1 - -

7 Manual: Read This First 1 1 1 1

8 Sheet: Quick Installation Guide 1 2 1 1

9 Sheet: Eco Night 1 1 1 1